Fanuc Hardware Connection MNL, GFZ 036867291

www.plcworld.
cn
GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 16i / 18i / 21i / 20i / 160i / 180i / 210i /

160is / 180is / 210is - Model A
Connection Manual (Hardware)
GFZ-63003EN/04 July 2000

www.plcworld.cn
GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may
be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which
are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no
obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
©Copyright 2000 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–1
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 PREFACE
PREFACE
This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required

for connecting the CNC control unit to a machine tool. The manual
outlines the components commonly used for FANUC CNC control units,
as shown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2, and supplies
additional information on using these components. Refer to individual
manuals for the detailed specifications of each component.
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are :

Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC Series 16i–TA 16i–TA

Series 16i
FANUC Series 16i–MA 16i–MA

Series 18i

Series 21i

Series 20i
FANUC Series 20i–FA 20i–FA

Series 160i

Series 180i

Series 210i
FANUC Series 160is–TA 160is–TA

Series 160is
FANUC Series 160is–MA 160is–MA

Series 180is

Series 210is
p–1
www.plcworld.cn
PREFACE B–63003EN/04
Organization of this This manual consists of chapters 1 to 15 and appendixes at the end of the
manuals book.
Chapter and title Contents
Chapter 1 Provides general information related to the connection of the i Series CNC, as well as an
CONFIGURATION introduction to detailed information.
Chapter 2 Describes how to connect peripheral units to the i Series CNC.

TOTAL CONNECTION DAIGRAMS
Chapter 3 Describes the installation requirements for using the i Series CNC.
INSTALLATION 1) Required power supply capacity
2) Heat output
3) Locations of connectors on the control unit
4) Action against noise
Chapter 4 Describes how to make connections related to the power supply of the i Series CNC.
POWER SUPPLAY CONNECTION
Chapter 5 Describes how to connect the following peripheral devices to the i Series CNC:
CONNECTION TO CNC PERIOHERALS 1) MDI unit
2) I/O device (RS–232–C)
3) High–speed skip (HDI)
Chapter 6 Describes how to connect spindle–related units to the i Series CNC.

SPINDLE CONNECTION
Chapter 7 Describes how to connect servo–related units to the i Series CNC.

SERVO INTERFACE
Chapter 8 Describes the interface unique to the i Series CNC that offers built–in personal computer
CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE capabilities.
Chapter 9 Describes how to connect a FANUC Intelligent terminal type 2 to the i Series CNC.
FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
Chapter 10 Describes how to connect machine interface I/O with the FANUC I/O Link.
CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
Chapter 11 Describes how to handle the emergency stop signal.

EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL Be sure to read this chapter.
Chapter 12 Describes the remote buffer, DNC1, and DNC2 interfaces that can be used with the i Series CNC.
REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
Chapter 13 Describes the high–speed serial bus (HSSB) that can be used with the i Series CNC.
HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
Chapter 14 Describes how to connect the i Series CNC to networks.

CONNECTION TO OTHER NET–WORKS
Chapter 15 Describes the connection unique to Series 160is/180is/210is of the integrated type.
CONNECTING TO THE INTERGRATED
TYPE Series 160is/180is/210is
APPENDIX A) EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

B) 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
C) CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
D) OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
E) LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
F) MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
G) ABOUT the MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
p–2
www.plcworld.cn
Related manuals
– Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/ The table below lists manuals related to MODEL A of Series 16i, Series
180i/210i/160is/180is 18i, Series 21i Series 160i and Series 180i, Series 210i .
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
List of the Manuals Related to Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is
Specification
Manual name
number
DESCRIPTIONS B–63002EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (Hardware) B–63003EN *

CONNECTION MANUAL (Function) B–63003EN–1
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–TA OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63004EN
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63014EN
Series 21i/210i–TA OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63084EN
Series 21i/210i–MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63094EN
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i–MODEL A PARAMETER MANUAL B–63010EN
Series 21i/210i–MODEL A PARAMETER MANUAL B–63010EN
MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–61803E–1
FAPT MACRO COMPILER (For Personal Computer) PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–66102E
FANUC PMC–MODEL SA1/SA5 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B–61863
FANUC PMC–MODEL SC/NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B–61863–1
FAPT LADDER–II OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–66184EN
FANUC Super CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63284EN
FANUC Super CAPi M OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63294EN
FANUC Symbol CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63304EN
FANUC Symbolic CAP T Basic Module V1 OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62824EN
FANUC Symbolic CAP T C/Y–axis Module V1 OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62824E–1
FANUC DATA SERVER OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62694EN
FANUC I/O Link–II CONNECTION MANUAL B–62714EN
FANUC Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63354EN
p–3
www.plcworld.cn
PREFACE B–63003EN/04
– Series 20i The table below lists manuals related to MODEL–A of Series 20i.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
Manuals Related
Specification
Manual name
Number
DESCRIPTIONS B–63002EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–63003EN *

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–63003EN–1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For LATHE) B–63374EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For MILLING) B–63384EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Machining Guidance B–62204E–1

(For LATHE)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Machining Guidance B–62174E–1

(For MILLING)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–63005EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B–63380EN
PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–61803E–1

(Macro Compiler /Macro Executer)
p–4
www.plcworld.cn
Related manuals of
SERVO MOTOR Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR α series, β series
α series, β series
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65142E
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series PARAMETER MANUAL B–65150E
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65152E
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series B–65160E

PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65162E
FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–65165E
FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series DESCRIPTIONS B–65232EN
FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–65235EN
FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series (I/O Link Option) B–65245EN

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Related manuals of
Loader control option Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC Series 21/16/160/18/180/16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i B–62443EN–2
LOADER CONTROL CONNECTION MANUAL
Related manuals of
I/O–Unit and other Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A CONNECTION/MAINTENANCE B–61813E
MANUAL
FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B CONNECTION/MAINTENANCE B–62163E

MANUAL
FANUC I/O Link–II CONNECTION MANUAL B–62714EN
FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS B–61782E
FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS B–61992E
Related manuals of
OPEN CNC Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC MMC–IV OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62494E
FANUC OPEN CNC OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62884EN

(LADDER EDITING PACKAGE)

(Basic Operation Package 1 (for Windows 95/NT))

(CNC Screen Display Function)
p–5
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 Table of Contents

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1
1. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1 Configurations of LCD–mounted Type Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.2 Configurations of Stand–alone Type Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2 POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.2.1 Power Supply Capacities of CNC–related Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF THE MACHINE TOOL
MAGNETIC CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.4 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4.1 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4.2 Heat Output of Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.4.3 Thermal Design of Operator’s Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.5 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.5.1 Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.5.2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.5.3 Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.5.4 Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.5.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.5.6 Measures Against Surges due to Lightning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.6 CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.6.1 Installation of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.6.2 Installing the Stand–alone Type Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.7 CABLING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.8 DUSTPROOF MEASURES FOR CABINETS AND PENDANT BOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2 TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.2.1 Power Supply for the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.2.2 +24V Input Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.2.3 Power–on Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.2.4 Power–off Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.3 CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.4 BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.4.1 Battery for Memory Backup (3VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
c–1
www.plcworld.cn
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63003EN/04
4.4.2 Battery in the Intelligent Terminal (3 VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

4.4.3 Battery for Separate Absolute Pulse Coders (6VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.4.4 Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6 VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

5.1 CONNECTION OF MDI UNIT (LCD–MOUNTED TYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.1.2 Connection to the MDI Unit (LCD–mounted Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.1.3 Connection with the Standard MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.1.4 Key Layout of Separate–type MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.1.5 61–Key MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.1.6 Connecting to the MDI Unit for the FS20i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.2 CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNITS
(FOR THE STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES CNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.2.2 Connection with the 10.4″/9.5″ LCD Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.2.3 Connection with the 7.2″ LCD Unit Via the Display Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.2.4 Connecting to the 7.2″ LCD Unit by the Display Link (Multiple Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.2.5 Connection of the Detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI Unit Via the Display Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.2.6 Connection with an Intelligent Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3 CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.3.2 Connecting I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.3.3 RS–232–C Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.3.4 RS–232–C Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.3.5 FANUC Handy File Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.4 CONNECTING THE HIGH–SPEED SKIP (HDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.4.2 Connection to the High–speed Skip (HDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.4.3 Input Signal Rules for the High–speed Skip (HDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

6.1 SERIAL SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.1.1 Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.1.2 Connecting One to Four Serial Spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.2 ANALOG SPINDLE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.3 POSITION CODER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7. SERVO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

7.1 CONNECTION TO THE SERVO AMPLIFIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
7.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
7.1.2 Interface to the Servo Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
7.1.3 Separate Detector Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.1.4 Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.1.5 Connection of Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.1.6 Linear Scale Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.1.7 Stand–alone Type Pulse Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
c–2
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.8 Input Signal Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

7.1.9 Connection of Battery for Separate Absolute Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
7.1.10 Connection Between the Basic Unit and Expansion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
7.1.11 Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
7.1.12 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7.1.13 Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7.1.14 Connecting the Servo Check Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

8.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.2 CONNECTION OF SERIAL PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.3 CONNECTION OF FDDS (FLOPPY DISK DRIVES) (SIGNAL & POWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.3.1 Use Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
8.3.2 Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
8.4 CONNECTION TO THE FULL–KEYBOARD AND MOUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.4.1 Full Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
8.4.2 Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
8.5 CONNECTION OF HDD (HARD DISK DRIVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
8.6 CONNECTION OF THE PC INTERFACE CONNECTOR PANEL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
8.6.1 Centronics Parallel Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.6.2 Serial Port 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
8.7 ISA EXPANSION UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8.7.1 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8.7.2 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

9.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
9.2 CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
9.3 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
9.4 GENERAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
9.4.1 Intelligent Terminal Having Neither Soft Keys nor a Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
9.4.2 Intelligent Terminal Having Soft Keys but No Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9.4.3 Intelligent Terminal Having a Touch Panel but No Soft Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
9.5 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
9.5.1 Installation Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
9.5.2 Power Supply Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
9.5.3 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
9.6 INSTALLATION SPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
9.7 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
9.7.1 Connector Layout Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
9.7.2 Main Power Supply Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
9.7.3 Floppy Disk Drive (Signal and Power Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
9.7.3.1 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
9.7.3.2 Handling precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
9.7.4 High–speed Serial Bus (HSSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
9.7.5 Typewriter–style Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
9.7.6 Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
c–3
www.plcworld.cn
9.7.7 Centronics Parallel Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

9.7.8 Serial Port 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.7.9 Serial Port 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
9.7.10 Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
9.8 ISA EXPANSION BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
9.8.1 Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
9.8.2 Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

10.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
10.2 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
10.2.1 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
10.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Fiber Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
10.2.3 Connection when Two Channels of FANUC I/O Links are Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
10.3 UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED USING FANUC I/O Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
10.4 CONNECTION OF CONNECTOR PANEL I/O MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
10.4.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
10.4.2 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
10.4.3 Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
10.4.4 DI/DO Connector Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
10.4.5 DI (Input Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
10.4.6 DO (Output Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
10.4.7 DI/DO Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
10.4.8 2A Output Connector Pin Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
10.4.9 2A DO (Output Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
10.4.10 2A Output DO Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
10.4.11 Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
10.4.12 Analog Input Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
10.4.13 Analog Input Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
10.4.14 Analog Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
10.4.15 Manual Pulse Generator Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
10.4.16 Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.4.17 Connecting to the Manual Pulse Generator on the FS20i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
10.4.18 Connection of Basic and Extension Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
10.4.19 Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
10.4.20 Other Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
10.4.21 Distribution I/O Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
10.5 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O MODULE (FOR MATRIX INPUT) . . . . . . . . . . 261
10.5.1 Overall Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
10.5.2 Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
10.5.3 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
10.5.4 DI (General–purpose Input Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
10.5.5 DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
10.5.8 External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
10.5.9 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
c–4
www.plcworld.cn
10.5.10 Other Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

10.6 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O MODULE AND POWER
MAGNETICS CABINET I/O MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
10.6.2 Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
10.6.3 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
10.6.4 DI (General–purpose Input Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
10.6.7 External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
10.6.8 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
10.6.9 Other Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
10.7 CONNECTION OF MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
10.7.1 Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
10.7.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
10.7.3 Signal Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
10.7.4 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
10.7.5 PMC Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
10.7.6 Major Connection Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
10.7.7 State of the LEDs on the Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
10.7.8 Connector (on the Cable Side) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
10.7.9 Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit Dimension Diagram
(Including Connector Locations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
10.7.10 Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit Mounting Dimension Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
10.7.11 Fuse Mounting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
10.8 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
10.8.1 Input Signal Regulations for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
10.8.2 Output Signal Regulations for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
10.8.3 Connector Layout for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
10.8.4 External View of Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
10.9 CONNECTION OF SOURCE OUTPUT TYPE CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
10.9.1 Input Signal Specifications for Source Output Type Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
10.9.2 Output Signal Specifications for Source Output Type Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
10.9.3 Connector Pin Layout for Source Output Type Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
10.9.4 Dimensions of Source Output Type Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
10.10 FANUC I/O LINK CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
10.10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
10.10.2 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
10.10.3 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
10.10.3.1 I/O Link interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
10.11 CONNECTING THE FANUC SERVO UNIT β SERIES WITH I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
10.11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
10.11.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
10.11.3 Maximum Number of Units that can be Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
10.11.4 Address Assignment by Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
10.12 CONNECTION OF THE DISTRIBUTION I/O MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . 344
10.12.1 Differences between the FS0 Standard Machine Operator’s Panel and Distribution
I/O Machine Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
c–5
www.plcworld.cn

10.12.3 Connector Mounting Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
10.12.4 Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
10.12.5 Emergency Stop Signal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
10.12.6 General–purpose DI Signal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
10.12.7 General–purpose DO Signal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
10.12.9 Relay Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
10.12.10 Keyboard Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
10.12.11 Other Signal Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
10.12.12 Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
10.12.13 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
10.12.14 Other Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
10.12.15 Operator’s Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
11. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2) . . . . . . 378
12.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
12.2 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–232–C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
12.3 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
12.4 DNC2 INTERFACE (RS–232–C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
12.5 DNC1 INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
12.5.1 Multipoint Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
12.5.2 Point–to–point Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
13. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

13.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
13.2 CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
13.3 CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
13.4 PERSONAL COMPUTER SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
13.5 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
13.6 PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING PERSONAL COMPUTER INTERFACE BOARDS . . . . . . . . 392
13.7 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
13.8 RECOMMENDED CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
14. CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
15. CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE Series 160is/180is/210is . . . . . . . . . 396

15.1 OVERALL CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
15.2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
15.2.1 Names of Control Unit Parts and Connector Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
15.2.2 Installation Environment Conditions of Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
15.3 CONNECTING TO PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
15.3.1 Backup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
15.3.2 Ethernet (10Base–T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
c–6
www.plcworld.cn
15.3.3 Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

B.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
B.2 ADDITIONAL TARGET MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
B.3 BOARD–MOUNTED CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
B.3.1 Vertical–type Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
B.3.2 Straight and Right–angled Connectors (for Spring and Screw–fixing Connector Housings) . 474
B.4 CABLE CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
B.5 RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE HOUSINGS, AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
E. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

G.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
G.2 COMPARISON BETWEEN MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
AND Pentium VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
G.3 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
G.3.1 Connector Positions (Basic Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
G.3.2 HDD Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
G.3.3 PC Separate Wiring Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
G.3.4 Connecting the HDD Unit and PC Separate Wiring Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
G.4 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
c–7
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 1. CONFIGURATION
1 CONFIGURATION
1
www.plcworld.cn
1. CONFIGURATION B–63003EN/04
1.1 The i series control units are divided into two types: the LCD–mounted
type and stand–alone type.
CONTROL UNIT
CONFIGURATION LCD–mounted type control units have a built–in display. Stand–alone
AND COMPONENT type control units have a separate display unit. In the following sections,
NAMES the LCD–mounted type is also referred to as the LCD–mounted type, and
the stand–alone type is also referred to as the stand–alone type.
The configuration and component names of each type are shown in the
figures given below. This manual explains how to attach the connectors
shown in these figures to devices. The numbers in parentheses () in the
figures are keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in this manual.
The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
1.1.1 Series 16i/18i/21i/20i LCD–mounted type control units (A circle in the

table denotes that a unit is available.)
Configurations of
LCD–mounted Type Expan- Re-
Display Soft key 16i 18i 21i 20i
Control Units sion slot marks
8.4″ TFT color None 5+2 f f f f

LCD
2 5+2 f f f f (*1)
3 5+2 f f (*1)
4 5+2 f f (*1)
10.4″ TFT None 10+2 f f f

color LCD
2 10+2 f f f (*1)
3 10+2 f f (*1)
4 10+2 f f (*1)
10.4″ TFT None None f f f

color LCD
(with touch 2 None f f f (*1)
panel)
3 None f f (*1)
4 None f f (*1)
7.2″ STN None 5+2 f f f

monochrome
LCD 2 5+2 f f f (*1)
3 5+2 f f (*1)
4 5+2 f f (*1)
9.5″ STN None 10+2 f f f

monochrome
LCD 2 10+2 f f f (*1)
3 10+2 f f (*1)
4 19+2 f f (*1)
2
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
1 The same LCD–mounted type control units as those of the
Series 16i/18i/21i are used in the Series 160i/180i/210i
when an HSSB interface board is inserted into an option slot
to connect an intelligent terminal.
Series 160i/180i/210i LCD–mounted type control units (A circle denotes

that a unit is available.)
Expan- Re-
Display Soft key 160i 180i 210i
sion slot marks
10.4″ TFT None None f f f (*2)

color LCD
2 None f f f (*2)
3 None f f (*2)
4 None f f (*2)
10.4″ TFT None 10+2 f f f (*2)

color LCD
2 10+2 f f f (*2)
3 10+2 f f (*2)
4 10+2 f f (*2)
10.4″ TFT None None f f f (*2)

color LCD
(with touch 2 None f f f (*2)
panel)
3 None f f (*2)
4 None f f (*2)
NOTE
2 These control units are Series 160i/180i/210i control units
incorporating PC functions.
3
www.plcworld.cn
1.1.2 Series 16i/18i/21i stand–alone type control units (A circle in the table
Configurations of denotes that a unit is available.)
The stand–alone type control unit is not available on the Series 20i.
Stand–alone Type
Control Units Slot rack name
Expansion Mini
16i 18i 21i
Re-
slot slot marks
Single–slot rack None 2 f f f (*NOTE)
3–slot rack 2 4 f f f (*NOTE)
NOTE
All the stand–alone type control units of the Series
160i/180i/210i are designed to connect an intelligent
terminal by inserting an HSSB interface board into a mini
slot. These control units are the same as those of the Series
16i/18i/21i.
Series 16i/18i/21i display units (A circle in the table denotes that a unit
is available.)
Soft Graphic Re-
Display 160i 180i 210i
key display marks
10.4″ TFT color LCD 10+2 Provided f f f
10.4″ TFT color LCD

None Provided f f f
(with touch panel)
9.5″ STN
10+2 Provided f f f
monochrome LCD
9.5″ STN
10+2 None f f f
monochrome LCD
Series 160i/180i/210i display units (intelligent terminals) (A circle

denotes that a unit is available.)
Display Soft key 160i 180i 210i Remarks
10.4″ TFT color LCD None f f f
10.4″ TFT color LCD 10+2 f f f
10.4″ TFT color LCD

None f f f
(with touch panel)
4
www.plcworld.cn
LCD–mounted type control unit
Liquid–crystal
display
Memory card
interface
Soft key switch
NOTE
This figure is a front view of the Series 16i/18i/21i/20i
LCD–mounted type control unit with an 8.4″ TFT color
liquid–crystal display. The configurations of other control
units are basically the same as that shown above.
5
www.plcworld.cn
LCD–mounted type control unit Fan unit
Battery (4.4)
Unit rear panel
Fuse
Power supply
connector (4)
Softkey (5.1)
Serial spindle or
position
coder connector (6)
I/O Link
connector (9)
Analog spindle or
high–speed skip
connector (6) (5.3)
I/O device
interface
connector (5.2)
Servo motor
(FSSB) (7)
Servo check
board connector
(7)
MDI connector
(5.1)
NOTE
This figure is a rear view of the Series 16i/18i/21i/20i LCD–mounted type control unit without
option slots. The configurations of the other control units of the Series 16i/18i/21i/20i and the
Series 160i/180i/210i LCD–mounted type control units with HSSB are basically the same as
that shown above.
6
www.plcworld.cn
I/O device
interface
connector (5.2)
JD36B (right)
Fan unit
Servo motor
(FSSB) (7)
[COP10A]
Battery (4.4)
Analog spindle or
high–speed skip
connector (6) (5.3)
Unit rear panel [JA40]
I/O Link
connector (10)
[JD1A]
Serial spindle or
position coder
connector (6)
[JA41]
Fuse
Power supply
connector (4)
[CP1A (right)]
[CP1B (left)]
Soft key (5.1)
FDD power
supply (8.3)
[CN2]
Servo check
board connector
(7) [CA54] Full keyboard
(8.4)
[CD32]
MDI connector
(5.1)
[CA55] Mouse (8.4)
[CD3B]
PC extension
(8.6)
FDD signal (8.3)
[CNY1]
[CD34]
PC side
RS–232C, 1st
HDD (8.5)
channel (8.2)
[CNH1]
[JD33]
NOTE
This figure shows a rear view of the Series 160i/180i/210i control unit with no option slot having
a 10.4″ TFT color LCD and incorporating PC functions.
7
www.plcworld.cn
Rear of unit
Option board
For remote buffer, DNC1, or DNC2
RS–422
connector (12)
[JD6A]
RS–232C
connector (12)
[JD28A]
Rear of unit
Option board
For HSSB board
HSSB optical
connector (13)
[COP7]
8
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
1 The above figures are rear views of a LCD–mounted type
control unit with option slots. The configurations of the
option slot portions of other LCD–mounted type control
units are the same as in the above figures.
2 When a loader control board is used, refer to the loader
control connection manual.
3 The optional functions shown below use option boards.
These option boards do not have connectors for connecting
external devices.
DC
D Symbol CAPi T
D RISC
9
www.plcworld.cn
Rear side of unit

Option board
For sub–CPU card
Analog output
connector (6)
[JA40]
Connector for
serial spindle/
position coder (6)
Servo unit Servo check board [JA41]
connector (FSSB) connector
(7) [COP10A] (Near side) (Far side) (7) [CA54]
Rear side of unit

Option board
For data server board
Data server AUI

interface connector
(14) [CD27)
IDE hard disk

connector (14)
[CNH1]
NOTE
The above figures are rear views of a LCD–mounted type
control unit with option slots. The configurations of the
option slot portions of other LCD–mounted type control
units are the same as in the above figures.
10
www.plcworld.cn
Stand–alone type control unit
Battery
(4.4)
Status display LED
I/O unit interface

connector (5.2)
[JD5A, JD5B]
Battery I/O link connector

(4.4) Slot 3 Slot 2 (10) [JD1A]
Connector for analog

Memory card spindle or high–speed
interface skip (6) (5.3) [JA40]
Connector for serial

spindle or position
coder (6) [JA41]
Connector for CRT

link and MDI (5)
[JD45]
Power supply
Mini slot connector (4)
Slot 12 [CP1A, CP1B]
LED indicator for

maintenance
Mini slot Rotary switch for

Slot 11 maintenance
LCD connector (5)

[COP20A]
Servo check board

connector (7)
[CA54]
Servo unit (FSSB)

Mini slot Mini slot GND connection
connector (7)
Slot 10 Slot 9 terminal
[COP10A]
11
www.plcworld.cn
Sub–CPU board
Connector for analog

spindle or high–speed
skip (6) (5.3) [JA40]
Connector for serial

spindle or position
coder (6) [JA41]
Mini slots Servo check board

connector (7) [CA54]
Servo unit (FSSB)

connector (7)
[COP10A]
12
www.plcworld.cn
Stand–alone type control unit (mini slots)
HSSB board
HSSB optical
connector (13)
C board
The C board has

no connector.
Remote buffer, DNC2 board
RS–232C
connector (12)
Remote buffer, DNC2 board
RS–422 connector
(12)
DNC1 board
RS–485 connector
(12)
13
www.plcworld.cn
LCD unit for stand–alone type control unit
Liquid–crystal
display
Memory card
interface
Soft key switch
Connector for MDI

connection (5) [CA55]
I/O unit interface

connector (5) [JD36A]
Power supply connector

LCD connector (5) (5) GND connection
[COP20B] Fuse [CPIA (right)] terminal
[CPIB (left)]
14
www.plcworld.cn
1.2
HARDWARE
OVERVIEW
Serial communication board Loader control board Mother board
Remote buffer/ Loader control function CPU for controlling CNC

DNC1/DNC2/HDLC · 2–/4–axis control · Power supply
· 2–axis to 8–axis control
· Spindle interface
· LCD/MDI
Sub–CPU board Data server board · I/O link
· PMC–SB5/SB6
Sub–CPU for 2–path control Data server function · Analog output/high–
· 2–axis to 8–axis control speed DI
· Spindle interface · RS–232C × 2
· Analog output · Memory card interface
RISC board
· PC functions
High–precision contour control (for Series 160i
function with PC functions)
C board
C functions for PMC

HSSB interface board Basic system
High–speed serial bus
CAP II board interface (for Series 160i only)
Graphic conversation
Options
The following types of units are

available:
D Unit without option slots
D Unit having two option slots
D Unit having three option slots
D Unit having four option slots
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted. (On a unit
having four option slots, only a data server board or HSSB interface board can fit into the slot furthest from the
LCD. On a unit having three option slots, only one of the above mentioned boards can fit into the center slot.)
Fig. 1.2 (a) Configuration of the LCD–mounted type control unit (Series 16i/160i)
15
www.plcworld.cn
Serial communication board CAP II board Mother board
Remote buffer/ Graphic conversation CPU for controlling CNC

DNC1/DNC2/HDLC · Power supply
Loader control board · LCD/MDI
Sub–CPU board · I/O link
Loader control function · PMC–SB5/SB6
· 2–/4–axis control · Analog output/high–
Sub–CPU for 2–path control
· 2–axis to 6–axis control speed DI
· Spindle interface · RS–232C × 2
· Analog output · Memory card interface
Data server board
· PC functions
Data server function (for Series 180i with
PC functions)
C board
C functions for PMC
HSSB interface board Basic system
High–speed serial bus inter-

face (for Series 210i only)
Options
The following types of units are available:

D Unit without option slots
D Unit having two option slots
D Unit having three option slots
D Unit having four option slots
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted. (On a unit
having four option slots, only a data server board or HSSB interface board can fit into the slot furthest from the
LCD. On a unit having three option slots, only one of the above mentioned boards can fit into the center slot.)
Fig. 1.2 (b) Configuration of the LCD–mounted type control unit (Series 18i/180i)
16
www.plcworld.cn
Serial communication board Symbol CAP iT board Mother board

Remote buffer/ Graphic conversation CPU for controlling CNC
DNC1/DNC2/HDLC · Power supply
Loader control board · LCD/MDI
C board (for T system only) · I/O link
· PMC–SA1/SA5
C functions for PMC · Analog output/high–
Loader control function
speed DI
· 2–/4–axis control
· RS–232C × 2
· Memory card interface
· PC functions
(for Series 210i with
HSSB interface board PC functions)
High–speed serial bus inter-

face (for Series 180i only) Basic system
DATA SERVER board
DATA SERVER function
Options
A control unit without option slots

and a control unit having two
slots are available.
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted.
Fig. 1.2 (c) Configuration of the LCD–mounted type control unit (Series 21i/210i)
17
www.plcworld.cn
Serial communication board Mother board

Remote buffer CPU for controlling CNC
(Only FS20i–FA) · Power supply
· LCD/MDI
· I/O link
· PMC–SA1/SA5
· Analog output
· RS–232C × 2
· Memory card interface
Basic system
Options
A control unit without option slots

and a control unit having two
slots are available.
Two slots are provided only on
the FS20i–FA.
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted.
Fig. 1.2 (d) Configuration of the LCD–mounted type control unit (Series 20i)
18
www.plcworld.cn
Three–slot rack Slot 0 Single–slot rack
Option Option
slot 2 slot 1
Mini slot 12 Mini slot 10 Mini slot 10
Mini slot 11 Mini slot 9 Mini slot 9
Options (mini slot) Options (slot 3) Options (slot 2) Basic system (slot 1)
HSSB interface Sub–CPU board RISC board
board Main board
(for 16i/18i only) (for 16i/18i only)
High–speed serial CPU for controlling CNC
bus interface Sub–CPU for High–precision · Power supply
2–path control contour control · Axis control
· Axis control function · Spindle control
· Spindle control · LCD/MDI control
C board
· Analog output DATA SERVER · I/O link control
board · PMC control
C functions for PNC · Analog output/high–speed DI
DATA SERVER control
function · Serial communication control
Serial communication (RS–232–C)
board Loader control · Memory card control
board
Remote buffer/
DN1/DNC2 Loader control
function
Fig. 1.2 (e) Configuration of the stand–alone type control unit
NOTE
In the above description, the 16i/18i/21i include the 160i/180i/210i, respectively.
19
www.plcworld.cn
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS B–63003EN/04
2 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
20
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
LCD–mounted type control unit (excluding the 160i/180i/210i with PC functions)

Mother board
L 24V–IN(CP1A) 24 VDC power
24V–OUT(CP1B) To I/O unit, etc.

C
MDI UNIT
D Soft key cable
CK2
MDI(CA55) CK1
R232(JD36A) RS–232C I/O unit
R232(JD36B) RS–232C I/O unit
{
Touch panel
Analog output for tool drive
A–OUT&HDI(JA40)
High–speed skip input
Distributed I/O Manual pulse generator

board
DC24V CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD1A) JD1B Operator’s
panel
JD1A
DC24V CPD1 Distributed Power

JD1B I/O board, I/O magnetics
unit, etc. cabinet
JD1A
Position coder for analog spindle

SPDL&POS(JA41)
Circuit breaker
AC reactor
200VAC
200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
CX1A TB2 CX3
PSM CX4
CX1B TB1 JX1B
Position coder
CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A

JA7B SPM JY2
TB2
JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B
To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor
TB2 CX2A JX1A

FSSB(COP10A) COP10B TB2 Axis 1 servo motor
SVM
COP10A JF1
TB1 CX2B JX1B
COP10B Axis 2 servo motor
SVM
COP10A

SVM
COP10A

SVM
COP10A
The maximum allowable number of controlled axes varies with the model. (In this figure, a 1–axis
amplifier is used.)
Separate detector interface unit 1
DC24V CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1
JF102 Linear scale, axis 2
COP10B JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A JF104 Linear scale, axis 4
CNF1 JA4A Absolute scale battery
(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
Separate detector interface unit 2 (cannot be used in 20i/21i/210i)
CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1
SV–CHK(CA54) Servo check board
21
www.plcworld.cn
LCD–mounted type control unit (only for 160i/180i/210i with PC functions)

Soft key
PC–dedicated MDI unit with PC FA full keyboard
cable
MDI unit interface connector
or unit or
CK2
MDI(CA55) CK2
CK1
CK1
(*1) Hard disk CNY2 (*1) Hard disk

HDD(CNH1)
unit unit
Hard disk To
unit CNH1
(*1)
PC PC
parallel channel
port 2 R232
(JD9) (JD36F)
(*1)
PC expansion
Mouse
(for development)
RS–232C I/O unit
Printer, etc.
KEYBOARD(CD32A) { Full keyboard

(for development)
Mouse
(*1) (for development)
MOUSE(CD32B) {
PC channel 1
R232(JD33)
{ Touch panel
RS–232C I/O unit
FDDSIG- FLOPPY DISK

NAL(CD34) DRIVE
FDDPOWER(CN2) (for development)
NOTE
1 The hard disk unit cables, PC interface connector unit cable,
and FA full keyboard cable in the above diagram are
supplied by FANUC.
2 The units to be connected to the control section or unit must
not generate hazardous voltages even if an abnormality
such as malfunction occurs.
22
www.plcworld.cn
LCD–mounted type control unit (only when optional functions are provided)
Serial communication
board
Option slot
Remote buffer board

DNC1 board
DNC2 board
R232–3(JD28A) RS–232C I/O unit (when remote buffer board

or DNC2 board is used)
RS–422 I/O unit (when remote buffer board or

R422–1(JD6A)
DNC1 board is used)
Sub–CPU board
(cannot be used in
21i/210i)
A–OUT(JA40) Analog output for tool drive
Position coder
SPDL&POS(JA41) {
PSM Position coder
Spindle motor
SPM
Servo card To 2nd spindle

Sub axis 1
servo motor
FSSB(COP10A) COP10B
SVM
COP10A
Sub axis 2
servo motor
COP10B
SVM
COP10A
Sub axis 3
servo motor
COP10B
SVM
COP10A
Sub axis 4
servo motor
COP10B
SVM
COP10A
Up to six or eight axes, depending on the model
23
www.plcworld.cn
LCD–mounted type control unit (when optional functions are provided)

Circuit breaker
Loader control board
Option slot
200VAC
200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
CX1A TB2 CX3
PSM CX4
CX1B TB1 CX2B JX1B
TB2 CX2A JX1A

FSSB(COP10A) COP10B Loader axis 1 servo
SVM TB2 motor
COP10A JF1
TB1 CX2B JX1B
Loader axis 2 servo
COP10B SVM motor
COP10A
Loader axis 3 servo

COP10B motor
SVM
COP10A
Loader axis 4 servo

COP10B SVM motor
COP10A
(In this figure, a 1–axis amplifier is used.)
SV–CHK(CA54) Loader control servo check board
Distributed I/O
board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
Operator’s
I/O Link(JD1A) JD1B panel for
JD1A loader
24VDC CPD1 Distributed Power

JD1B I/O board, magnetics
I/O unit, etc. cabinet
JD1A
Data server board

(cannot be used in
21i/210i)
The hard disk unit is mounted on the rear of
HDD(CNH1) the MDI unit.
Hard disk unit
The cable for the hard disk unit is provided
by FANUC.
10BASE5(CD27) Ethernet
HSSB board
(When an intelligent terminal is connected

HSSB(COP7) Personal computer or using the HSSB interface, the model name
intelligentterminal is 160i/180i/210i.)
24
www.plcworld.cn
Stand–alone type control unit (Except Series 20i)

Main board
Slot 0
24V–IN(CP1) 24 VDC power

The soft key cable is
24V–OUT(CP2) To I/O unit attached to the LC control
printed circuit board.
LCD UNIT MDUNIT
Optical fiber cable
LCD(COP20A) COP20B CK2
24VDC CP1A CA55 CK1
CP1B
(Touch panel) Memory card
R232–1(JD5A) RS–232C I/O unit
R232–2(JD5B) RS–232C I/O unit
Analog output for tool drive

A–OUT&HDI(JA40)
High–speed skip input
Distributed Manual pulse generator
I/O board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD1A) JD1B Operator’s
JD1A panel
24VDC CPD1
Distributed Power
JD1B I/O board, magnetics
JD1A I/O unit, etc. cabinet
JD1B Servo motor

β amplifier
JD1A with I/O link
Detachable LCD/MDI
LINK(JD45)
MDI unit
Position coder
SPDL&POS(JA41)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
AC reactor
200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
CX1A TB2 CX3
PSM CX4
CX1B TB1 JX1B
Position coder
CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A

JA7B SPM JY2
TB2
JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B
Servo card
To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor
TB2 CX2A JX1A

FSSB(COP10A) COP10B TB2 Axis 1 servo motor
SVM
COP10A JF1
TB1 CX2B JX1B

SVM
COP10A

SVM
COP10A

SVM
COP10A
Up to six or eight axes, depending on the model (In this figure, a 1–axis amplifier is used.)
24VDC CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1

COP10B JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A JF104 Linear scale, axis 4
CNF1 JA4A Battery for absolute scale

(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
(cannot be used in 21i/210i)
25
www.plcworld.cn
Stand–alone type control unit (Except Series 20i)

Data server board
slot 2
(cannot be used in
21i/210i)
Hard disk unit
Ethernet
slot 3
Sub–CPU board
(cannot be used in
21i/210i)
A–OUT(JA40) Analog output for tool drive
SPDL&POS(JA41) { Position coder
PSM Position coder
Spindle motor
SPM
Servo card
To second spindle
FSSB(COP10A) Sub axis 1

COP10B servo motor
SVM
Optical fiber cable
(*1) COP10A
Sub axis 2
COP10B servo motor
SVM
COP10A
Sub axis 3
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A
Sub axis 4
COP10B servo motor
SVM
COP10A
Up to six or eight axes, depending on the model.
Serial communication *1 With the MT system, this servo interface cannot be used.
Mini slot
board Only the servo interface of the main board can be used.
Remote buffer board
DNC1 board
DNC2 board
R232–3 RS–232C I/O unit (when remote buffer board or DNC2 board is used)
R422–1 RS–422 I/O unit (when remote buffer board or DNC1 board is used)
Ethernet (cannot be
Mini slot
used with 21i/210i)
Ethernet
HSSB board
Mini slot
HSSB(COP7) Personal Computer

Optical fiber cable
26
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 3. INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
27
www.plcworld.cn
3. INSTALLATION B–63003EN/04
3.1 The peripheral units and the control unit have been designed on the
assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In this manual
ENVIRONMENTAL “cabinet” refers to the following:
REQUIREMENTS D Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the
OUTSIDE THE control unit or peripheral units;
CABINET D Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for
housing the control unit or operator’s panel.
D Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall
conform to the following table. Section 3.3 describes the installation and
design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.
LCD–
mounted
type control LCD–mounted
unit and dis- Stand–alone type control
Condition play unit type control unit with PC
(except unit unit and data server
with data functions
server
function)
Operating 0°C to 58°C 0°C to 55°C 5°C to 53°C

Ambient
Tempera- Storage,
ture –20°C to 60°C
Transport
75%RH or less, no con- 10% to 75%RH,

Normal
densation no condensation
Humidity Short period
95%RH or less, no con- 10% to 90%RH,
(less than 1
densation no condensation
month)
Operating 0.5 G or less

Vibration Non–operat-
1.0 G or less
ing
Operating Up to 1000 m Up to 1000 m

Meters
above sea Non–operat-
level Up to 12000 m Up to 12000 m
ing
Normal machine shop environment

Environ- (The environment must be considered if the cabinets are in a loca-
ment tion where the density of dust, coolant, and/or organic solvent is
relatively high.)
28
www.plcworld.cn
3.2
POWER SUPPLY
CAPACITY
3.2.1 The following CNC–related units require an input power supply that
Power Supply satisfies the indicated current capacities with a power supply voltage of
24 VDC "10%. Here, note that momentary voltage changes and ripples
Capacities of are also within "10% of the power supply voltage.
CNC–related Units
Table 3.2.1 (a) Power supply capacity (for LCD–mounted type control units)
Power
Re-
Unit 16i 18i 21i 20i 160i 180i 210i supply
marks
capacity
LCD–mounted Without option slots f f — — f (*3) f (*3) — 1.6A (*1)

type control
unit With 2 option slots f f — — f (*3) f (*3) — 1.7A (*1)
With 3 option slots f f — — f (*3) f (*3) — 1.9A (*1)
With 4 option slots f f — — f (*3) f (*3) — 2.0A (*1)
Without option slots — — f f — — f (*3) 1.5A (*1)
With 2 option slots — — f f — — f (*3) 1.7A (*1)
LCD–mounted Without option slots — — — — f f f 2.1A (*2)

type control
unit (with PC With 2 option slots — — — — f f f 2.3A (*2)
functions)
With 3 option slots — — — — f f — 2.5A (*2)
With 4 option slots — — — — f f — 2.6A (*2)
HSSB board f f f — f f f 0.2A
Sub–CPU board f f — — f f — 0.7A
Loader control board f f f — f f f 0.5A
PMC C f f f — f f f 0.3A
Serial communication board f f f f f f f 0.3A

(remote buffer, DNC1, DNC2)
CAP–II board f f — — f f — 0.5A
Symbol CAPi T board — — f — — — f 0.5A
RISC board f f — — f f — 0.5A
Data server board f f f — f f f 0.5A
ISA expansion board — — — — f f f 1.5 A max (*4)
PC interface connector unit — — — — f f f 0A
29
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
1 The liquid–crystal display and MDI unit are included. Option
boards are not included.
2 The liquid–crystal display, MDI unit, hard disk, and floppy
disk drive are included. Option boards are not included.
3 For the i series with HSSB, add the power supply capacity
of the HSSB board to the power supply capacity of each
control unit.
4 The value varies depending on the ISA board used.
5 For other peripheral units (such as I/O units), see Table
3.2.1 (c) and also refer to the relevant manuals.
Table 3.2.1 (b) Power supply capacity (for stand–alone type control units)
Power
Re-
Unit 16i 18i 21i 160i 180i 210i supply
marks
capacity
Stand–alone 1–slot rack f f f f f f 1.8A (*1, *2)

type control unit
(including main
3–slot rack f f f f f f 2.3A (*1, *2)
CPU board)
HSSB board f f f f f f 0.2A
Sub–CPU board f f — f f — 0.8A
PMC C f f f f f f 0.3A
Serial communication board f f f f f f 0.3A

(remote buffer, DNC1, DNC2)
RISC board f f — f f — 0.5A
10.4″ LCD unit f f f — — — 1.0A (*3)
9.5″ LCD unit f f f — — — 0.8A (*3)
Intelligent (486DX4 — — — f f f 3.0A (*2)

terminal type 2 version) with
ISA expansion
Intelligent (Pentium — — — f f f 3.5A (*2)

terminal type 2 version) with
ISA expansion
NOTE
1 Boards in option slots and mini slots are not included.
2 When an RS–232–C unit (with power supplied form the NC)
is connected to the RS–232–C port, +1 A is further required.
3 Use memory cards that consume no more than 2 W.
30
www.plcworld.cn
Table 3.2.1 (c) Power supply rating (peripheral units common to LCD–mounted type and separation type)
Power supply
Unit 16i 18i 21i 20i 160i 180i 210i Remarks
capacity
MDI unit f f f f f f f 0A
Operator’s panel I/O f f f f f f f 0.35A

module
Connector panel I/O f f f f f f f 0.2A+7.3mA×DI

module (basic)
Connector panel I/O f f f f f f f 0.1A+7.3mA×DI

module (additional)
Separate detector f f f f f f f 0.9A Basic 4–axis

interface unit unit only
Separate detector f f — — f f — 1.5A Basic 4 axes +

interface unit additional 4 axes
31
www.plcworld.cn
3.3 When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions

described in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on the
DESIGN AND screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must be
INSTALLATION considered. The cabinet design must meet the following conditions :
CONDITIONS OF THE D The cabinet must be fully closed.
MACHINE TOOL The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne
MAGNETIC CABINET dust,coolant,and organic solvent.
D The cabinet must be designed so that the permissible temperature of
each unit is not exceeded. For actual heat design, see Section 3.4.
D A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air
within. (This is not necessary for a unit with fan.)
The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along the
surface of each installed unit.
CAUTION
If the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust easily
adheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail. (This
is not necessary for a unit with fan.)
D For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between

each unit and the wall of the cabinet. (This is not necessary for a unit
with fan.)
D Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in order
to seal the cabinet.
D The display unit must not be installed in such a place that coolant
would directly fall onto the unit. The control unit has a dust–proof
front panel, but the unit should not be placed in a location where
coolant would directly fall onto it.
D Noise must be minimized.
As the machine and the CNC unit are reduced in size, the parts that
generate noise may be placed near noise–sensitive parts in the
magnetics cabinet.
The CNC unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet design
to minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmitted
to the CNC unit is necessary. See section 3.5 for details of noise
elimination/management.
D When placing units in the cabinet, also consider ease of maintenance.
The units should be placed so that they can be checked and replaced
easily when maintenance is performed.
D The hard disk drive and floppy disk drive must not be installed near
the source of a strong magnetic field.
D The installation conditions of the I/O unit and connector panel I/O
module must be satisfied.
To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit and connector
panel I/O module must be installed in the direction shown in the
following figure. Clearances of 100 mm or more both above and
below the I/O unit are required for wiring and ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit
and connector panel I/O module.
32
www.plcworld.cn
Top
Connector panel I/O module or
I/O base unit
(No screws or protrusions shall
extend from the bottom of this
unit.)
Bottom
D Operating ambient temperature of control units with PC functions

A temperature sensor in each control unit monitors the temperature to
determine whether it is within the optimum range.
(1) When the temperature is out of range when the power is turned on
The control unit does not start until the temperature settles to within
the optimum range.
(2) If the temperature drifts out of range after normal start–up
Error occurs when the hard disk is accessed.
D A control unit with PC functions must be carefully isolated against
vibration.
The CNC control unit or hard disk unit itself may resonate at certain
frequencies. Perform a thorough check after mounting the CNC
control unit on the machine.
CAUTION
For a control unit with PC functions data stored on the hard
disk may be destroyed due to operator errors or accidents
even when the environmental conditions above are
satisfied. To guard against such data loss, back up the
important hard disk data regularly. In particular, never turn
off the power, even momentarily, while the hard disk is being
accessed is running, as doing so is highly likely to destroy
part of the contents of the disk. End users should be made
fully aware of this, to ensure that they do not inadvertently
lose important data.
D If a unit with PC functions is used, be careful when installing the MDI

unit.
(1) The MDI unit must be installed immediately below the control unit
allowing no space between the two units.
(2) The MDI unit must be installed vertically.
33
www.plcworld.cn
3.4 The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units and
parts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat is
THERMAL DESIGN radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in the
OF THE CABINET cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amount
of heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, the
less the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinet
refers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating the
surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installing
heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method is
described in the following subsections.
3.4.1 The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/°C
Temperature Rise per 1m2 surface area, that is, when the 6W heat source is contained in a
cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in the
within the Cabinet cabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to
the area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area
of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.
There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by
the fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost
constant.The following expression must then be satisfied to limit the
difference in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air
to 13°C or less when the temperature in the cabinet rises:
Internal heat loss P [W] x
6[W/m2⋅°C] × surface area S[m2]×13[°C] of rise in temperature
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4m2 has a cooling capacity
of 24W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 13°C under these
conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 312W. If the actual internal
heat is 360W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by 15°C or
more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet must be
improved using the heat exchanger.
For the power magnetic cabinet containing a stand–alone type control
unit, the internal temperature rise must be suppressed to 10°C or less,
instead of 13°C.
34
www.plcworld.cn
3.4.2
Heat Output of Each
Unit
Table 3.4.2 (a) Heat output (for LCD–mounted type control unit)
Heat
Re-
Unit 16i 18i 21i 20i 160i 180i 210i output
marks
(W)
LCD–mounted Without option slots f f f f f (*3) f (*3) f (*3) 33W (*1)

type control
unit With 2 option slots f f f f f (*3) f (*3) f (*3) 37W (*1)
With 3 option slots f f — — f (*3) f (*3) — 39W (*1)
With 4 option slots f f — — f (*3) f (*3) — 40W (*1)
LCD–mounted Without option slots — — — — f f f 45W (*2)

type control
unit (with PC With 2 option slots — — — — f f f 52W (*2)
functions)
(CPU: 486DX4) With 3 option slots — — — — f f — 53W (*2)
With 4 option slots — — — — f f — 54W (*2)
LCD–mounted Without option slots — — — — f f f 54W (*2)

type control
unit (with PC With 2 option slots — — — — f f f 61W (*2)
functions)
(CPU: Pentium) With 3 option slots — — — — f f — 62W (*2)
With 4 option slots — — — — f f — 63W (*2)
Option board HSSB board f f f — f f f 3W

(*5)
Sub–CPU board f f — — f f — 13W
Loader control board f f f — f f f 10W
PMC C f f f — f f f 5W
Serial communication f f f f f f f 6W
board (remote buffer,
DNC1, DNC2)
CAP–II board f f — — f f — 10W
Symbol CAPi T board — — f — — — f 10W
RISC board f f — — f f — 9W
Data server board f f f — f f f 9W
ISA expansion board — — — — f f f (*4)
PC interface connector unit — — — — f f f 0W
35
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
1 The liquid–crystal display and MDI unit are included. Option boards are not included.
2 The liquid–crystal display, MDI unit, hard disk, and floppy disk drive are included. Option boards
are not included.
3 For the i series with HSSB, add the heat output of the HSSB board to the heat output of each
control unit.
4 The value varies depending on the ISA board being used. Add the heat output of the ISA board
being used.
5 When option boards are used, the total heat output of the selected option boards must not
exceed the following value:
Rack type Total heat output
2–slot rack 26W
3–slot rack 38W
4–slot rack 38W
Table 3.4.2 (b) Heat output (for stand–alone type control units)
Heat Re-
Unit 16i 18i 21i 160i 180i 210i
output marks
Stand–alone type 1–slot rack f f f f f f 35W (*1)

control unit
(including main
3–slot rack f f f f f f 46W (*1)
CPU board)
Option board HSSB board f f f f f f 4W
Sub–CPU board f f — f f — 14W
PMC C f f f f f f 7W
Serial communication f f f f f f 7W
board (remote buffer,
DNC1, DNC2)
RISC board f f — f f — 12W
10.4″ LCD unit f f f — — — 18W
9.5″ LCD unit f f f — — — 14W
Intelligent terminal (486DX4 version) — — — f f f 25W (*2)

type 2 with ISA expansion
Intelligent terminal (Pentium version) — — — f f f 37W (*2)

type 2 with ISA expansion
NOTE
1 The indicated heat output values are the maximum values,
including the heat outputs of the boards in the option slots
and mini slots.
2 The heat outputs of units connected to the CNC and
memory cards are not included.
36
www.plcworld.cn
Table 3.4.2 (c) Heat output (peripheral units common to LCD–mounted type and separation type)
Heat
Unit 16i 18i 21i 20i 160i 180i 210i output Remarks
(W)
MDI unit f f f f f f f 0W
Operator’s panel I/O f f f f f f f 12W (*1)

module
Connector panel I/O f f f f f f f 8W (*1)

module (basic)
Connector panel I/O f f f f f f f 5W (*1)

module (additional)
Separate detector f f f f f f f 9W Basic 4–axis unit

interface unit only(*2)
Separate detector f f — — f f — 14W Basic 4 axes +

interface unit additional 4 axes(*2)
NOTE
1 The indicated values are when 50% of the module input
signals are ON.
2 Heat output generated within the separate detector is not
included.
37
www.plcworld.cn
3.4.3 With a small cabinet like the operator’s panel, the heat dissipating
Thermal Design of capacity of the cabinet is as shown below, assuming that there is sufficient
mixing of the air inside the cabinet.
Operator’s Panel Coated metal surfaces: 8 W/m2°C
Plastic surfaces: 3.7 W/m2°C
An example of the thermal design for the cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.4 is
shown below.
Air guide
chamber
Machine operator’s panel
120–mm square fan

motor (for air mixing)
Fig. 3.4.3
Assume the following.

Thermal exchange rates : Coated metal surfaces 8 W/m2°C
: Plastic surfaces 3.7 W/m2°C
: Allowable temperature rise:
13°C higher than the exteriortemperature
Also, assume the following.
Dimensions of pendant type cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.4(a):
560(W) × 470(H) × 150(D) mm
Surface area of metallic sections : 0.5722 m2
Surface area of plastic sections : 0.2632 m2
In this case, the allowable total heat dissipation for the cabinet is:
8 × 0.5722 × 13 + 3.7 × 0.2632 × 13 = 72 W.
In consequence, it can be concluded that the units shown in Table 3.4.4(a)
on the next page can be installed in this cabinet.
38
www.plcworld.cn
Table 3.4.3
LCD–mounted type control unit with option 2 slots 37 W
Option board (PMC C language) 6W
Option board (DATA SERVER Board) 9W
Distributed operator’s panel I/O module 12 W
120–mm square fan motor for air mixing 8W
Total heat dissipation of the above 72 W
NOTE
The 12 W quoted for the I/O module of the distribution–type
operator’s panel represents an example heat output value
when half of all the input signals are turned on. This value
varies, depending on the mechanical configuration.
39
www.plcworld.cn
3.5 The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount and
custom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is
ACTION AGAINST designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult to
NOISE measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise has
many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from being
generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. This
precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.
The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating
noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into the
CNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground
loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in the following section.
3.5.1 The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the
following table:
Separating Signal
Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Lines
Group Signal line Action
Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A
Secondary AC power line separately (Note 1) from groups B
and C, or cover group A with an
AC/DC power lines (containing the electromagnetic shield (Note 2).
A power lines for the servo and
spindle motors) See Section 3.5.4 and connect
spark killers or diodes with the
AC/DC solenoid solenoid and relay.
AC/DC relay
DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoid
and relay.
DC relay (24VDC)
Bind the cables in group B
DI/DO cable between the CNC and separately from group A, or cover
power magnetics cabinet group B with an electromagnetic
B DI/DO cable between the CNC and shield.
machine Separate group B as far from
Group C as possible.
24–VDC input power cables
connected to the control unit and It is more desirable to cover group
its peripherals B with the shield.
Cable between the CNC and I/O Bind the cables in group C
Unit separately from group A, or cover
Cable for position and velocity group C with an electromagnetic
feedback shield.
Cable between the CNC and Separate group C as far from

spindle amplifier Group B as possible.
Cable for the position coder Be sure to perform shield

processing in Section 3.5.5.
Cable for the manual pulse
C
generator
Cable between the CNC and the
MDI
RS–232C and RS–422 interface
cable
Cable for the battery
Other cables to be covered with
the shield
40
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.
3 The shield is not required when the cable between the CNC
and MDI is shorter than 30 cm.
Power magnetics cabinet

Operator’s cabinet
24 VDC Spindle Servo CNC

power amplifier amplifier I/O unit control
supply unit
to motor Duct
Cable of group A Cable of group B, C
Section of duct
Group A Group B, C
Cover
41
www.plcworld.cn
3.5.2 The CNC machine tool uses the following three types of grounding:
Ground D Signal grounding
Signal grounding supplies a reference potential (0 V) for electrical
signals.
D Grounding for protection
Grounding for protection is performed for safety reasons as well as to
shield against external and internal noise. This type of grounding
includes, for example, the equipment frames, cases and panels of
units, and the shielding on interface cables connecting the equipment.
D Protective grounding (PE)
Protective grounding (PE) is performed to connect protection grounds
provided for equipment or between units to ground together at one
point as a grounding system.
42
www.plcworld.cn
LCD–mounted type i series CNC
Pendant box
Distributed α amplifier
I/O
CNC
Frame
AC power
supply
24–V power Operator’s

supply panel
AC input
Pendant box
PE (ground plate of cabinet) Cabinet on machine side
Stand–alone type i series CNC
Pendant box
Distributed α amplifier CNC
I/O
Display
Frame
AC power AC power
supply supply
24–V power Operator’s

supply panel
AC input Frame
PE (ground plate of cabinet) Cabinet on machine side
Path for grounding
Path for protective grounding (PE)
Notes on grounding D The ground resistance in protective grounding (PE) must be 100 Ω or
less (type D grounding).
D The cable used for protective grounding (PE) must be of a sufficient
cross section to allow current to flow safely into protective ground
(PE) if an accident such as a short–circuit occurs. (Generally, a cross
section equal to or greater than that of the AC power cable is required.)
D The cable connected to protective ground (PE) must be incorporated
into the AC power wire such that power cannot be supplied with the
ground wire disconnected.
43
www.plcworld.cn
3.5.3
Connecting the Signal
Ground (SG) of the
Control Unit
M4 stud
Grounding cable,
wire 2 mm2 or more
Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.
For the locations of the grounding terminals of other units, see
“EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT” in APPENDIX.
44
www.plcworld.cn
Single–slot rack Three–slot rack
Signal ground terminal
M4
Signal ground terminal (threaded hole)
(Faston terminal)
M3 (threaded hole)
Ground cable
2 mm2 or more
Grounding plate
of the cabinet
PE
Connect the 0–V lines of the electronic circuits in the control unit to the
ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground terminal.
Note that the grounding method differs depending on whether option slots
are present.
Use the Faston terminal (FANUC specification: A02B–0166–K330).
45
www.plcworld.cn
3.5.4 The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
Noise Suppressor A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed.
Notes on selecting the D Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This
spark killer type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
D The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
I2 I2
2) Capacitance (C) : ∼ (µF)
10 20
I : Current at stationary state of the coil
R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer
AC Spark killer
relay
Motor
Spark killer
Mount the noise eliminator near a motor or a relay coil.
Note) Use a CR–type noise eliminator. Varistor–type noise eliminators

clamp the peak pulse voltage but cannot suppress a sharp
rising edge.
Diode (used for direct–current circuits)
– +
Diode
Use a diode which can withstand a
DC relay voltage up to two times the applied
voltage and a current up to two times
the applied current.
46
www.plcworld.cn
3.5.5 If a cable connected to the CNC, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, or

Cable Clamp and other device requires shielding, clamp the cable as shown below. The
clamp both supports and shields the cable. Use this clamp to ensure stable
Shield Processing operation of the system.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must be
made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :
Ground plate
Cable
Metal fittings
for clamp
40 to 80 mm
Fig. 3.5.5 (a) Cable clamp (1)
47
www.plcworld.cn
ÇÇ
Machine side
installation
ÇÇ board
ÇÇ
Control unit
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ground plate
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Metal fittings
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
for clamp
Shield cover
Fig. 3.5.5 (b) Cable clamp (2)
Prepare ground plate like the following figure.
Ground terminal
(grounded)
Hole for securing metal fitting clamp
Mount screw hole
Fig. 3.5.5 (c) Ground plate
For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface
is plated with nickel.
48
www.plcworld.cn
Ground
8mm
plate
12mm
20mm
Fig. 3.5.5 (d) Ground plate holes
(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.
Max. 55mm
28mm
6mm
17mm
Fig. 3.5.5 (e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp
Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp

A02B–0124–K001 (8 pieces)
49
www.plcworld.cn
3.5.6 To protect the devices from surge voltages due to lightening, it is

Measures Against recommended to install surge–absorbing elements between the lines of
the input power and between one line and ground. This does not,
Surges due to however, assure protection from all surges due to lightening.
Lightning The recommended items are as follows. (Items made by Okaya Denki
Sangyo Co.)
For the 200–V system
Between lines R S A S V–781BYZ–2
Between line and ground R S A S V–781BXZ–4
For the 400–V system

Between lines R S A S V–152BYZ–2A
Between line and ground R S A S V–801BXZ–4
Installation procedure The surge–absorbing elements used for measures against surges due to
lightening must be installed in the input power unit as shown in the figure
below. The figure below shows an example in which an insulating
transformer, shown by dotted lines, is not installed. If an insulating
transformer is installed, surge–absorbing element (between line and
ground) is not required.
Nonfuse To CNC
breaker
R Servo unit
Input Insulating M AC
AC S trans- Nonfuse power
break- breaker C reac-
input T er former C tor supply
module
PE
5A a
Nonfuse
breaker
To other electric parts

b on the machine
Surge–absorbing element À
(between lines)
Surge–absorbing element Á
(between line and ground)
50
www.plcworld.cn
Notes (1) For a better surge absorbing effect, the wiring shown by heavy line
must be as short as possible.
Wire Size: The wire diameter must be 2 mm2 or greater.
Wire length: The sum of the length (a) of the wire for the
connection of surge–absorbing element and
that (b) of surge–absorbing element must be 2
m or less.
(2) If conducting dielectric strength tests by applying overvoltages (1000
VAC and 1500 VAC) to the power line, remove surge–absorbing
element . Otherwise, the overvoltages would activate the element.
(3) The nonfuse breaker (5A) is required to protect the line when a surge
voltage exceeding the capacity of the surge–absorbing elements is
applied and the surge–absorbing elements are short–circuited.
(4) Because no current flows through surge–absorbing elements and
during normal operation, the nonfuse breaker (5A) can be shared by
other electric devices on the machine. It can be used with the control
power supply of the servo unit power supply module or with the power
supply for the fan motor of the spindle motor.
51
www.plcworld.cn
3.6
CONTROL UNIT
3.6.1 The control unit has a built–in fan motor.

Installation of the Air enters the control unit through the bottom and is drawn through the
fan motor which is located on the top of the control unit.
Control Unit
Space (A), shown in Fig. 3.6.1, must be provided to ensure unrestricted
air flow. Also, space (B) should be provided whenever possible. When
space (B) cannot be provided, ensure that nothing is placed in the
immediate vicinity which could obstruct the air flow.
AIR FLOW AIR FLOW
A A A
50mm
Unit rear panel
50mm
B B B
Fig. 3.6.1
52
www.plcworld.cn
3.6.2 The control unit is equipped with a fan motor.

Installing the Air is fed into the bottom of the unit and output from the fan motor
Stand–alone Type mounted on the top of the unit.
Control Unit The spaces shown in Fig. 3.6.2 (areas (A) and (B)) are always required to
ensure smooth air flow.
Also, adequate service access space is required in front of and at the top
of the unit so that printed circuit boards and the fan motor can be replaced
easily if necessary.
There is a spare connector located at the far end (at middle height) on the
right side of the control unit. This connector is used for controller testing
and other purposes. Therefore, space (area (C)) for handling the
connector is required.
Space for air flow, and access area for fan replacement
Single–slot rack: Approx. 65

Three–slot rack: Approx. 180
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
Approx. 180
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ A
50
30
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ Access space
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
for spare
connector
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
C Spare connector
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
380
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
50
B B
80
Unit: mm
Sufficient space for
replacing a printed circuit
board is required.
Fig. 3.6.2
53
www.plcworld.cn
3.7 For the cabling diagram, see the control unit configuration and
component names in Section 1.1.
CABLING DIAGRAM
3.8 The cabinet and pendant box that house a display and a operator’s panel
that are to be designed and manufactured by the machine tool builder are
DUSTPROOF susceptible to dust, cutting debris, oil mist, etc. Note the following and
MEASURES FOR make sure that they are structured to prevent their entry.
CABINETS AND 1) The cabinet and pendant box must be of a hermetically sealed
PENDANT BOXES structure.
2) Apply packing to the panel mounting surface to which a display and
operator’s panel are to be mounted.
3) Make sure that the door packing of the cabinet and pendant box is
sealed firmly.
4) For a cabinet or pendant box with a rear cover, apply packing to the
mounting surface.
5) Make sure that the cable entrance is sealed with packing, connectors
for conduits, etc.
6) Make sure that all other openings are blocked, if any.
7) Make sure that the display and operator’s panel do not receive cutting
debris and coolant directly.
8) Oil can easily stay on the top of the cabinet and pendant box, possibly
dripping down the display and operator’s panel. Make sure that the
cabinet and pendant box is of such a structure that oil do not collect
or that oil do not drip down the display or panel.
Panel (display/ Cabinet/pendant box

operator’s panel) Panel (rear cover)
Apply packing.
If the frame is weak, reinforce it.

Cable entrance (example) Beware of collection of oil.
Hardware Connector for conduit Oil must not collect or drip.
Cable Display/
Packing Cable operator’s
panel
54
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
55
www.plcworld.cn
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63003EN/04
4.1 This section explains the connection of power supply for i Series control
unit.
GENERAL
56
www.plcworld.cn
4.2
TURNING ON AND
OFF THE POWER TO
THE CONTROL UNIT
4.2.1 Supply power (24VDC) to the control uint of Series 21i/210i from an
Power Supply for the external sources.
Control Unit Install a power switch at (1) in Fig. 4.2.1 (a).
When the Series 210i control unit with PC functions is used, apply
countermeasures to guard against the possible destruction of hard disk
storage due to momentary power failure or power outage, by installing an
uninterruptible power supply, etc.
Main circuit Magnetic AC line Servo converter Servo inverter CNC control unit
breaker contractor filter
3–phase 200 V
200 V AC AC for power
line
Single–phase
200 V AC for
control line 24 V DC 24 V DC
input output
External 24 V ON/OFF circuit I/O units, etc.

DC power
ON OFF COM
Fig. 4.2.1 (a)
ON/OFF circuit (example) For example, “ON/OFF circuit” is as follows : (Fig.4.2.1 (b) )
Select the circuit devices, in consideration of its capacity.
+24V +24V
ry1 OUTPUT 24 VDC
RY1 The power rating is equal
DC INPUT to the total of CNC
24 V control unit capacity +
0V 0V CP1B output of the
control unit.
ry1
RELAY
OFF COM ON DIODE COIL RELAY CONTACT
B A CONTACT
CONTACT
POWER ON/OFF SWITCH
Fig. 4.2.1 (b)
57
www.plcworld.cn
4.2.2 Recommended connection and recommended power specifications

+24V Input Power (1) Recommended connection
Specifications
Regulated
AC input power CNC unit
supply
(2) Recommended power specifications

(The power supply must conform to the applicable safety standard.)
Output voltage: +24 V (10% (21.6 V to 26.4 V)
(including ripple voltage and noise. See the figure
below.)
Output current: The continuous load current must be larger than the
current consumption of the CNC.
(At the maximum temperature inside the power
magnetics cabinet in which the power supply is
located)
Instantaneous input interruption retention time: 10 mS (for –100%)
20 mS (for –50%)
Instantaneous Instantaneous
interruption interruption
(–100%) (–50%)
10mS 20mS
AC input voltage
26.4V
Output voltage
21.6V Abrupt
load
change
Output current
0A
Fig. Example of ripple voltage and noise due to switching power supply
Noise
Ripple
voltage
Noise
Fig 4.2.2 Timing chart
58
www.plcworld.cn
S Circuit configurations The following circuit configurations are not recommended.

Circuit examples that cannot retain the output voltage at an
instantaneous interruption (the voltage reduces to 21.6 V or below)
Example 1
Rectifier
AC input CNC unit
circuit
Example 2
AC input Rectifier CNC unit

circuit
Circuit examples that exceed the output voltage specifications (21.6

V to 26.4 V) due to an abrupt load change
Example 1
Regulated
supply
Device with
remarkable
load fluc-
tuations
Example 2
Regulated
supply
Device with
large rush
current
59
www.plcworld.cn
4.2.3 Turn on the power to all the units at the same time, or in the following
Power–on Sequence sequence:
1 Power to the overall machine (200 VAC), power to the

separate detector (scale)
2 Power to slave I/O units connected via the I/O link, separate
detector interface unit, and stand–alone type LCD unit (24
VDC), servo amplifier control power supply (200 VAC)
3 Power to the CNC (24 VDC)
“Turning on the power to all the units at the same time” means completing
the power–on operations in 1 and 2 above within 500 ms of performing
power–on in 3.
When a separate detector (scale) is used, the output signal of the separate
detector must become stable within 500 ms of the separate detector
interface unit being turned on.
In some cases, the detector must be turned on prior to the separate detector
interface unit according to the specifications of the detector.
The power–on sequence for a stand–alone type LCD unit supporting the
display link and an intelligent terminal is undefined.
60
www.plcworld.cn
4.2.4 Turn off the power to all the units at the same time, or in the following
Power–off Sequence sequence:
1 Power to the CNC (24 VDC)

2 Power to the slave I/O units connected via the I/O link,
separate detector interface unit, and stand–alone type LCD
unit (24 VDC), servo amplifier control power supply (200
VAC), and power to any separate detector (scale)
3 Power to the overall machine (200 VAC)
“Turning off the power to all units at the same time” means completing
the power–off operations in 2 and 3 above within 500 ms before the
power–off operation described in 1 above. If the power to the units
indicated in 2 or 3 is turned off other than within 500 ms of the power in
1 being turned off, alarm information is left in the NC.
The power–off sequence for a stand–alone type LCD unit supporting the
display link and an intelligent terminal is undefined.
CAUTION
When the i Series CNC with PC functions or an intelligent
terminal is used, the OS must be shut down before the
power to the control unit is turned off. Be careful not to turn
off the power while the hard disk is being accessed or before
the OS has terminated; otherwise, the hardware contents
may be destroyed.
When the power is turned off or when the power is momentarily

disconnected, motor control is disabled. Problems that may be generated
from the motor control disabled state should be handled from the
machine, as necessary.
For example, when movement along a vertical axis is controlled, a brake
should be applied to prevent falling. Usually, the brake clamps the motor
when the servo is not activated or when the motor is not turning. The
clamp is released only when the motor is turning. When servo axis control
is disabled by power–off or momentary power disconnection, the brake
usually clamps the servo motor. In this case, before the relay for clamping
operates, the controlled axis may fall. So, also consider whether the
distance the axis is likely to fall will cause a problem.
61
www.plcworld.cn
4.3 Supply power to the control unit from external resouce.

The brackets in the figures are the stand–alone type connector name.
CABLE FOR POWER
SUPPLY TO Series 21i/210i control unit External power
CONTROL UNIT CP1A (CP1)
1 +24V 24VDC stabilized
2 0V power
3 24VDC "10%
Cable
CP1A (CP1)
AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact) External power
Select a source that

+24V (1)
meets the external
0V (2)
power terminal.
Recommended cable : A02B–0124–K830 (5m)

(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the external power side)
The 24 V DC input to CP1A (CP1) can be output from CP1B (CP2) for
use in branching. The connection of CP1B (CP2) is as shown below. In
this case, the external 24 V DC power supply should have a rating which
is equal to the sum of the current consumed by the control unit and the
current used via CP1B (CP2).
Series 21i/210i control unit External device
CP1B (CP2)
1 +24V
2 0V
3
Cable
CP1B (CP2)
AMP JAPAN
2–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact) External device
+24V (1) Select a connector that
matches the pin layout of
0V (2) the external device.
62
www.plcworld.cn
4.4 In a system using the i Series CNC, batteries are used as follows:
BATTERIES Use
Component connected to
battery
Memory backup in the CNC CNC
BIOS data backup in the intelligent terminal Intelligent terminal
Preservation of the current position indicated Separate detector interface

by the separate absolute pulse coder unit
Preservation of the current position indicated Servo amplifier

by the absolute pulse coder built into the motor
Used batteries must be discarded according to appropriate local

ordinances or rules. When discarding batteries, insulate them by using
tape and so forth to prevent the battery terminals from short–circuiting.
4.4.1 Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CMOS
Battery for Memory memory in the control unit. The power to the CMOS memory is backed
up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The
Backup (3VDC) above data is not lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backup
battery is mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery can
maintain the contents of memory for about a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message “BAT”
blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC.
When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible. In
general, the battery can be replaced within two or three weeks, however,
this depends on the system configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longer
be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this state causes
system alarm 910 (SRAM parity alarm) to occur because the contents of
memory are lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing
the battery.
The following two kinds of batteries can be used.
D Lithium battery built into the CNC control unit.
D Two alkaline dry cells (size D) in the external battery case.
NOTE
A lithium battery is installed as standard at the factory.
63
www.plcworld.cn
Replacing the lithium (1) Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering drawing number:
battery A02B–0200–K102).
(2) Turn the i Series on for about 30 seconds.
(3) Turn the i Series off.
(4) (LCD–mounted type i Series CNC)
Remove the old battery from the top of the CNC control unit.
First unplug the battery connector then take the battery out of its case.
The battery case of a control unit without option slots is located at the
top right end of the unit. That of a control unit with 2 slots is located
in the central area of the top of the unit (between fans).
(Stand–alone type i Series CNC)
Remove the old battery from the front panel of the CNC control unit.
First unplug the battery connector then take the battery out of its case.
(5) Insert a new battery and reconnect the connector.
NOTE
Steps (3) to (5) should be completed within the period
indicated below. Do not leave the control unit without a
battery for any longer than the period shown, as this will
result in the contents of memory being lost.
Series 16i/18i/21i/20i: Within 30 minutes
Series 160i/180i/210i stand–alone type: Within 30 minutes
Series 160i/180i/210i with PC functions LCD–mounted
type: Within 5 minutes
Battery
case
Connector
Lithium battery
A02B–0236–K102
(LCD–mounted type i Series CNC)
64
www.plcworld.cn
Claw holding the battery
Battery connector
Lithium battery
(Stand–alone type i Series CNC)
WARNING
Incorrect battery replacement may cause an explosion. Do
not use a battery other than that specified (specification:
A02B–0200–K102).
65
www.plcworld.cn
Replacing the alkaline (1) Prepare two new alkaline dry cells (size D).
dry cells (size D) (2) Turn the Series 16i/18i/160i/180i on.
(3) Remove the battery case cover.
(4) Replace the batteries, paying careful attention to their orientation.
(5) Replace the battery case cover.
NOTE
When replacing the dry cells while the power is off, use the
same procedure as that for lithium battery replacement
procedure, described above.
Dry cell × 2
Cover
Connection terminal
on the rear
Mounting hole × 4
Battery case
66
www.plcworld.cn
Use of alkaline dry cells

(size D)
Connection Power from the external batteries is supplied through the connector to
which the lithium battery is connected. The lithium battery, provided as
standard, can be replaced with external batteries in the battery case
(A02B–0236–C281) according to the battery replacement procedures
described above.
NOTE
1 Install the battery case (A02B–0236–C281) in a location where the batteries can be replaced
even when the control unit power is on.
2 The battery cable connector is attached to the control unit by means of a simple lock system.
To prevent the connector from being disconnected due to the weight of the cable or tension
within the cable, fix the cable section within 50 cm of the connector.
67
www.plcworld.cn
4.4.2 A lithium battery is used to back up BIOS data in the intelligent terminal.
Battery in the This battery is factory–set in the intelligent terminal. This battery has
sufficient capacity to retain BIOS data for one year.
Intelligent Terminal
When the battery voltage becomes low, the LCD screen blinks. (The LCD
(3 VDC)
screen also blinks if a fan alarm is issued.) If the screen blinks, replace
the battery as soon as possible (within one week). FANUC recommends
that the battery be replaced once per year regardless of whether a battery
alarm is issued.
Replacing the battery (1) To guard against the possible loss or destruction of BIOS parameters,
write down the BIOS parameter values.
(2) Obtain a new lithium battery (A02B–0200–K102).
(3) After power has been supplied for at least five seconds, turn off the
power to intelligent terminal type 2. Remove the intelligent terminal
from the panel so that replacement work can be done from the rear of
the intelligent terminal.
(4) Detach the connector of the lithium battery, and remove the battery
from the battery holder.
(5) Run the cable for the new lithium battery as shown in the figure.
(6) Attach the connector, and place the battery in the battery holder.
(7) Install intelligent terminal type 2 again.
(8) Turn on the power, and check that the BIOS parameters are maintained
(BIOS setup is not activated forcibly).
Between removing an old battery and inserting new battery, no more than
five minutes must be allowed to elapse.
68
www.plcworld.cn
Lithium battery
Front
Rear view Side view
BAT1
Lithium battery connection
4.4.3 One battery unit can maintain current position data for six absolute pulse
Battery for Separate coders for a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, APC alarms 3n6 to 3n8 (n:
Absolute Pulse Coders axis number) are displayed on the LCD display. When APC alarm 3n7
(6VDC) is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible. In general, the battery
should be replaced within one or two weeks, however, this depends on the
number of pulse coders used.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, the current positions for
the pulse coders can no longer be maintained. Turning on the power to
the control unit in this state causes APC alarm 3n0 (reference position
return request alarm) to occur. Return the tool to the reference position
after replacing the battery.
Therefore, FANUC recommends that the battery be replaced once a year
regardless of whether APC alarms are generated.
See Section 7.1.3 for details of connecting the battery to separate absolute
pulse coders.
69
www.plcworld.cn
Replacing batteries Obtain four commercially available alkaline batteries (size D).
(1) Turn on the power to the machine (i Series CNC).
(2) Loosen the screws of the battery case, and remove the cover.
(3) Replace the dry batteries in the case.
Note the polarity of the batteries as shown in the figure below (orient
two batteries one way and the other two in the opposite direction).
Screws
Â
Â
Â ÇÇÂ
Â
Ç ÇÇ
Â Cover
Â ÂÂ Ç
Â
(4) After installing the new batteries, replace the cover.
(5) Turn off the power to the machine (i Series CNC).
WARNING
If the batteries are installed incorrectly, an explosion may
occur. Never use batteries other than the specified type
(Size D alkaline batteries).
CAUTION
Replace batteries while the power to the i Series CNC is on.
Note that, if batteries are replaced while no power is
supplied to the CNC, the recorded absolute position is lost.
4.4.4 The battery for the absolute pulse coder built into the motor is installed
in the servo amplifier. For how to connect and replace the battery, refer
Battery for Absolute
to the following manuals:
Pulse Coder Built into
D FANUC SERVO MOTOR α Series Maintenance Manual
the Motor (6 VDC)
D FANUC SERVO MOTOR β Series Maintenance Manual
D FANUC SERVO MOTOR β Series (I/O Link Option) Maintenance
Manual
70
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
5 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
71
www.plcworld.cn
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63003EN/04
5.1
CONNECTION OF
MDI UNIT
(LCD–MOUNTED
TYPE)
5.1.1 “MDI unit” is the generic name used to refer to a manual data input device.
It has a keyboard and is used to input CNC data such as programs and
General
parameters into the CNC.
A standard MDI unit is available for each of the i Series models with
personal computer function according to the specifications.
See Section 8.4 for details of connecting the FA full keyboard. Note that
this keyboard can be connected only to the Series 160i/180i/210i.
72
www.plcworld.cn
5.1.2
Connection to the MDI
Unit (LCD–mounted
Type)
MDI
CA55
Flat cable for soft key
(Supplied with the control
unit. Length approx. 50 cm.)
CK2
CK1
MDI cable
MDI unit
73
www.plcworld.cn
5.1.3
Connection with the
Standard MDI Unit
CNC MDI unit
CA55 CK1
JAE LY20–20P–DTI–P PCR–E20MDK–SL–A
P A B 1 *KEY00 11 *KEY01
1 *KEY00 *KEY02 2 *KEY02 12 *KEY03
2 *KEY01 *KEY03 3 *KEY04 13 *KEY05
3 *KEY04 *KEY06 4 *KEY06 14 *KEY07
4 *KEY05 *KEY07 Japan Aviation Electronics 5 *COM00 15 *COM01
LY10–DC20 (Housing) 6 *COM02 16 *COM03
5 *COM00 *COM02
LY10–C2–3 (Contact)
6 *COM01 *COM03 7 *COM04 17 *COM05
A02B–0236–K303
7 *COM04 *COM06 8 *COM06 18 *COM07
8 *COM05 *COM07 9 *COM08 19 *COM09
9 *COM08 *COM10 10 *COM10 20 *COM11
10 *COM09 *COM11
Soft key cable
CK2
CA55 CK1
*KEY00 A1 1 *KEY00
*KEY02 B1 2 *KEY02
*KEY01 A2 11 *KEY01
B2 12
*KEY03 *KEY03
A3 3
*KEY04 *KEY04
B3 4
*KEY06 *KEY06
A4 13
*KEY05 *KEY05
B4 14
*KEY07 *KEY07
A5 5
*COM00 *COM00
B5 6
*COM02 *COM02
A6 15
*COM01 *COM01
B6 16
*COM03 *COM03
A7 7
*COM04 *COM04
B7 8
*COM06 *COM06
A8 17
*COM05 *COM05
B8 18
*COM07 *COM07
A9 9
*COM08 *COM08
B9 10
*COM10 *COM10
*COM09
A10 19
*COM09
B10 20
*COM11 *COM11
Recommended cable specification: SHIELD
A02B–0236–K812 (25 cm) GROUNDING PLATE
A02B–0236–K813 (45 cm)
Recommended wire specification:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE
For MDI cable connector mating on the CA55 side, a simple lock mechanism is employed.
Ensure that a load greater than 1 kg is not applied to the connectors. Moreover, clamp the cable
so that excessive force is not applied due to vibration. However, shielding and clamping are
not required for a cable of up to 50 cm.
74
www.plcworld.cn
5.1.4
Key Layout of
Separate–type MDI
Compact keys for lathe
series (T series)
English display
Symbol display
75
www.plcworld.cn
Compact keys for

machine center series
(M series)
English display
Symbol display
76
www.plcworld.cn
Standard keys for lathe

series (T series)
English display
Symbol display
77
www.plcworld.cn
Compact keys for

machining center series
(M series)
English display
Symbol display
78
www.plcworld.cn
5.1.5 Except for the FS20i, the 61–key MDI unit can be used, in addition to the
61–Key MDI Unit conventional MDI units (small MDI unit and standard MDI unit). On this
61–key MDI unit, the alphabetic keys are each assigned to a single letter,
and are arranged in alphabetical order.
(1) Connection
The 61–key MDI unit can be connected in the same way as the small
and standard MDI units. See Subsection 5.1.3.
The 61–key MDI unit cannot, however, be detached. The CNC control
unit automatically determines whether a 61–key MDI unit or a
conventional MDI unit is attached when the control unit is turned on.
If a 61–key MDI unit is connected after the control unit is turned on,
therefore, the keys cannot be recognized correctly.
(2) Software series supporting the 61–key MDI unit
For each model, the following series and edition or later support the
61–key MDI unit:
FS16i/160i/160is–MA B0F2–05 (installation: basic)
FS16i/160i/160is–TA B1F2–05 (installation: basic)
FS18i/180i/180is–MA BDF2–05 (installation: basic)
FS18i/180i/180is–TA BEF2–05 (installation: basic)
FS21i/210i/210is–MA DDF2–05 (installation: basic)
FS21i/210i/210is–TA DEF2–05 (installation: basic)
The FS160i/180i/210i require PC software of the following editions
or later:
Drivers and Libraries Disk A02B–0207–K730 Edition 01.7
Drivers Disk A02B–0207–K792 Edition 01.1
(3) Outline drawing
An outline drawing is given in Appendix A.
(4) Connector panel
The 61–key MDI unit for the 12.1” LCD unit of the FS160i/180i/210i
has a connector panel on the side and at the bottom of the MDI. This
connector panel is provided with an open/close cover. Opening the
cover reveals an opening measuring 27 mm 156 mm. Usually, the
opening is blocked with a blank panel (metal plate). Instead of this
blank panel, a connector–attached metal plate manufactured by the
machine tool builder can be mounted. For mounting dimensions, see
the outline drawing given in Appendix A.
5.1.6 This item describes the MDI interface when the machine tool
Connecting to the MDI manufacturer makes his own MDI keyboard and connects it to the FS20i
controller.
Unit for the FS20i
CAUTION
1 To use the guidance program function, a standard MDI unit
is necessary.
For this reason, the machine tool builder cannot make his
own MDI keyboard.
2 This interface cannot be used on models other than the
FS20i.
79
www.plcworld.cn
CNC MDI unit

CA55 CK1
JAE LY20–20P–DTI–P PCR–E20MDK–SL–A
P A B 1 *KEY00 11 *KEY01
1 *KEY00 *KEY02 2 *KEY02 12 *KEY03
2 *KEY01 *KEY03 3 *KEY04 13 *KEY05
3 *KEY04 *KEY06 4 *KEY06 14 *KEY07
Japan Aviatronics Industries
4 *KEY05 *KEY07 LY10–DC20 (housing) 5 *COM00 15 *COM01
5 *COM00 *COM02 LY10–C2–3 (contact) 6 *COM02 16 *COM03
6 *COM01 *COM03 A02B–0236–K303 7 *COM04 17 *COM05
7 *COM04 *COM06 8 *COM06 18 *COM07
8 *COM05 *COM07 9 *COM08 19 *COM09
9 *COM08 *COM10 10 *COM10 20 *COM11
10 *COM09 *COM11 Soft key cable
CK2
(within 50 cm)
CA55 CK1
*KEY00 A1 1 *KEY00 CK2
*KEY02 B1 2 *KEY02 (NFP–10A–0124)
*KEY01 A2 11 *KEY01 01 *KEY01 02 *COM06
B2 12 03 *KEY02 04
*KEY03 *KEY03
A3 3 05 *KEY03 06
*KEY04 *KEY04
B3 4 07 *KEY04 08 *KEY07
*KEY06 *KEY06
A4 13 09 *KEY05 10 *KEY06
*KEY05 *KEY05
B4 14
*KEY07 *KEY07
A5 5
*COM00 *COM00 Connector specifications of
B5 6
*COM02 *COM02 MDI PCB
A6 15 (NFP–10A–0124 made by
*COM01 *COM01
B6 16 Yamaichi Electric)
*COM03 *COM03
A7 7
*COM04 *COM04
B7 8
*COM06 *COM06
A8 17
*COM05 *COM05
B8 18
*COM07 *COM07
A9 9
*COM08 *COM08
B9 10
*COM10 *COM10
A10 19
*COM09 *COM09
B10 20
*COM11 *COM11
Shield
Ground
Recommended cable specifications: A02B–0236–K812(25cm)
A02B–0236–K813(45cm)
Recommended wire material specifications: A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWGX10 pair)
NOTE
As the fitting on the CA55 side connector of the MDI cable
is a simple lock type, prevent a force of 1 kg or more from
being applied to the connector section. Also clamp it down
to prevent a large force from being applied by vibration.
Note, however, that shielding or clamping are not necessary
if the cable length is within 50 cm.
80
www.plcworld.cn
Minimum required key The following key switches are needed for the Series 20 when making an
switches MDI. Note, however, that programs cannot be made by using NC
statements or edited by these switches alone.
(1) Number keys “0” to “9”
(2) Decimal point “.”
(3) Sign “–”
(4) Cancel key “CAN”
(5) Input key “INPUT”
Keyboard map (layout of

absolutely necessary
key switches) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*COM00 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
*COM01 CAN . – 9 8
Restart
*COM02 INPUT End input
input
*COM06 SK1 SK2 SK3 SK4 SK5 SK6 SK7
CAUTION
1 Keys (soft keys) in the hatched area are interface
signals for the soft keys.
Connect these to the MDI interface together with the
keyboard’s internal wiring.
2 When only the above keys are provided, programs cannot
be made by using NC statements or edited by these
switches alone.
3 When the FANUC machining guidance function (macro
program) is not changed by the machine tool builder and is
used as it is, the keys enclosed in bold are necessary.
4 Only keys with a label can be used.
81
www.plcworld.cn
Keyboard map
(when creating or editing
programs using NC
statements)
D Layout of Series 20i–TA
key switches
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*COM00 7 A 6 SP 5 ] 4 [ 3 = 2 # 1 , 0 *
*COM01 CAN EOB E.No. . / – + 9 D 8 B
*COM02 ²CURSOR CURSOR³ SHIFT HELP INPUT DELETE INSERT ALTER
CUSTOM OFFSET
*COM03 GRAPHIC
MESSAGE SYSTEM
SETTING
PROGRAM POSITION
*COM04 PAGEâ PAGEã CUROSR° CURSOR±
*COM05 RESET
*COM07 F L Z Y X C G R N Q O P
*COM08 T J S K M I W V U H
CAUTION
1 The characters in the hatched area are enabled when
the SHIFT key is pressed. For details on the keytop of the
keyboard, refer to the example layout for the FS20i–TA key
switches on the following page.
2 Keys (soft keys) in the hatched area are soft keys.
Connect the soft key interface signals to the MDI interface
together with the signals to be used on the MDI keyboard.
3 Place only the required keys from the above keyboard map.
used as it is, the keys enclosed in bold also have the
following meanings.
INSERT:End input by machining guidance function.
ALTER: Resume input by machining guidance function.
82
www.plcworld.cn
D Layout example of
20i–TA key switches
°
OP NQ GR 7 A
8 B
9 D
XC Z F 4 ² 5 6 ³
Y L [ ] SP
MI S T 1 2 ± 3
K J . # =
U H WV EOB
E
– +
0 *
@ /
POS PROG OFFSET SHIFT CAN INPUT

SETTING
SYSTEM MESSAGE CUSTOM ALTER INSERT DELETE

GRAPH
°
PAGE ° HELP
² ³
PAGE ± RESET
±
83
www.plcworld.cn
Keyboard map
(when creating or editing
programs using NC
statements)
D Layout of Series 20i–FA
key switches
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*COM00 7 A 6 SP 5 ] 4 [ 3 = 2 # 1 , 0 *
*COM01 CAN EOB E.No. . / – + 9 D 8 B
*COM02 ²CURSOR CURSOR³ SHIFT HELP INPUT DELETE INSERT ALTER
CUSTOM OFFSET
*COM03 GRAPHIC
MESSAGE SYSTEM
SETTING
PROGRAM POSITION
*COM04 PAGEâ PAGEã CUROSR° CURSOR±
*COM05 RESET
*COM07 F L Z Y X C G R N Q O P
*COM08 T J S K M I W V U H
*COM09
*COM10
*COM11
*COM12
CAUTION
1 The characters in the hatched area are enabled when
the SHIFT key is pressed. For details on the keytop of the
keyboard, refer to the example layout for the FS20i–TA key
switches on the following page.
2 Keys (soft keys) in the hatched area are soft keys.
Connect the soft key interface signals to the MDI interface
together with the signals to be used on the MDI keyboard.
3 Place only the required keys from the above keyboard map.
used as it is, the keys enclosed in bold also have the
following meanings.
INSERT:End input by machining guidance function.
ALTER: Resume input by machining guidance function.
84
www.plcworld.cn
D Layout example of
20i–FA key switches
°
OP NQ GR 7 A
8 B
9 C
X U Y V Z W 4 ²[ 5 ]
6 ³
SP
MI S TK 1 2 ± 3
J . # =
F L
HD EOB
E
– +
0 *
@ /
OFFSET
POS PROG SETTING SHIFT CAN INPUT
SYSTEM MESSAGE CUSTOM ALTER INSERT DELETE

GRAPH
°
PAGE ° HELP
² ³
PAGE ± RESET
±
85
www.plcworld.cn
Electric specification of
key switch
Maximum current 10VDC/5mA or more
Collision resistance 500 W or less (Condition of DC5V, 1mA)
Chattering 10msec or less
Example of MDI circuit
MDI interface
*COM00 Detail of contact point
*COM01 Contact
point
*COM02
*COM03
*COM04 Soft key @ interface
*COM05
SK7 SK6 SK5 SK4 SK3 SK2 SK1
*COM06
*COM07
*COM08
*COM09
*COM10
*COM11
*KEY07
*KEY06
*KEY05
*KEY04
*KEY03
*KEY02
*KEY01
*KEY00
CAUTION
1 The contact points of the keyboard marked with ‘ ’ are necessary.
2 When the FANUC machining guidance function (macro program) is not changed by the
machine tool builder and is used as it is, the contact points marked with ‘ ’ are necessary.
86
www.plcworld.cn
5.2
CONNECTION WITH
THE DISPLAY/MDI
UNITS (FOR THE
STAND–ALONE TYPE
i SERIES CNC)
5.2.1 With the stand–alone type i Series CNC, the following display/MDI units
can be connected:
Overview
Connection with a 10.4″ LCD unit or 9.5″ LCD unit
LCD Unit MDI Unit

Control
unit
24VDC
Connection with a 7.2″ LCD unit via the display link

VIDEO
MDI Unit LCD Unit
Control Soft key cable
unit
24VDC
24VDC
When an LCD/MDI integration unit is used, the connections within the dotted box ( )
are completed inside the unit.
Connection with a detachable 7.2″ LCD unit via the display link
Control Branch
connector Detachable LCD/
unit
MDI unit
24VDC
87
www.plcworld.cn
Connection with an intelligent terminal
Intelligent FA full
Control terminal keyboard
unit
MDI Unit
24VDC
Either an FA full keyboard or MDI unit can be connected.
5.2.2
Connection with the
10.4″/9.5″ LCD Unit
Control unit LCD Unit
Optical fiber cable

COP20A COP20B
External power
supply CP1A
24 VDC ±10%
CP1B
CA55
MDI Unit
CK1
88
www.plcworld.cn
D Connection between the An optical fiber cable is used to make the connection between the CNC
CNC control unit and control unit and 10.4″ unit or 9.5″ LCD unit. For details of the optical
LCD unit fiber cable, see Appendix D.
D Connection of a power Feed power to the LCD unit from an external 24 VDC power supply.
supply to the LCD unit
LCD unit External power supply
CP1A
1 +24V 24 VDC regulated
2 0V power supply
3 24 VDC ±10%
Cable
CP1A
AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (contact) External power supply
+24V (1) Select a cable that
0V (2) matches the pins of the
external power supply.
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0124–K830 (5 m)

(On the external power supply side, an M3 crimp terminal is provided.)
For distribution, 24 VDC applied to CP1A can be output on CP1B. CP1B

is connected as shown below. In this case, the sum of the current drawn
by the LCD unit and that drawn through CP1B needs to be supplied to
CP1A from the external 24 VDC power supply.
LCD unit External device
CP1B
1 +24V
2 0V
3
Cable
CP1B
AMP Japan
2–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
External power supply
+24V (1) Select a cable that
0V (2) matches the pins of the
external power supply.
89
www.plcworld.cn
D Connection between the For the connection between the connector (CA55) of the LCD unit and
LCD unit and MDI unit that (CK1) of the MDI unit, see Section 5.1.3. With the LCD–mounted
type i Series CNC, the connector (CA55) is located on the CNC control
unit at the back of the LCD. With the stand–alone type i Series CNC, the
connector (CA55) is located on the back of the LCD unit. With the
stand–alone type i Series CNC, a soft key cable connection is made inside
the unit, so that the machine tool builder need not make a soft key cable
connection.
90
www.plcworld.cn
5.2.3
Connection with the
7.2″ LCD Unit Via the
Display Link
Control unit MDI unit
JD45 JD13
External power
supply CPD1
24 VDC ±10%
CPD2
JA1
CK2
Flat cable for the soft keys.

Included in the LCD unit.
Cable length: About 50 cm
LCD unit
LCD video cable

JA1
Power cable
CP5
With an LCD/MDI integration unit, the wiring of the flat cable for the soft keys,
LCD video cable, and power cable enclosed in the dotted box is made in the
unit, so that the machine tool builder need not make any connections.
91
www.plcworld.cn
D Connection between the

CNC control unit and MDI
unit i Series CNC MDI unit
JD45 JD13
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 TXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *TXD 12 0V
3 TXD 13 RXTM1 3 RXD 13
4 *TXD 14 RXTM2 4 *RXD 14
5 15 TXTM1 5 15
6 16 TXTM2 6 16
7 17 7 17
8 18 8 18
9 19 9 19
10 20 10 20
Cable connections
JD41 JD13
1 1
RXD TXD
2 2
*RXD *TXD
3 3
TXD RXD
4 4
*TXD *RXD
13
RXTM1
14
RXTM2
15
TXTM1
16
TXTM2
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
Shield
Recommended wire:
A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG × 10 pairs)
Recommended connector:
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing: PCR–V20LA
Recommended cable:
A02B–0259–K811 (5 m)
A02B–0259–K812 (10 m)
NOTE
1 Connect JD45 (13) with JD45 (14), and connect JD45 (15)
with JD45 (16).
2 Never make connections with those pins to which no signals
are assigned.
3 Never make connections with pins 13 through 16 of JD13.
92
www.plcworld.cn
D Connection of a power Feed power to the MDI unit from an external 24 VDC power supply.
supply to the MDI unit
MDI unit
CPD1
(AMP)
External power supply
1 +24V
2 0V
3 +24 VDC power supply
(regulated power supply)
+24 VDC ±10%
FG
AMP Japan
1–178288–3(housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
FANUC purchase specification: A02B–0120–K324
Cable connections
CPD1
1
+24V +24VDC ±10%
2
0V 0V
Recommended wire: 30/0.18 (0.8 mm2) or more

(On the external power supply side, an M3 crimp terminal is provided.)
Power is fed from an external 24 VDC power supply to the LCD unit
through the MDI unit.
D Connection of a power With an LCD/MDI integration unit, the connection of a power supply to
supply to the LCD unit the LCD unit is completed inside the unit, so that the machine tool builder
need not make any connections.
MDI Unit LCD Unit

AMP Japan
CPD2 2–178288–3 CP5
(AMP) (housing) (AMP)
1–175218–5
1 +24V (contact) 1 +24V
2 0V 2 0V
3 3
FG
AMP Japan
1–178288–3(housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
Cable connections
CPD2 CP5
1 1
+24V +24V
2 2
0V 0V
Recommended cable: A02B–0166–K880 (55 cm)
93
www.plcworld.cn
D LCD video connection With an LCD/MDI integration unit, the video connection to the LCD unit
is made inside the unit, so that the machine tool builder need not make any
connections.
MDI Unit LCD Unit

JA1 JA1
1 VDR 11 1 VDR 11
Video cable
2 0V 12 VSYNC 2 0V 12 VSYNC
3 VDG 13 3 VDG 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC 8 18 HSYNC
9 19 (+24V) 9 19
10 (+24V) 20 10 20
( ): Signal not used
Video cable connection

Cable connector on JA1 side
· Connector
FI40B–20S
(Soldering type, 15–pin)
Cable connector on the 1 1 · Case
JA1 side VDR VDR FI–20–CV5
· Connector 2 2 These are
FI40B–20S 0V 0V manufac-
3 3
(Soldering type, VDG tured by
VDG
15–pin) 4 4 Hirose
0V 0V Electric.
· Case 5 5
FI–20–CV5 VDB VDB
These are 6 6
manufactured by 0V 0V
18 18
Hirose Electric. HSYNC HSYNC
16 16
0V 0V
12 12
VSYNC VSYNC
14 14
0V 0V
Shield
Recommended wire:
A66L–0001–0371: Coaxial cable (5–conductor, common shield)
Recommended cable:
A02B–0166–K870 (55 cm)
94
www.plcworld.cn
5.2.4 Example where one FS18i and two Power Mate i’s are connected
Connecting to the 7.2″
LCD Unit by the
Display Link
(Multiple Connection)
LCD/MDI UNIT
A02B–0166–C261#xx
J45
JD13
24V
JN1
J47
JD41B
FS18i–TA JD45 JD41 #1
#0 J45 #0 #2
24V
JD41A
Machine control
panel selector
switch
JD41B
Power JD45 JD41
Mate i
24V #1 J45
JD41A CRT link adapter
A02B–0259–C301
JD41B
Power JD45 JD41
Mate i
24V #2 J45
JD41A
CRT link terminator unit

A02B–0259–D001
1) When two Power Mates are connected to the FS18C, the CRT/MDI
selector and CRT/MDI control for the Power Mate that were needed
are no longer necessary.
2) The CRT link adapter and CRT link terminator unit are necessary.
Also, specify an LCD/MDI unit that supports the CRT link. A separate
type MDI also is available.
3) In this connection, graphic display is not possible, and the memory
card interface on the side is not available.
95
www.plcworld.cn
Power Mate, i series CNC CRT link adapter
JD41 [JD45] JD41

1 RXD 11 0V 1 RXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *RXD 12 0V
J45
3 TXD 13 (RXTM1) 3 TXD 13 (RXTM1)
4 *TXD 14 (RXTM2) 4 *TXD 14 (RXTM2)
5 (RXALM) 15 (TXTM1) 5 (RXALM) 15 (TXTM1)
6 (*RXALM) 16 (TXTM2) 6 (*RXALM) 16 (TXTM2)
7 (TXALM) 17 (COMMA) 7 (TXALM) 17 (COMMA)
8 (*TXALM) 18 (*COMMA) 8 (*TXALM) 18 (*COMMA)
9 (ATCH1) 19 9 (ATCH1) 19
10 20 (ATCH2) 10 20 (ATCH2)
Cable wiring (J45)
JD41 JD41B
1 1
RXD RXD
2 2
*RXD *RXD
3 3
TXD TXD
4 4
*TXD *TXD
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
Shield
Recommended wire material specifications:

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 pair)
Housing PCR–V20LA
NOTE
Connector names in brackets [ ] are for when an i series
CNC is used.
NOTE
1 Place the CRT link adapter right next to (within 500 mm) the
Power Mate to keep the cable between the Power Mate and
the CRT link adapter as short as possible.
2 The cable between the CRT/MDI unit (JD13) and the CRT
link adapter (JD41B) is the same as the above.
3 The cable between the CRT link adapter (JD41A) and the
CRT link adapter (JD41B) is the same as the above.
4 Signals in parentheses () are used on a separate interface.
Take care not to connect to these signals.
96
www.plcworld.cn
Unit selection with

interface Separate type MDI unit
CRT/MDI unit
JN1
(PCR-EV20MDT)
Machine control panel
1 *SEL0 11 *SEL4
2 0V 12 0V
J47
3 *SEL1 13 *SEL5 Unit No. selector switch
4 0V 14 0V
5 *SEL2 15 *SEL6
6 0V 16 0V
7 *SEL3 17 *SEL7
8 0V 18 0V
9 19
10 20
Cable wiring (J47)

Unit No. selector switch
JN1
#0
1 #1
*SEL0 #2
3 #3
*SEL1 #4
5 #5
*SEL2 #6
7 #7
*SEL3 #8
11 #9
*SEL4 #10
13 #11
*SEL5 #12
15 #13
*SEL6 #14
17 #15
*SEL7 Common
2,4,6,8,12,14,16,18
0V
When the total length of the CRT link cable is between 50 to 100 m,
connect *SEL5 to 0V. The overall line length is the total length of the CRT
interface cables in use. When the total length exceeds 50 mm, the cables
cannot be used in a detachable configuration.
97
www.plcworld.cn
Relationship between selector switch
Unit No. *SEL7 *SEL4 *SEL3 *SEL2 *SEL1 *SEL0
#0
#1 f
#2 f
#3 f
#4 f
#5 f f
#6 f f
#7 f f
#8 f
#9 f f
#10 f f
#11 f f
#12 f f
#13 f f f
#14 f f f : Switch open
#15 f f f f : Switch closed
Common f – – – – – – : Either OK
screens

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 pair)
Housing PCR–V20LA
Max. line length 10m
98
www.plcworld.cn
5.2.5 The detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit is a 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit housed in a
Connection of the portable dustproof case. The unit can be connected/disconnected while
the power is turned on.
Detachable 7.2″
LCD/MDI Unit Via the
Display Link
Detachable LCD/MDI unit

Cabinet
Control unit
Connection
panel
Connector
panel
External
power supply
24 VDC
(1) The detachable LCD/MDI unit is not provided with a cable.

(2) The machine tool builder is required to prepare a connector panel,
external power supply, and connection panel.
(3) The machine tool builder is required to prepare all interconnection
cables.
1) Interconnection diagram
Cabinet
Con-
nector J132 24 VDC
panel power
supply
Connection
Detachable panel
LCD/MDI Control
unit unit
J127 J128 J143
CA50 JD45
DC24V±10%
1.0A
99
www.plcworld.cn
(a) The total length of the cables (J127, J128, and J143) between the
detachable LCD/MDI unit and control unit must not exceed 50 m.
(b) The cables J127, J128, and J132 also serve as the 24 VDC power
line for the detachable LCD/MDI unit. On the 24 VDC line, a
voltage drop which corresponds to the resistances of the 24 V and
0 V lines of these cables occurs. Considering this voltage drop,
determine the cable length so that 24 VDC ±10% is provided at the
CA50 connector of the unit.
(c) While the power is turned on, only the connector (shaded in the
figure above) of the connection panel can be attached or detached.
The other connectors (such as CA50 and JD41) must not be
attached and detached while the power is turned on.
Cabinet
Detachable LCD/MDI unit Connection panel Connector panel
CA50 (01) RXD RXD JD45 (01) Control
unit
CA50 (02) *RXD *RXD JD45 (02)
CA50 (03) TXD TXD JD45 (03)
CA50 (04) *TXD *TXD JD45 (04)
CA50 (15) ATCH1 (*1) 0V JD45 (11, 12)

CA50 (16) ATCH2 to DI
+24V (*2)
CA50 (09, 10) +24V
+24 V external power
CA50 (19, 20) 0V supply
0V DC24V
CA50 (05) FG
(Cabinet) Shield
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit are not
used.
2 To allow the detachable LCD/MDI unit to be connected or
disconnected while the power to the i Series CNC is on,
ensure that the 0 V line of the i Series CNC is first connected
to the 0 V line of the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
100
www.plcworld.cn
2) Details of the cable J127

Detachable LCD/MDI unit
CA50 Connection panel

04 03 02 01
J127
*TXD TXD *RXD RXD
10 09 08 07 06 05
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
+24V +24V FG (1) Soldering type
HR22–12TPD–20S
16 15 14 13 12 11 (2) Crimp type
· Housing
ATCH2 ATCH1
HR22–12TPD–20SC
· Contact
20 19 18 17 HR22–SC–122
· Automatic crimping
0V 0V tool
HR22–TA2428HC
Detachable LCD/MDI unit Connection panel

CA50
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
#24AWG pair
03
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
09
+24V +24V
10
+24V +24V
(*1) ATCH1 15
#24AWG
16
(*1) ATCH2
19
0V 0V
20
0V 0V
05
FG Drain wire FG
Shield
Recommended wire:
A66L–0001–0298: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
(#24AWG pair × 2, #24AWG × 10, drain wire, outside cable diameter: 8.5 mm)
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 are not used.
2 FG
Connect CA50 (05) to the FG pin of the connection panel using a drain wire.
Connect the FG pin of the connection panel to the frame ground.
For grounding, use a twisted wire, 100 to 300 mm long, with a cross–sectional area of 2 mm2
or more.
3 The outside cable diameter that matches the connector CA50 is 8.5 mm. When using a cable
whose outside diameter is smaller than 8.5 mm, increase the diameter of the cable at the
connector joint area to 8.5 mm by using a material such as a shrinkable tube or tape to maintain
a dustproof seal.
101
www.plcworld.cn
Connector panel i Series CNC
JD45 (PCR–EV20MDT)
01 RXD 11 0V
02 *RXD 12 0V
J143
03 TXD 13 RXTM1
04 *TXD 14 RXTM2
Honda Tsushin Kogyo 05 15 TXTM1

Co., Ltd.
PCR–E20F 06 16 TXTM2
FANUC specification 07 17
· Soldering type
(with a case) 08 18
A02B–0120–K301
· Crimp type 09 19
(with a case)
A02B–0120–K302 10 20
Pins 09 and 20 are used to check the

connection of a handy operator’s panel.
Cable connection (J143)

Connector panel
i Series CNC
JD41
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
03
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
13
RXTM1
14
RXTM2
15
TXTM1
16
TXTM2
11
0V 0V
12
0V 0V
Shield
Cable clamp
Recommended wire:
A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG × 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable Ltd.
102
www.plcworld.cn
Connection panel Connector panel
RXTP RXTP
Pair
*RXTP *RXTP
TXTP TXTP
Pair
*TXTP *TXTP
+24V +24V
+24V +24V
0V 0V
0V 0V
(*2)
FG (*3)
Shield
Wire:
wire ³ A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable Ltd.
wire ³ Twisted wire with a cross–sectional area of 2 mm2 or more (FG)
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 are not used.
2 FG on the connection panel
Connect the FG of the connection panel to the frame ground.
or more.
The FG is used to ground the shield of the J127 cable.
3 FG on the connector panel
Connect the shield of the J128 cable on the connector panel to the frame ground.
or more.
103
www.plcworld.cn
5) Details of the J132 cable
Connector panel
External power supply J132

DC24V
Cable connection (J132)

External power supply Connector panel
DC24V +24V
0V 0V
104
www.plcworld.cn
5.2.6 This section describes the connection of an MDI unit with an intelligent
Connection with an terminal. For other intelligent terminal connections, see Chapter 9.
Connection with an intelligent terminal
Control Intelligent FA full

unit terminal keyboard
24VDC
A flat cable about 50 cm
long for the soft keys is
included with the intelligent
terminal. This cable need
not be connected when an
intelligent terminal with a
touch panel is used.
MDI unit
CK2
JD45 CK1
This section describes the inside of the dotted box.

Either an FA full keyboard or MDI unit is connected.
105
www.plcworld.cn
D Connection with an MDI

unit
CNC control unit MDI unit
JD45 CK1
01 :KEY00 11 :KEY01 01 :KEY00 11 :KEY01
02 :KEY02 12 :KEY03 02 :KEY02 12 :KEY03
03 :KEY04 13 :KEY05 03 :KEY04 13 :KEY05
04 :KEY06 14 :KEY07 04 :KEY06 14 :KEY07
05 :COM00 15 :COM01 u u t t 05 :COM00 15 :COM01
06 :COM02 16 :COM03 06 :COM02 16 :COM03
07 :COM04 17 :COM05 07 :COM04 17 :COM05
08 :COM06 18 :COM07 08 :COM06 18 :COM07
09 :COM08 19 :COM09 09 :COM08 19 :COM09
10 :COM10 20 :COM11 10 :COM10 20 :COM11
Cable
JD45 CK1
Honda PCR connector Honda PCR connector
:KEY00 (01) (01) :KEY00
:KEY02 (02) (02) :KEY02
:KEY04 (03) (03) :KEY04
:KEY06 (04) (04) :KEY06
:COM00 (05) (05) :COM00
:COM02 (06) (06) :COM02
:COM04 (07) (07) :COM04
:COM06 (08) (08) :COM06
:COM08 (09) (09) :COM08
:COM10 (10) (10) :COM10
:KEY01 (11) (11) :KEY01
:KEY03 (12) (12) :KEY03
:KEY05 (13) (13) :KEY05
:KEY07 (14) (14) :KEY07
:COM01 (15) (15) :COM01
:COM03 (16) (16) :COM03
:COM05 (17) (17) :COM05
:COM07 (18) (18) :COM07
:COM09 (19) (19) :COM09
:COM11 (20) (20) :COM11
Shield
Ground plate

Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
Recommended cable connector (JD45, CK1):
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
106
www.plcworld.cn
5.3
CONNECTION WITH
INPUT/OUTPUT
DEVICES
5.3.1 An input/output device is used to enter information such as CNC
Overview programs and parameters from an external device to the CNC, or to output
information from the CNC to an external device.
The input/output devices usable with the i Series CNC include Handy
File. The interface of the input/output devices electrically conforms to
RS–232–C, so that a connection can be made with a device that has an
RS–232–C interface.
The tables below indicate the serial ports of the i Series CNC. For the
serial ports on the remote buffer, see Chapter 12. For the serial ports on
the personal computer and intelligent terminal, see Chapters 8 and 9.
(For 16i/18i/21i of LCD–mounted type)

Port name Interface location
First channel (JD36A) Main control unit
Second channel (JD36B) Main control unit (*1)
Third channel (JD28A) On the remote buffer option

printed circuit board
(For 160i/180i/210i with PC functions)

First channel on the CNC side Main control unit

(JD36A)
Second channel on the CNC side Main control unit

(JD36B)
Third channel on the CNC side On the remote buffer option

(JD28A) printed circuit board
First channel on the PC side Main control unit (*2)

(JD33)
On the PC interface connector Second channel on the PC side

unit (JD36F)
(For 16i/18i/21i of stand–alone type)

First channel (JD5A) Main control unit
Second channel (JD5B) Main control unit
Third channel (JD28A) On the remote buffer option

Serial port dedicated to a touch On the 10.4″ LCD unit or 9.5″ LCD (*3)
panel unit for a CNC with a touch panel
107
www.plcworld.cn
(For 160i/180i/210i with an intelligent terminal)

First channel on the CNC side Main control unit

(JD36A)
Second channel on the CNC side Main control unit

(JD36B)
Third channel on the CNC side On the remote buffer option

(JD28A) printed circuit board
First channel on the intelligent On the intelligent terminal (*2)

terminal side (JD33)
Second channel on the intelligent On the intelligent terminal

terminal side (JD34)
On the 10.4″ LCD unit or 9.5″ Serial port dedicated to a touch (*3)
LCD unit for a CNC with a touch panel
panel
NOTE
1 When a touch panel is used, this serial port is used for touch
panel communication on the CNC side, so that this port
cannot be used as a general–purpose port.
2 When a touch panel is used, this serial port is used for touch
panel communication on the PC side, so that this port
cannot be used as a general–purpose port.
3 This serial port is dedicated to touch panel communication.
Even if no touch panel is attached, this port cannot be used
as a general–purpose port.
108
www.plcworld.cn
5.3.2
Connecting I/O Devices
R232–1 R232–2
JD36A JD36B Punch panel
Handy File
(LCD–mounted type)
NOTE
This interface is based on the RS–232–C interface of the CNC. Therefore, for a Series 210i CNC
control unit with PC functions, the parameters and programs should be input and output using
the RS–232–C interface of the personal computer (JD33). However, the interface shown above
can be used when using any of the following functions which are processed directly by the CNC.
Cases in which this RS–232–C interface is used when a Series 210i with PC functions is used
Ladder uploading or downloading via RS–232–C using FAPT–LADDER or FAPT–LADDER II

Ladder monitoring from an external PC using FAPT–LADDER II
DNC operation via RS–232–C, external I/O device control
Input/output of parameters and programs by using the CNC screen display function
109
www.plcworld.cn
5.3.3
RS–232–C Serial Port
CNC
JD36A, JD36B RELAY CONNECTOR

PCR–E20MDK–SL–A (DBM–25S)
(JD5A, JD5B 1 FG
PCR–V20MD) 14
2 SD
1 RD 11 SD 15
3 RD
2 0V 12 0V 16
i i h 4 RS
3 DR 13 ER 17
5 CS
4 0V 14 0V 18
6 DR
5 CS 15 RS 19
7 SG
6 0V 16 0V 20 ER
8 CD
7 CD 17 21
9
8 0V 18 (+5V) 22
10
9 19 +24V 23
11
10 +24V 20 (+5V) 24
12
25 +24V
13
NOTE
1 +24 V can be used as the power supply for FANUC
RS–232–C equipment.
2 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal
names are not indicated.
3 Pins 18 and 20 (+5V) are provided for touch channel
connection. Never use these pins for making any other
connection.
4 The upper connector specification of JD36A/36B is used
with the LCD–mounted type i series CNC.
The lower connector specification (in parentheses) is used
with the stand–alone type i series CNC.
110
www.plcworld.cn
CABLE CONNECTION
1 3 RD
RD
2
0V
3 6 DR
DR
0V 4
5 5 CS
CS
6
0V
7 8 CD
CD
8
0V
9
10
+24V
11 2 SD
SD
12
0V
13 20 ER
ER
14
0V
15 4 RS
RS
16 7 SG
0V
17
18
19 25 +24V
+24V
20 1
FG
SHIELD
GND
GROUNDING PLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)
RECOMMENDED CABLE–SIDE CONNECTORS (JD36A, JD36B)
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu, Ltd.)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION (PUNCH PANEL)
For JD36A and JD36B
<Narrow width type>
A02B–0236–C191 (1 m)
A02B–0236–C192 (2 m)
A02B–0236–C193 (5 m)
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION (PUNCH PANEL)
For JD5A and JD5B
<Narrow width type>
A02B–0120–C191 (1 m)
A02B–0120–C192 (2 m)
A02B–0120–C193 (5 m)
NOTE
1 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal
names are not indicated.
2 The recommended cable connector FI30–20S
(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for
connectors JD5A and JD5B of the stand–alone type i Series
CNC.
111
www.plcworld.cn
5.3.4
RS–232–C Interface
Specification
RS–232–C Interface Generally signals as follows are used in RS–232–C interface.
signals
CNC
Output
SD (Send data)
Input
RD (Recieve data)
RS (Request to Send) When CS is not used

short CS and RS.
CS (Enable to send)
When DR is not
used short DR
ER (Ready)
and ER.
DR (Data set ready)

Always short
CD (Check data) ER and CD.
SG (Signal ground)
FG (Frame ground)
Fig. 5.3.4 (a) RS–232–C interface
112
www.plcworld.cn
Signal description of Signal RS–232C I/O Description

RS–232–C interface name circuit
number
SD 103 Output Sending

Start bit Stop bit
data
RD 104 Input Receiving ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF
(When ISO code “0” is sent)
data
RS 105 Input Sending This signal is set to on when NC starts

request sending data and is turned off when
transmission ends.
CS 106 Input Sending When both this signal and the DR

permitted signal are set, the NC can send data. If
external device processing is delayed
by a punching operation, etc., NC data
sending can be stopped by turning off
this signal after sending two
characters, including the data being
sent currently. If this signal will not be
used, make sure to strap this signal
circuit to the RS signal circuit.
DR 107 Input Data set When external device is ready to

ready operate, this signal is set. This signal
should usually be connected to the
signal indicating external device power
supply being on. (ER signal of external
device). See Note below.
The NC transfers data when this signal
is set. If the signals turned off during
data transfer, alarm 086 is issued. If the
DR signal will not be used, make sure
to strap this signal circuit to the ER
signal circuit.
ER 108.2 Output NC ready This signal is set when the NC is ready

to to operate. External device should
operation regard the SD signal as being
significant when the ER signal is set.
CD 109 Input Signal Since this signal is not used in

quality connections with external device, the
signal signal circuit must be strapped, inside
the connecting cable, to the ER signal
circuit.
SG 102 Signal
grounding
FG 101 Frame
grounding
NOTE
Signal on/off state is defined as follows;
–3V or lower +3V or higher
Function OFF ON
Signal Condition Marking Spacing
113
www.plcworld.cn
Transmission Method of
RS–232–C interface
Start–stop Generally, two transmission methods are available at the serial interface.
i Series CNC use the start–stop method. With this method, start and stop
signals are output before and after each data bit.
One character in start–stop
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8
Start Data bit Stop bits

bit (8 bit including one parity bit) (2 bits)
Codes Transmission codes are as follows:
(i) EIA code and Control codes DC1 to DC4.
(ii)ISO code and Control codes DC1 to DC4 (Optional ISO code input is
necessary.)
The connected external device must be able to recognize the following
control codes, sent from NC.
Control code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC1 Tape reader start f f f
DC2 Tape punch designation f f f
DC3 Tape reader stop f f f f
DC4 Tape punch release f f f f
NOTE
The listed control codes are used for both EIA and ISO.
In this interface, control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.

(a) NC can control external device by issuing codes DC1 to DC4.
(b) When external processing falls behind the pace of the NC signals
(When NC issues data)
(i) External device can temporarily stop NC data output by using the
NC’s CS signal. Data output stops within two characters including
a currently transmitting character when CS OFF signal is input to
NC. When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission start.
(ii)If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within ten
characters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC starts
sending data again.
(c) When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, the
external device must satisfy the specification shown in Table 5.3.4 (a).
114
www.plcworld.cn
Table 5.3.4 (a)

ISO code EIA code
Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 f f F 0 f F Numeral 0
1 f f f F f 1 F f Numeral 1
3 f f F f f 3 f F f f Numeral 3
7 f f f F f f f 7 F f f f Numeral 7
8 f f f f F 8 f F Numeral 8
9 f f f F f 9 f f F f Numeral 9
A f F f a f f F f Address A
B f F f b f f F f Address B
C f f F f f c f f f F f f Address C
D f F f d f f F f Address D
E f f F f f e f f f F f f ? Address E
F f f F f f f f f f F f f Address F
G f F f f f g f f F f f f Address G
H f f F h f f f F Address H
I f f f F f i f f f f F f Address I
J f f f F f j f f F f Address J
K f f F f f k f f F f Address K
L f f f F f l f F f f Address L
M f f F f f m f f F f Address M
N f f F f f n f F f f Address N
Not used at significant data zone in ISO
O f f f F f f f o f F f f code.
Assumed as address 0 at EIA code.
P f f F p f f F f f f Address P
Q f f f F f q f f f F Address Q
R f f f F f r f f F f Address R
S f f F f f s f f F f Address S
T f f f F f t f F f f Address T
U f f F f f u f f F f Address U
V f f F f f v f F f f Address V
W f f f F f f f w f F f f Address W
X f f f f F x f f F f f f Address X
Y f f f F f y f f f F Address Y
Z f f f F f z f f F f Address Z
DEL f f f f f F f f f Del f f f f F f f f : Delete (cancel erroneous hole)
NUL F Blank F : No holes. Not used at significant data

zone is EIA code.
BS f f F BS f f F f : Back space
HT f F f Tab f f f F f f : Tabulator
LF or NL f F f CR or EOB f F End of block
CR f f F f f : Carriage return
SP f f F SP f F : Space
% f f F f f ER f F f f Absolute rewind stop
( f f F ( 2–4–5 ) f f F f Control out (start of comment)
) f f f F f ( 2–4–7 ) f f F f Control in (end of comment)
+ f f F f f + f f f F : Plus sign
– f f F f f – f F – Minus sign
: f f f F f Assumed as program number in ISO code.
/ f f f F f f f / f f F f Optional block skip
. f f F f f . f f f F f f Decimal point
# f f F f f : Sharp
$ f F f : Dollar symbol
& f f F f f & f F f f : Ampersand
’ f F f f f : Apostrophe
: f f f F f : Asterisk
, f f f F f , f f f F f f : Comma
; f f f f F f f : Semicolon
< f f f F f : Left angle bracket
= f f f f F f f : Equal mark
> f f f f F f f : Right angle bracket
? f f f F f f f : Question mark
@ f f F : Commerical at mark
” f F f : Quotation mark
115
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
1 When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA
converter, the following items must be noted in Table 5.3.4
(a).
Control out (Comment field start)
Control in (Comment field end)
EIA code (.......................) CR o ....................
Condition1 Condition1 Condition2 Condition3
ISO code (.......................) LF : ....................
Condition1
Left parenthesis “(”of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 5
when used in the EIA code.
Right parenthesis “)”of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 7
when used in the EIA code.
Condition2
EIA code CR is LF in ISO code.
Condition3
EIA code O is : in ISO code.
2 Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes output

from the NC. So they need not to be punched on the NC
tape.
(iii) Transmission rate (Baud rate)

The transmission rate (Baud rate) is the number of bits transferred per
second.
The following baud rates are available depending on the system
parameter.
50, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600.
(Example)
Baud rate : 110
When using one start bit and two stop bits (totalling 11 bits
per character):
110
Transmission characters/second= =10 characters/second
11
(Max.)
(iv) Cable length
The cable length depends on the external device type. Consult with the
device manufacturers for actual connecting cable lengths.
When cable A (A66L–0001–0041) is used, cable length is as follows
by the specification of NC.
for RS–232C 100m or less ... 4800 bauds or less
50m or less ... 9600 bauds or less
116
www.plcworld.cn
Time chart when the NC (1) NC outputs DC1.

receives data (2) The external device starts sending data upon receiving DC1.
(Read into memory) (3) NC sends DC3 when NC processing is delayed.
(4) The external device stops sending data to NC after receiving DC3.
The device may send up to 10 characters after receiving DC3. If it
sends more than 10 characters, alarm 087 will occur.
(5) NC reissues DC1 upon completing delayed processing.
(6) The external device restarts data output upon receiving the DC1 code
(the data must be the next data to the preceding.)
(7) NC sends DC3 upon completing data read.
(8) The external device stops sending data.
10ms or longer 10ms or longer
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
DC1 CD3 DC1 DC3
SD(Output)
ER code
RD(Input)
DR(Input)
CS(Input)
Up to 10 characters
1ms or longer
117
www.plcworld.cn
Time chart when the NC (1) NC output DC2.

send data (Punch out) (2) NC outputs punch data in succession.
(3) When data processing is delayed at the external device.
(a) Data output stops within two characters including a currently
transmitting character when CS signal is turned off.
When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission starts. (See Fig.
5.3.4 (b))
(b) If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within ten
characters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC starts sending
data again. (See Fig. 5.3.4 (c))
(4) The NC starts sending the next data if the CS signal is turned on after
the external device completes data processing.
(5) The NC issues DC4 upon completing data output.
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
DC2 DC4
SD(Output)
RD(Input)
CS(Input)
1ms or longer Within 2 characters
Fig. 5.3.4 (b)
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
DC2 DC4
SD(Output)
DC3 DC1
RD(Input)
Within 10 characters
DR(Input)
CS(Input)
1ms or longer
Fig. 5.3.4 (c)
118
www.plcworld.cn
Connection between
RS–232–C interface and
external device
CNC External device
SD SD side
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
FG FG
119
www.plcworld.cn
D The cable for connecting the PG–Mate to the NC should be connected

as shown in the below diagram.
CNC External device

SD SD side
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
FG FG
Prepare the cable with I/O device as follows :
Serial
interface
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
ER
DR
Cable : twist 10 pairs 0.18mm2, with shield
120
www.plcworld.cn
5.3.5
FANUC Handy File
Connection
Cable side connector

Connector: DBM–25P
(Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
CNC
Cover: DB–C2–J9
JD36A, JD36B
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
Relaying
1 RD 11 SD cable FANUC
2 0V 12 0V Handy File
3 DR 13 ER
4 0V 14 0V FG
5 CS 15 RS
6 0V 16 0V
7 CD 17
Accessory for
8 0V 18
HANDY FILE
9 19 +24V
10 +24V 20
Relaying connector
Connector: DBM–25S
Lock metal: D20418–J9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
RELAYING CONNECTOR FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD
SIGNAL LAYOUT 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24
NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set suitable parameters on reader/puncher interface for FANUC Handy File. The baud rate is
4800 baud in standard.
5 Connect the FANUC Handy File to either JD36 or JD36B. Do not use both pins; the power
capacity may exceed that of +24V and blow the fuse.
6 Make no connections to pins 18 (+5V) and 20 (+5V). JD5A and JD5B have no +5V pins.
7 The upper connector name on the CNC side is for the LCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The
lower connector name, enclosed in parentheses, is for the stand–alone type i Series CNC.
121
www.plcworld.cn
5.4
CONNECTING THE
HIGH–SPEED SKIP
(HDI)
5.4.1
General
High–speed skip (HDI)

JA40
This figure shows an

example of connecting a
LCD–mounted type i
Series CNC.
Switch
122
www.plcworld.cn
5.4.2
Connection to the
CNC
High–speed Skip (HDI)
JA40
(PCR–EV20MDT)
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A
1 HDI0 11
2 0V 12
3 13
4 14
5 (ES) 15
6 16
7 (SVC) 17
8 (ENB1) 18
9 (ENB2) 19
10 20
Signals inside ( ) are used with the analog spindle.
NOTE
1 The upper connector specification of JA40 is for the
LCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connector
specification, enclosed in parentheses, is for the
stand–alone type i Series CNC.
2 With 16i/18i/160i/180i, eight DIs (HDI0 to HDI7) can be
used in total. With 21i/210i, only one DI (HDI0) can be used.
3 All DI cannot be used on the 20i.
123
www.plcworld.cn
Cable connections
JA40
1
HDI0
2
0V
11
HDI1
12
0V
3
HDI2
4
0V
13
HDI3
14
0V
6
HDI4
5 or 10
0V
15
HDI5
16
0V
17
HDI6
18
0V
19
HDI7
20
0V
7
8
9
10
Shield
Ground plate
The 0V signal of pin 5 functions as a common signal when analog output is used.
So, as the 0V signal paired with HDI4 when analog output is used together with a
high–speed DI, use the 0V signal of pin 10.
Recommended cable connector:

FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)
NOTE
The recommended cable connector FI30–20S
(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for the
124
www.plcworld.cn
5.4.3
Input Signal Rules for
the High–speed Skip
(HDI)
Circuit configuration
CNC
liL/liH FILTER RECEIVER

DRIVER
VH/VL
SHIELD
Absolute maximum rating

Input voltage range Vin: –3.6 to +13.6 V
Input characteristics
Unit Symbol Specification Unit Remark
High level input voltage VH 3.6 to 11.6 V
Low level input voltage VL 0 to 1.0 V
High level input current liH 2 max mA Vin=5 V
11 max mA Vin = 10 V
Low level input current liL –8.0 max mA Vin = 0 V
Input signal pulse duration 20 min ms
NOTE
The plus (+) sign of IiH/IiL represents the direction of flow
into the receiver. The minus (–) sign of IiH/IiL represents the
direction of flow out of the receiver.
125
www.plcworld.cn
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION B–63003EN/04
6 SPINDLE CONNECTION
126
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
The figure below shows the spindle–related connections. Note that the
number of connectable spindles depends on the model, the number of paths,
and the configuration. So, see the tables that follow the figure below.
First serial spindle

Position
coder
JA7B SPM
JA41
JA7A TB2 Spindle
motor
Second serial spindle Position

coder
JA7B SPM
JA7A TB2 Spindle
motor
Third serial spindle Position

coder
JA7B SPM
CNC
main board JA7A TB2 Spindle
motor
Fourth serial spindle

Position
coder
JA7B SPM
JA7A TB2 Spindle
motor
Position
coder
JA40 Inverter Spindle

motor
First serial spindle

Position
coder
JA41 JA7B SPM
JA7A TB2 Spindle
motor
Second serial spindle Position

coder
JA7B SPM
JA7A TB2 Spindle
motor
Third serial spindle Position

coder
CNC JA7B SPM
sub–CPU
board TB2 Spindle
JA7A
motor
Fourth serial spindle

Position
coder
JA7B SPM
JA7A TB2 Spindle
motor
Position
coder
JA40 Inverter Spindle

motor
127
www.plcworld.cn
For one–path control with Series 16i

First serial Second serial Third serial Fourth serial Position coder
Analog output
spindle on main spindle on main spindle on main spindle on main (for analog
on main board
board board board board spindle)
f f f
f f f f
f f
For two–path control using two CPUs with Series 16i

(Path 1)
Analog output
on main board
f f f
f f f f
f f
(Path 2)
First serial Second serial Third serial Fourth serial Analog output Position coder
spindle on spindle on spindle on spindle on on sub–CPU (for analog
sub–CPU board sub–CPU board sub–CPU board sub–CPU board board spindle)
f f f
f f f f
f f
For two–path control using one CPU with Series 16i

(The interface on the main board is shared by path 1 and path 2.)
Analog output
on main board
f Path 1 f Path 1 f Path 1
f Path 1 f Path 1 f Path 2 f Path 2
128
www.plcworld.cn
For three–path control using two CPUs with Series 16i

(The interface on the main board is used by path 1.)
Analog output
on main board
f Path 1 f Path 1
(The interface on the sub–CPU board is shared by path 2 and path 3.)
For one–path control with Series 18i

Analog output
on main board
f f f
f f f
f f
For two–path control using two CPUs with Series 18i

(Path 1)
Analog output
on main board
f f f
f f f
f f
129
www.plcworld.cn
(Path 2)
f f f
f f f
f f
For two–path control using one CPU with Series 18i

(The interface on the main board is shared by path 1 and path 2.)
Analog output
on main board
For Series 21i

Analog output
on main board
f f
f f
f f
For Series 20i

Analog output
on main board
f f
130
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
When the spindle function is used on the sub–CPU board,
the option for analog output or serial output is always
required on the main board.
NOTE
For connection between a spindle amplifier and spindle
motor and connection between a spindle amplifier and
position coder, refer to the relevant manual for the SPINDLE
MOTOR α Series.
131
www.plcworld.cn
6.1
SERIAL SPINDLE
6.1.1
Connection of One to
Two Serial Spindles CNC Spindle amplifier module
JA41 (main board,

sub–CPU board)
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A JA7B
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–E20MDT)
1 SIN 11 1 SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 3 SOUT 13 0V
4 *SOUT 14 0V 4 *SOUT 14 0V
5 [ ] 15 [ ] 5 15 0V
6 [ ] 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 [ ] 17 [ ] 7 17
8 [ ] 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 [ ] 9 (+5V) 19
10 [ ] 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)
NOTE
1 When an optical I/O link cable is used for connection
between the NC and a spindle amplifier, the +5V signals
indicated in parentheses are used to feed power to the
optical I/O link adapter. Do not connect these signals when
an optical cable is not used. The signals in brackets ([ ])
are used when a position coder is used with an analog
spindle or when three or four serial spindles are used.
2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used with the
specification (in parentheses) is used with the stand–alone
type i Series CNC.
3 The second serial spindle is connected as a branch from the
spindle amplifier module.
132
www.plcworld.cn
Cable connection
Connector JA41 Connector JA7B

3 1
SOUT SIN
*SOUT 4 2 *SIN
CNC
SIN 1 3 SOUT Spindle
amplifier
*SIN 2 4 *SOUT module
12,14,16 12,14,16
Ground plate Ground plate

PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE
1 In any of the following cases, make a connection via an
optical fiber cable by using an optical I/O link adapter:
D When the cable is 20 m or longer
D When the power magnetics cabinet containing a spindle
amplifier cannot be connected with the operator’s panel
cabinet containing a CNC control unit via a ground wire
with a cross–sectional area of 5.5 mm2 or more
D When the cable is subject to significant noise. For
example, when there is a strong electromagnetic noise
source such as a welding machine near the cable, or
when the cable runs in parallel with a power line or power
magnetics cable that can generate noise.
stand–alone type i Series CNC and JA7B.
133
www.plcworld.cn
6.1.2 With the Series 16i and 18i, three or four serial spindles can be connected
Connecting One to using the serial spindle connector panel described below.
Serial spindle connector panel specification: A13B–0180–B001
Four Serial Spindles
Outside dimensions of the serial spindle connector panel
The outside dimensions of the serial spindle connector panel are the same
as those for the optical I/O link adapter (A13B–0154–B001).
45
Connector for connection with a

spindle amplifier
JA7A–2 (second channel)
66
40
Connector for connection with a

spindle amplifier
JA7A–1 (first channel)
Connector for connection with the CNC

JA48 4–M3
7
18
Conditions for installing the serial spindle connector panel

D The serial spindle connector panel does not have an enclosed structure.
So, install the serial spindle connector panel in an enclosed cabinet as
used for the CNC.
D Ground the case by using the case mounting screws of the serial
spindle connector panel.
D The serial spindle connector panel is light, so that it need not be
secured with screws. However, ensure that the serial spindle
connector panel does not contact other electrical circuits and thus
cause a short circuit. When securing the serial spindle connector panel
to the cabinet, for example, attach an L–shaped metal fitting as shown
below with a case mounting screw (M3) of the serial spindle connector
panel.
L–shaped metal fitting
134
www.plcworld.cn
Connection diagram
(Connection diagram when only electrical cables are used)
Serial spindle
connector panel
SPM SPM
CNC JA7B JA7B
JA7A–1
JA7A JA7A
JA41 JA48
JA7B JA7B
JA7A–2
JA7A JA7A
SPM SPM
Interconnection cable 1
Interconnection cable 2 Interconnection cable 2
(Connection diagram when optical cables are used)
Serial spindle
connector panel
CNC JD1
JA7A–1
COP1
Optical link
JA41 JA48 adapter
JD1
JA7A–2 COP1
Optical
cable
SPM SPM
JD1 JA7B JA7B

COP1
Optical link JA7A JA7A
adapter
JD1 JA7B JA7B
COP1 JA7A JA7A
SPM SPM
Interconnection cable 4 Interconnection cable 2
135
www.plcworld.cn
(Cable connections when only electrical cables are used)

Cable connection between the CNC and serial spindle connector panel
(Interconnection cable 1)
CNC
(motherboard, sub–CPU board) Serial spindle connector panel
JA41
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A JA48
1 SINA 11 1 SINA 11
2 *SINA 12 0V 2 vSINA 12 0V
3 SOUTA 13 3 SOUTA 13
4 *SOUTA 14 0V 4 vSOUTA 14 0V
5 [PCA] 15 SINB 5 15 SOUTB
6 [*PCA] 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 [PCB] 17 *SINB 7 17 *SOUTB
8 [*PCB] 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 SOUTB 9 (+5V) 19 SINB
10 *SOUTB 20 (+5V) 10 *SINB 20 (+5V)
NOTE
1 When an optical cable is used for the connection between
the CNC and a spindle, the +5V signals indicated in
parentheses are used to feed power to the optical I/O link
adapter. Do not connect these signals when an optical
cable is not used. The signals in brackets ([ ]) are used when
a position coder is used. These signals must not be used
together with the second channel of the serial spindle
interface.
type i Series CNC.
3 The second and fourth serial spindles are connected as
branches from the spindle amplifier module.
136
www.plcworld.cn
Cable connection
JA41 JA48
1 3
SINA SOUTA
2 4
*SINA *SOUTA
3 1
SOUTA SINA
4 2
*SOUTA *SINA
15 15
SINB SOUTB
17 17
*SINB *SOUTB
19 19
SOUTB SINB
10 10
*SOUTB *SINB
12 12
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
16 16
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate

Recommended cable specification: A02B–0236–K845

Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P
(#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE
1 When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a
power line, a shielded wire must be connected to the ground
plate. When the CNC is installed close to the serial spindle
connector panel, however, no connection to the ground
plate is necessary.
stand–alone type i Series CNC and JA48.
137
www.plcworld.cn
Cable connection between the serial spindle connector panel and a spindle
amplifier
Serial spindle connector panel α spindle amplifier module
JA7A–1, 2 JA7B
(PCR–E20MD) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 SIN 11 1 SIN 11
2 :SIN 12 0V 2 :SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 3 SOUT 13
4 :SOUT 14 0V 4 :SOUT 14 0V
5 15 5 15
6 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)
NOTE
When an optical cable is used for the connection between
the CNC and a spindle, the +5V signals indicated in
parentheses are used to feed power to the optical I/O link
adapter. Do not connect these signals when an optical
cable is not used.
Cable connection
JA4A–1, 2 JA7B
1 3
SIN SOUT
2 4
*SIN *SOUT
3 1
SOUT SIN
4 2
*SOUT *SIN
12 12
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
16 16
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE
When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a
power line, a shielded wire needs to be connected to the
ground plate. When the serial spindle connector panel is
installed close to the spindle amplifier module, a connection
to the ground plate is unnecessary.
138
www.plcworld.cn
(Cable connections when optical cables are used)

Cable connection between the CNC and serial spindle connector panel
CNC (motherboard,
sub–CPU board) Serial spindle connector panel
JA41
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A JA48
1 SINA 11 1 SINA 11
2 :SINA 12 0V 2 :SINA 12 0V
3 SOUTA 13 3 SOUTA 13
4 :SOUTA 14 0V 4 :SOUTA 14 0V
5 [PCA] 15 SINB 5 15 SOUTB
6 [:PCA] 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 [PCB] 17 :SINB 7 17 *SOUTB
8 [:PCB] 18 +5V 8 18 +5V
9 +5V 19 SOUTB 9 +5V 19 SINB
10 :SOUTB 20 +5V 10 *SINB 20 +5V
NOTE
1 The signals in brackets ([ ]) are used when a position
coder is used. These signals must not be used together with
the second serial spindle interface.
type i Series CNC.
3 The second and fourth serial spindles are connected as
branches from the spindle amplifier module.
139
www.plcworld.cn
Cable connection
JA41 JA48
1 3
SINA SOUTA
2 4
*SINA *SOUTA
3 1
SOUTA SINA
4 2
*SOUTA *SINA
15 15
SINB SOUTB
17 17
*SINB *SOUTB
19 19
SOUTB SINB
10 10
*SOUTB *SINB
9 9
+5V +5V
18 18
+5V +5V
20 20
+5V +5V
12 12
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
16 16
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate

Recommended cable specification: A02B–0236–K847

NOTE
1 When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a
power line, a shielded wire needs to be connected to the
ground plate. When the CNC is installed close to the serial
spindle connector panel, however, a connection to the
ground plate is unnecessary.
stand–alone type i Series CNC and JA48.
140
www.plcworld.cn
(Cable connection between the serial spindle connector panel and an

optical I/O link adapter)
Serial spindle connector panel Optical I/O link adapter
JA7A–1, 2 JD1
(PCR–E20MD) (PCR–E20LMDT)
1 SIN 11 1 SIN 11
2 :SIN 12 0V 2 :SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 3 SOUT 13
4 :SOUT 14 0V 4 :SOUT 14 0V
5 15 5 15
6 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 +5V 8 18 +5V
9 +5V 19 9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V 10 20 +5V
Cable connection
JA7A–1, 2 JD1
1 4
SIN SOUT
2 3
*SIN *SOUT
3 2
SOUT SIN
4 1
*SOUT *SIN
9 9
+5V +5V
18 18
+5V +5V
20 20
+5V +5V
11 11
0V
12 12
0V 0V
13 13
0V
14 14
0V 0V
15 15
0V
16 16
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate


141
www.plcworld.cn
6.2
ANALOG SPINDLE CNC
INTERFACE Signal Name Description
JA40(Main board)
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A) SVC, ES Spindle command voltage
and common line
1 HDI0 11
ENB1, ENB2 Spindle enable signal (Note 1)
2 (0V) 12
3 13
4 14
5 ES 15
6 16
7 SVC 17
8 ENB1 18
9 ENB2 19
10 20
CABLE CONNECTION ANALOG SPINDLE

SERVO UNIT OR
INVERTER
SVC 7 DA2
ES 5 E
ENB1 8 SHIELD
ENB2 9
GROUNDING PLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE–SIDE CONNECTOR

RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE
1 Signals ENB1 and 2 turn on when the spindle command
voltage is effective. These signals are used when the
FANUC Analog Spindle Servo Unit is used.
2 The analog output ratings are as follows:
Output voltage: "10 V
Output current: 2 mA (maximum)
Output impedance: 100 ohms
3 The parenthesized signals are used for the high–speed skip
function (HDI).
type i Series CNC.
142
www.plcworld.cn
6.3
POSITION CODER CNC
INTERFACE JA41(Main board) Signal Name Description
(PCR–E20MD) :SC Position coder phase C signals
1 (SIN) 11 PA, :PA Position coder phase A signals
2 (:SIN) 12 0V PB, :PB Position coder phase A signals
3 (SOUT) 13
4 (:SOUT) 14 0V SOUT, :SOUT Serial spindle signals (Note)
SIN, :SIN
5 PA 15 SC
6 :PA 16 0V
7 PB 17 :SC
8 :PB 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V
POSITION CODER
CNC
5
PA A (PA)
6
:PA N (:PA)
7
PB 8 C (PB)
:PB R (:PB)
SC 15 B (:PZ)
17
:SC P (:PZ)
9,18,20
+5V H
12,14,16
0V K
SHIELD
GROUNDING
PLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE–SIDE CONNECTOR

RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION:
A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3),
MAX. LENGTH 20 m
NOTE
1 Signals SIN, :SIN, SOUT and :SOUT are for a serial
spindle. These signals are not used for an analog spindle.
2 As the connector on the cable side, the solder–type 15–pin
connector (FI40B–2015S, or conventional FI40–2015S)
manufactured by Hirose Electric cannot be used.
type i Series CNC.
143
www.plcworld.cn
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63003EN/04
7 SERVO INTERFACE
144
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 7. SERVO INTERFACE
7.1
CONNECTION TO
THE SERVO
AMPLIFIERS
Control unit
This figure is an example of connecting

Connection of FSSB
to an i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted
type panel.
145
www.plcworld.cn
7.1.1 This chapter describes how to connect the servo units to the Series
General 21i/210i control unit. For details of the connection of the Servo amplifier
α Series Descriptions (B–65162E), refer to the relevant manual.
7.1.2
Interface to the Servo
Amplifiers Control unit
Servo amplifier modules

COP10A COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
Optical fiber cable
COP10A
16i/160i : Maximum 8 axes
18i/180i : Maximum 6 axes COP10B
21i/210i : Maximum 4 axes
20i: Maximum 4 axes COP10A
COP10B
Cable Length Restriction COP10A
Within 100 m between units
Total length within 500 m
The connection between the CNC control unit and the servo amplifiers
should use only one optical fiber cable, regardless of the number of
controlled axes. See APPENDIX D for details on the optical fiber cable.
In the control unit, the COP10A connector is placed on the servo card
installed on the main board. When a sub–CPU card is used, COP10A is
placed on the servo card installed on the sub–CPU board as well.
146
www.plcworld.cn
7.1.3
Separate Detector
Interface
Servo amplifier module
Separate detector in-

terface unit
CP11A
Control unit or
the previous–stage servo
amplifier module
Linear scale
This figure is an example of connecting the I/O Link to

an i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted type panel.
147
www.plcworld.cn
CNC
Servo amplifier module

Servo card
Â Optical fiber cable

ÂÂ
Â ÂÂ
COP10A COP10B
ÂÂ COP10A
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
COP10B
COP10A
ÂÂ
|
ÂÂ COP10B
ÂÂ
Optical fiber cable
COP10A
Up to 8 axes with 16i/160i

Separate detector interface unit 1 Up to 4 axes with 20i
Â ÂÂ
Â ÂÂ
COP10B JF101 Linear scale axis 1
Â ÂÂ
COP10A JF102 Linear scale axis 2
DC24V
ÂÂ
CP11A JF103 Linear scale axis 3
Â ÂÂ
JF104 Linear scale axis 4
CNF1 JA4A Battery for absolute
separate detector
Flat cable
Â ÂÂ
Â CNF2 JF105
ÂÂ Linear scale axis 5
JF106
JF107 ÂÂ
ÂÂ
Linear scale axis 6
Linear scale axis 7
JF108
ÂÂ Linear scale axis 8
When a separate pulse coder or linear scale is used, a separate detector

interface unit, as shown above, is required. The separate detector
interface unit should be connected to the CNC control unit through an
optical fiber cable, as one of the units on the servo interface (FSSB).
Although the above figure shows the separate detector interface
connected in the final stage of the FSSB line, it can also be connected, at
the nearest location, to the CNC control unit. Or, it can be installed
between two servo amplifier modules.
148
www.plcworld.cn
7.1.4 Usually, the separate detector corresponding to a servo motor for each of
Separate Detector the first to eighth axes is connected to each of separate detector interfaces
JF101 to JF108. If necessary, the controlled axis numbers corresponding
Interface Unit to JF101 to JF108 can be changed. For example, when separate detectors
Specification are to be used only for the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth controlled axes
in the above figure, JF101 to JF104 of the basic interface unit can be
assigned to these controlled axes, thus eliminating the need to use an
expansion unit. The interface unit can feed 0.35 A (5 V) to each separate
detector.
Item Specification
Power supply capacity Voltage 24 VDC ±10%

Current 0.9 A (basic unit only)
1.5 A (basic unit + expansion unit)
Ordering information A02B–0236–C203 (basic)

A02B–0236–C204 (expansion)
Method of installation An interface unit can be installed by using screws

or a DIN rail.
7.1.5 Power to the separate detector interface unit should be supplied from an
Connection of Power external 24 V DC power supply.
Supply
Separate detector interface unit External power supply
CP11A
1 +24V 24 V DC regulated
2 0V power supply
3 24 V DC "10%
Cable
CP11A
AMP JAPAN
1–178288–3 (Housing) External power
1–175218–5 (Contact) supply
Select a connector that
+24V (1) matches the pin layout
0V (2) of the external power
supply.

(The external power supply end of the cable is provided with M3 crimp
terminals.)
The 24 V DC input to CP11A can be output at CP11B for use in branching.

The connection of CP11B is identical to that of CP11A. In this case, the
power supplied to CP11A should be equal to the sum of the rating of the
separate detector interface unit and that of the units after CP11B.
149
www.plcworld.cn
7.1.6
Linear Scale Interface
Separate detector interface unit
Linear scale
JF101 to JF104
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1 PCA 11
2 *PCA 12 0V
3 PCB 13
4 *PCB 14 0V
5 PCZ 15
6 *PCZ 16 0V
7 (+6V) 17
+6V and REQ are for separate
absolute pulse coders.
8 (REQ) 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V
Cable wiring
1
PCA PCA
2
*PCA *PCA
3
PCB PCB
4
*PCB *PCB
5
PCZ PCZ
6
*PCZ *PCZ
9
+5V +5V
18
+5V +5V
20
+5V +5V
12
0V 0V
14
0V 0V
16
0V 0V
SHIELD
GROUNDING PLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL

A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3–pair)
Recommended connectors:
52622–2011 (Molex)
FI40B–2015S (Hirose Electric)
NOTE
The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to the
linear scales. The supply current per linear scale is 0.35 A
maximum.
150
www.plcworld.cn
7.1.7
Stand–alone Type
Pulse Coder Interface
D For absolute detector
Separate detector interface unit
JF101 to JF108 Stand–alone type detector
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Pulse coder
1 PCA 11
(MS3102A–22–14P)
2 *PCA 12 0V
3 PCB 13 A PCA B *PCA C PCB D *PCB
4 *PCB 14 0V E PCZ F *PCZ G H
5 PCZ 15 J K L +5V M 0V
6 *PCZ 16 0V N SHLD P R S REQ
7 +6V 17 T +6VA U 0VA V
8 REQ 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V
MS3106B22–14S
Cable wiring
1 A
PCA PCA
2 B
*PCA *PCA
3 C
PCB PCB
4 D
*PCB *PCB
5 E
PCZ PCZ
6 F
*PCZ *PCZ
7 T
+6V +6VA
8 S
REQ REQ
9
+5V
18
+5V
20 L
+5V +5V
12 M
0V 0V
14
0V
16 U
0V 0VA
N
SHLD
SHIELD (Shield)
GROUNDING PLATE
A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3–pair)
52622–2011 (Molex)
NOTE
The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to linear scales. The supply current per linear
scale is 0.35 A maximum.
151
www.plcworld.cn
(Parallel interface)
D For incremental detector

Separate detector interface unit Stand–alone type detector
JF101 to JF108
Pulse coder
(PCR–EV20MDT)
(MS3102A–20–29P)
1 PCA 11
2 *PCA 12 0V
3 PCB 13 A PCA B PCB C +5V D *PCA
4 *PCB 14 0V E *PCB F PCZ G *PCZ H SHLD
5 PCZ 15 J +5V K +5V L M
6 *PCZ 16 0V N 0V P 0V R S
7 +6V 17 T 0V
8 REQ 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V MS3106B20–29SW
REQ is not used.
Cable wiring
1 A
PCA PCA
2 D
*PCA *PCA
3 B
PCB PCB
4 E
*PCB *PCB
5 F
PCZ PCZ
6 G
*PCZ *PCZ
9 C
+5V +5V
18 J
+5V +5V
20 K
+5V +5V
12 N
0V 0V
14 P
0V 0V
16 T
0V 0V
H
SHLD
(Shield)
SHIELD
GROUNDING PLATE
A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3–pair)
52622–2011 (Molex)
NOTE
The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to linear
scales. The supply current per linear scale is 0.35 A
maximum.
152
www.plcworld.cn
(Serial interface)
Separate detector interface unit Separate detector
JF101AJF108 Pulse coder
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1 SD 11 A SD B C D :SD
2 :SD 12 0V E F REQ G REQ H SHLD
3 13 J +5V K +5V L M
4 14 0V N 0V P R +6VA S 0VA
5 REQ 15 T 0V
6 :REQ 16 0V
7 +6V 17
8 18 +5V
MS3106B20–29SW
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V
Cable connection
1 A
SD SD
2 D
:SD vSD
5 F
REQ REQ
6 G
:REQ :REQ
7 R
+6V +6VA
18 J
+5V +5V
20 K
+5V +5V
12 N
0V 0V
14 T
0V 0V
16 S
0V 0VA
H
(Shield)
(Shield)
Ground plate
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0266 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3 pairs)
NOTE
The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to linear
scales. The supply current per linear scale is 0.35 A
maximum.
153
www.plcworld.cn
7.1.8 The standard of the feedback signal from the additional detector is as
Input Signal shown below.
Requirements (1) A and B phase signal input
This is a method to input position information by the mutual 90 degree
phase slip of A and B phase signals.
Detection of the position is performed with the state in which the B phase
is leading taken as a shift in the plus direction, and the state in which the
A phase is leading as a shift in the minus direction.
A phase signal
Shift in plus direction
B phase signal
A phase signal
Shift in minus direction
B phase signal
(2) Phase difference and minimum repeat frequency

A
PCA/*PCA
0.5V
*PCA/PCA
B
PCB/*PCB
0.5V
*PCB/PCB
Td Td Td Td
Tp
(3) Z phase signal input
For the Z phase signal (1 rotation signal), a signal width of more than 1/4
frequency of the A phase or B phase signals is necessary.
Z phase signal
Tw
Twy 1/4 frequency of A phase or B phase
154
www.plcworld.cn
Time requirements Requirements for the signals at the input pins of input connectors JF101
to JF104.
TD y 0.15 µsec
The signals for these connectors are differential input signals with A and
B phases. An important factor is time TD from point A, when the
potential difference between PCA and *PCA exceeds 0.5V, to point B,
when the potential difference between PCB and *PCB becomes lower
than 0.5V. The minimum value of TD is 0.15 µs. The period and pulse
width of the signals must be long enough to satisfy the above
requirements.
Receiver circuit
PCA The same circuit is used

A–phase for B–phase signals
110Ω
signal (PCB and *PCB) and
*PCA one–rotation signals
(PCZ and *PCZ).
560Ω
5V
Relationship between If the separate pulse coder rotates in the opposite direction to that of the
the direction of rotation servo motor, reconnect the interface cable of the separate pulse coder as
of the servo motor and described below.
that of the separate (1) Exchange signal PCA with signal PCB.
pulse coder (2) Exchange signal *PCA with signal *PCB.
155
www.plcworld.cn
7.1.9 Separate detector interface unit

Connection of Battery
for Separate Absolute
Detector
Absolute pulse coder battery case
156
www.plcworld.cn
Separate detector interface unit Battery case
JA4A
(PCR–EV20MDT)
01 11 (M3 terminal)
02 12
+ –
03 0V 13
+6V 0V
04 14
05 15
06 16
07 +6V 17
08 18
09 19
10 20
CABLE CONNECTION
JA4A Battery case
+6V 7 + +6V
0V 3 – 0V
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL:

y0.2 mm2 (7/0.18)
52622–2011 (Molex)
NOTE
The battery for the separate absolute detector is required
only when the separate absolute detector is used. When an
absolute pulse coder with built–in motor is used, it is
powered by the built–in battery of the amplifier, such that the
battery for the separate absolute detector is not required.
157
www.plcworld.cn
7.1.10 A flat cable is used to make a connection between the basic unit and
Connection Between expansion unit as shown below.
the Basic Unit and A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must be used.
Expansion Unit Units viewed from top
Basic unit Expansion unit

Mounting
surface
CNF1 CNF2
Marking
B mark
B mark
Place an order on a flat cable together with separate detector interface

units.
158
www.plcworld.cn
7.1.11 Connector locations on the basic unit

Connector Locations
Connector locations on the expansion unit
For the outside dimensions, see Appendix A.
159
www.plcworld.cn
7.1.12 1) Notes on installation

Installation (1) Use an interface unit in a completely enclosed cabinet.
(2) Install an interface unit on a vertical surface, and provide a space
of 100 mm above and below the unit. Below an interface unit, do
not place equipment that generates a large amount of heat.
(3) When using a basic unit and expansion unit, place the units as
shown below so that the flat cable connecting the units does not
block the vent holes. A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must be
used.
Vent holes Flat cable
2) Installation using screws
When using both a basic unit and expansion unit, install the units as
shown above, with the mounting holes horizontally separated by 70
to 80 mm.
160
www.plcworld.cn
7.1.13
Notes on Installing a
Separate Detector CAUTION
To install/remove the unit, a screwdriver must be inserted
Interface Unit
obliquely. So, sufficient access clearances are required on
both sides of the unit. As a guideline, if the front of an
adjacent unit appears flush with the unit or slightly set back,
allow a clearance of about 20 mm between the unit and the
adjacent unit. If the front of an adjacent unit protrudes
beyond the front of the unit, allow a clearance of about 70
mm between the unit and the adjacent unit. Also, when
installing the unit near a side of the cabinet, allow a
clearance of about 70 mm between the unit and the side of
the cabinet.
Access clearance near a separate detector interface unit
161
www.plcworld.cn
Installing the unit on the DIN rail
Installing the unit

on the DIN rail
DIN rail
Removing
the unit from
the DIN rail
DIN rail
Installing the unit:

1. Hook the unit on the top of the DIN rail.
2. Push the unit in until it clicks.
Removing the unit:
1. Push down the lock by using a screwdriver.
2. Remove the unit by pulling the lower end of the unit towards you.
CAUTION
When removing the unit, be careful not to damage the lock
by applying excessive force. When installing and removing
the unit, hold the upper and lower ends of the unit so that
stress is not applied to the side (that surface with the slits)
of the unit.
162
www.plcworld.cn
7.1.14 The servo check connectors used with the i Series are not compatible with
Connecting the Servo the conventional types. So, to connect the servo check board (board unit:
A16B–1600–0320) or interface board for automatic adjustment (board
Check Adapter unit: A16B–2300–0170, Unit: A06B–6057–H620) with the i Series, a
new servo check adapter (board unit: A20B–1007–0240) and special
cable (A660–2042–T154) are required. (The ordering information for the
servo check adapter and cable is A02B–0236–K822.)
Examples of connection
When the servo check board is used
Connect TEST0–3 with CN2 of the servo check board via the currently
used flat cable.
TESTn
CA54 CN0
CN2
CNC Servo check adapter Servo check board
When the interface board for automatic adjustment is used

A) Connect TEST0–3 with CIN1/2 of the interface board for automatic
adjustment via a currently used flat cable.
TESTn
CA54 CN0 CIN1
CIN2
CNC Servo check adapter Interface board for

automatic adjustment
B) Connect TESTA/B with CIN3 of the interface board for automatic

adjustment via a straight cable (such as A660–2042–T007#*****).
TESTx
CA54 CN0
CIN3
CNC Servo check adapter Interface board for

automatic adjustment
NOTE
In any case, use the special cable (A660–2042–T154) to
connect CN0 with CA54 on the mother board of the CNC.
163
www.plcworld.cn
Axis signal output
Connector Controlled axis Connector Controlled axis

number(*1) number(*1)
TEST0 1/2 TESTA 1/2/3/4
TEST1 3/4 TESTB 5/6/7/8
TEST2 5/6
TEST3 7/8
(*1) The correspondence between the controlled axis numbers and servo
axis numbers depends on the setting of parameter No. 1023.
Connector locations
Servo check adapter for the i Series

A20B–1007–0240
CN0 NC side
Axis 5/6 TEST2 TEST0 Axis 1/2
Axis 7/8 TEST3 TEST1 Axis 3/4
Axes 5 to 8 TESTB TESTA Axes 1 to 4
Pin diagram
CN0 TEST0–3 TESTA/TESTB

1 GND 11 GND A1 +5V B1 GND 1 GND 11 GND
2 CLKX0 12 CLKX1 A2 CLKXn B2 GND 2 CLKX0/2 12 CLKX1/3
3 GND 13 GND A3 FSXn B3 GND 3 GND 13 GND
4 FSX0 14 FSX1 A4 DXn B4 GND 4 FSX0/2 14 FSX1/3
5 DX2 15 DX3 A5 B5 +5V 5 GND 15 GND
6 DX0 16 DX1 A6 B6 +15V 6 DX0/2 16 DX1/3
7 CLKX2 17 –15V A7 B7 –15V 7 17 –15V
8 FSX2 18 +5V A8 B8 GND 8 18 +5V
9 CLKX3 19 +15V 9 19 +15V
10 FSX3 20 +5V 10 20 +5V
164
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
8 CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
165
www.plcworld.cn
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE B–63003EN/04
8.1 The control unit of LCD–mounted type Series 160i/180i/210i models

incorporates PC functions. This chapter describes how to connect the PC
GENERAL function interface.
166
www.plcworld.cn
8.2
CONNECTION OF
SERIAL PORT
Unit rear panel
Serial port
JD33
I/O device such as a

Handy File
167
www.plcworld.cn
The connector shown below is the RS–232–C serial port on the personal
computer side. With the Series 210i control unit with PC functions,
parameters and programs are input and output through the RS–232–C
serial port of the personal computer. When the touch panel function is
used, however, this interface is used by the touch panel, so parameters and
programs should be input and output through the 2nd channel of the serial
port on the personal computer side, which is located on the PC interface
connector unit described in Section 8.7.
CNC Connector panel (Example)
JD33 Serial port

(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A) (D–Sub 25)
1 RD 11 SD 1 FG
14
2 0V 12 0V 2 SD
15
3 DR 13 ER 3 RD
16
4 0V 14 0V 4 RS
17
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS
18
6 (RESERVE) 16 (RESERVE) 6 DR
19
7 CD 17 (RESERVE) 7 SG
20 ER
8 (RESERVE) 18 (+5V) 8 CD
21
9 RI 19 (+24V) 9
22 RI
10 (+24V) 20 (+5V) 10
23
( ) : For use by a FANUC I/O 11
24
device.
12
25
13
NOTE
1 The +24 V power of the interface shown in the above figure is exclusively for use by a FANUC
I/O device (FANUC Cassette, FANUC Handy File, etc.). Do not use it for any other purpose.
Also, do not connect more than one FANUC I/O device to a CNC control unit, as the rating of
the +24 V power supply may be exceeded if more than one I/O device is used simultaneously.
2 The +5 V power of the interface is for use by the touch panel. Do not use it for any other purpose.
3 When performing a DNC operation which is processed directly by the CNC, or remote
diagnostics of the PMC, use the RS–232–C interface on the CNC side (JD36A, JD36B).
4 Do not connect any signal to those pins which are marked (RESERVE).
168
www.plcworld.cn
(1) Cable connection (Example)
11 02
SD SD
01 03
CNC (JD33) RD RD Connector panel
15 04 RS
RS
05 05 CS
CS
03 06 DR
DR
13 20 ER
ER CD
07 08
CD RI
09 22
RI SG
02, 12 07
0V FG
17
Frame GND
(2) Recommended cable specification

A66L–0001–0284#10P: 0.08 mm2 × 10 pairs
Recommended cable–side connector (JD33)
NOTE
Note that the FANUC standard punch panel cannot be used
with this interface.
169
www.plcworld.cn
8.3
CONNECTION OF
FDDS (FLOPPY DISK
DRIVES) (SIGNAL &
POWER)
Unit rear panel
Signal cable Power cable

CD34 CN2
Floppy disk
drive
170
www.plcworld.cn
CNC 3.5″ floppy disk drive A
CD34 J1 (PS–34PE–D4LT1–1, JAE)
1 0V 2 DENSEL 1 0V 2 DENSEL
3 0V 4 3 0V 4
5 0V 6 5 0V 6
7 0V 8 :INDEX 7 0V 8 :INDEX
9 0V 10 :MT0 9 0V 10 :DS0
11 0V 12 :DS1 11 0V 12 :DS1
13 0V 14 :DS0 13 0V 14
15 0V 16 :MT1 15 0V 16 :MT0
17 0V 18 :DIR 17 0V 18 :DIR
19 0V 20 :STEP 19 0V 20 :STEP
21 0V 22 :WDATA 21 0V 22 :WDATA
23 0V 24 :WE 23 0V 24 :WE
25 0V 26 :TRK0 25 0V 26 :TRK0
27 0V 28 :WPRT 27 0V 28 :WPRT
29 0V 30 :RDATA FAS–34–17 of IDC type 29 0V 30 :RDATA
31 0V 32 HDSEL manufactured by Yamaichi 31 0V 32 HDSEL
33 0V 34 :DSKCH Denki 33 0V 34 :DSKCH
CN2
1234 1 +12V 1 +5V 1234
2 0V 2 0V
3 0V 3 0V
4 +5V AMP EI Series 4–pin 4 +5V
Housing 171822–4
Contact 170262, 170263
NOTE
1 This is an IBM PC–compatible standard interface. Particular care should be paid to the
following points, however.
(1)Only two modes (720K/1.44M bytes) can be used.
(2)“DENSEL” is fixed to the low level.
(3)Not all commercially available floppy disk drives require both +12 V and +5 V DC. When
using a floppy disk drive which requires +12 V DC, pay careful attention to its power
requirements.
2 Since many commercially available floppy disk drives perform differently with any one given
personal computer, FANUC cannot guarantee all operations. Machine tool builders are
requested to confirm the compatibility of each drive, and the operations that are supported.
Also, be careful when using commercially available floppy disk drives because none offer
dust–proof or drip–proof properties.
3 The FDD–side interface shown above is merely an example. Each cable should be designed
according to the interface of the actual drive to be used.
171
www.plcworld.cn
(1) Cable connection
1 1 1
0V 0V
2 2 2
DENSEL DENSEL
3 3 3
0V 0V
4 4 4
(NC) (NC)
5 5 5
0V 0V
6 6 6
(NC) (NC)
7 7 7
0V 0V
8 8 8
*INDEX *INDEX
9 9 9
0V 0V
10 10 16
*MT0 *MT0
11 11 15
0V 0V
12 12 14
*DS1 (NC)
13 13 13
0V 0V
14 14 12
*DS0 *DS1
15 15 11
0V 0V
16 16 10
*MT1 *DS0
17 17 17 3.5″ floppy disk unit
0V 0V
18 18 18 of panel mount type
CNC *DIR *DIR
19 19 19
CD34 0V 0V
20 20 20
*STEP *STEP J1
21 21 21
0V 0V
22 22 22
*WDATA *WDATA
23 23 23
0V 0V
24 24 24
*WE *WE
25 25 25
0V 0V
26 26 26
*TRK0 *TRK0
27 27 27
0V 0V
28 28 28
*WPRT *WPRT
29 29 29
0V 0V
30 30 30
*RDATA *RDATA
31 31 31 Connector A
0V 0V
32 32 32 mentioned on the
HDSEL HDSEL
33 33 33 previous page
0V 0V (See NOTE.)
34 34 34
*DSKCH *DSKCH
Connector B mentioned
CN2 CN2 on the previous page J2 J2
(See NOTE.)
1 1
+5V 4 +5V +5V 1 +5V
2 2
0V 3 0V 0V 2 0V
3 3
0V 2 0V (NC) 3 (NC)
4 4
+12V 1 +12V (NC) 4 (NC)
This is the IBM PC standard interface. Commercially available

connecting cables feature wires for pins 10 to 16 that are twisted
between the CNC and drive A, as shown in the above figure. When
using such a cable, set the “Drive number setting pin” on drive A to
“1” (second drive). Connect the floppy disk unit (A02B–0207–C006)
provided by FANUC to connector A, shown above.
(2) Recommended cable specification
A02B–0207–K801: Signal cable and power cable (1.0 m long)
172
www.plcworld.cn
8.3.1 When this unit is to remain attached to the machine at all times, pay
Use Environment particular attention to the points below.
(1) Dust
The sides of the unit are all perforated, with the exception of the front
door. So, place the unit in a fully sealed cabinet. Dust can enter the
floppy disk unit and cabinet through the floppy disk slot. This means
that floppy disk failures are more likely to occur in a dusty
environment.
(2) Temperature
+5°C to +45°C (operating)
The ambient temperature requirements for this unit are severer
because of the restrictions imposed by the floppy disk unit. So, pay
special attention to the method of cooling. Providing an air flow
directly from a cooling fan is not recommended because dust can build
up.
8.3.2 Never turn off the power while a floppy disk is inserted and particularly
Caution while the inserted floppy disk is being accessed (while the LED is lit).
This caution should be conveyed to the end users.
173
www.plcworld.cn
8.4
CONNECTION TO
THE
FULL–KEYBOARD
AND MOUSE
Unit rear panel
MOUSE KEYBOARD
JD32B JD32A
Full keyboard
Mouse
174
www.plcworld.cn
8.4.1
Full Keyboard
Intelligent terminal type 2 Full keyboard (commercial type)
CD32A
(mini DIN6)
Or, FA full keyboard
NOTE
1 Commercially available full keyboards are designed for use
with a personal computer. Such commercial keyboards can
not always guarantee all required operations, therefore.
The machine tool builder should check this point carefully
beforehand.
Usually, protection against dust and moisture is not
provided by commercial full keyboards. This should also be
considered by the machine tool builder.
1) Recommended full keyboard

A86L–0001–0210 . . . . . . 101–type commercial type
. . . . . . Dedicated to development and maintenance
A86L–0001–0211 . . . . . . 101–type commercial type
A02L–0236–C130#JC . . FA full keyboard (Japanese) 

A02B–0236–C130#EC . . FA full keyboard (English) 
. . . . . . LCD–mounted type full keyboard dedicated to
the i Series CNC
NOTE
2 When using an FA full keyboard that is integrated into the
system, clamp the cable at a point as close as possible to
the connector so that the weight of the cable is not directly
applied to the connector joint.
175
www.plcworld.cn
8.4.2
Mouse
Intelligent terminal type 2 CD32B (mini DIN6)
Or, FA full keyboard
Mouse (commercial type)
NOTE
A commercially available full keyboard is designed for use
with a personal computer. Such commercial keyboards can
not always guarantee all required operations, therefore.
The machine tool builder should check this point carefully
beforehand.
Usually, protection against dust and moisture is not
provided by commercial full keyboards. This should also be
considered by the machine tool builder.
1) Recommended mouse
A86L–0001–0212 . . . . . Standard PS/2 mouse (commercial type)
176
www.plcworld.cn
8.5
CONNECTION OF
HDD (HARD DISK
DRIVE)
Control unit
Vertical with
HDD respect to
the ground
MDI unit
Rubber vibration insulator
177
www.plcworld.cn
Connection The hard disk drive itself is installed at the rear of the FANUC MDI unit.
The machine tool builder is requested to connect the cable from the hard
disk drive to connector “CNH1” of the CNC control unit by applying the
following procedure.
Securing bracket
CNH1
1. Remove the securing bracket from connector “CNH1”. (Remove the

two screws for this.)
2. Plug the cable from the hard disk drive into connector “CNH1” of the
control unit.
3. Place the securing bracket on the connector and tighten the two screws.
NOTE
When an MDI unit with a hard disk drive is to be installed on
the machine, install the MDI unit under the main control unit
so that the rubber vibration insulators are vertical with
respect to the ground, as shown on the previous page.
178
www.plcworld.cn
8.6
CONNECTION OF
THE PC INTERFACE
CONNECTOR PANEL
UNIT
Control unit rear panel
CNY1
PC interface connector panel unit
HDD
CNH2
MDI unit rear panel
JD9: Parallel port
JD36F: RS–232–C (2nd channel)
179
www.plcworld.cn
Connection method 1. If the hard disk drive is connected to the control unit (CNH1),
disconnect it. (When a personal computer interface connection unit
is installed, the hard disk drive cable is not connected to the main
control unit. Instead, it is connected to the personal computer interface
connection unit.)
2. Remove the screws (× 2) from the control unit.
3. Plug the connector (CN1) of the cable from the PC interface connector
panel unit into the connector (CNY1) of the control unit.
4. Tighten the screws (× 2).
CNY1
CN1
NOTE
When a personal computer interface connection unit,
mounted together with a hard disk drive on the MDI unit, is
to be installed on the machine, install it under the control unit
so that the rubber vibration insulators of the hard disk drive
are vertical with respect to the ground, as shown on the
previous page.
180
www.plcworld.cn
8.6.1
Centronics Parallel
Port
CNC (PC interface connector panel unit) Example) Printer
JD9
1 STD0 11 :STB 1 :STB 19 0V

2 STD1 12 0V 2 STD 20 0V
3 STD2 13 :AFD 3 STD1 21 0V
4 STD3 14 0V 4 STD2 22 0V
5 STD4 15 :INIT 5 STD3 23 0V
6 STD5 16 0V 7 STD5 25 0V
7 STD6 17 :SLIN 6 STD4 24 0V
8 STD7 18 :ACK 8 STD6 26 0V
9 PE 19 :ERROR 9 STD7 27 0V
10 SLCT 20 BUSY 10 :ACK 28 0V
11 BUSY 29 0V
12 PE 30 0V
13 SLCT 31 :INIT
14 :AFD 32 :ERROR
15 33 0V
16 0V 34
1) Recommended wire:
A66L–0001–0284#10P ... (0.08 mm2 × 10 pairs) 17 FG 35
2) Recommended cable connector (JD9 side)
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo) 18 36 :SLIN
NOTE
1 The printer–side interface shown above is merely an example. Each cable should be designed
according to the interface of the device which is connected to the PC interface connector panel
unit.
2 Since many commercially available external devices, including printers, perform differently with
any one given personal computer, FANUC cannot guarantee all operations. Machine tool
builders are requested to confirm the compatibility of each drive, and the operations that are
supported. Also, be careful when using commercially available external devices because none
offer dust–proof or drip–proof properties.
181
www.plcworld.cn
8.6.2
Serial Port 2
CNC (PC interface connector panel unit) Example) Host computer
JD36F
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A) (DBM–25S)
1 RD 11 SD 1 FG
14
2 0V 12 0V 2 SD
15
3 DR 13 ER 3 RD
16
4 0V 14 0V 4 RS
17
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS
18
6 0V 16 0V 6 DR
19
7 CD 17 7 SG
20 ER
8 0V 18 8 CD
21
9 RI 19 (+24V) 9
22 RI
10 (+24V) 20 10
23
( ): For use by a FANUC 11
24
I/O device
12
25
13
1) Recommended wire:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (0.08 mm2 × 10 pairs)
2) Recommended cable connector (JD36F side)
NOTE
1 The host computer–side interface shown above is merely an example. Each cable should be
designed according to the interface of the actual device to be connected to the PC interface
connector panel unit.
2 The +24 V power of the interface on the PC interface connector panel unit side in the above
figure is exclusively for use by a FANUC I/O device (FANUC Cassette, FANUC Handy File, etc.).
Do not use it for other purpose. Also, do not to connect more than one FANUC I/O device to
a CNC control unit, as the rating of the +24 V power supply may be exceeded if more than one
I/O device is used simultaneously.
3 Do not connect anything to those pins for which a signal name is not indicated.
182
www.plcworld.cn
8.7
ISA EXPANSION
UNITS
8.7.1 (1) Usable boards

Installation Procedure Up to two ISA expansion boards, as shown below, can be used.
Rear face component height: No more than 3.81 mm
Front face component height: No more than 13.34 mm
Section held by anti–vibration bracket
94 mm to 115 mm
127mm
(A board whose
dimensions fall
outside the above
range cannot be held
by the anti–vibration
bracket.)
No more than 170 mm

Unit: mm
NOTE
FANUC does not guarantee the operation of, or provide maintenance for, commercially
available ISA expansion boards.
183
www.plcworld.cn
(2) ISA expansion board installation procedure

(See Fig. 8.7.1.)
(a) Remove the anti–vibration brackets.
(b) Insert each board into the connector. Push it fully home.
(c) Secure each board with the screw.
(d) Attach the anti–vibration bracket to each board by tightening
screws while holding the bracket against the board.
Slot A
Slot B
Screws
Anti–vibration
bracket B
Anti–vibration
bracket A
Screw
tightening
Screw section B
tightening
section A
Fig. 8.7.1 Installing ISA expansion boards
184
www.plcworld.cn
8.7.2 (1) Address map

Operating Precautions D The memory space is identical to that of IBM PC–compatible
personal computers. There is no special area used by Series 210i.
D In the I/O space, addresses 280H to 28FH are used by the Series
210i, such that they are not available for the ISA expansion boards.
(These addresses can be changed, however. They can be set with
a rotary switch on the PC interface connector panel unit.)
Other areas in the I/O space are identical to an IBM PC–compatible
personal computer.
The I/O addresses of Series 210i are:

LMN0H to LMNFH.
L, M and N are set as shown below

SW3 SW2 SW1 when the unit is shipped from FANUC.
L = 0 (SW3)
(L) (M) (N) M = 2 (SW2)
N = 8 (SW1)
(2) Interrupt, DMA request

D Of the IRQ signals, the following are not used by the Series 210i.
IRQ10, IRQ11
D Of the DRQ signals, the following is used by the Series 210i.
DRQ2: Floppy disk drive.
(3) Installation and environmental conditions for ISA expansion boards
See Section 3.1. If, however, the specifications of the ISA expansion
boards are inferior to those listed in Section 3.1, these conditions are
restricted by those of the ISA expansion boards.
(4) Power supply to ISA expansion boards
The table below indicates the ratings of the power supply that can be
fed to the ISA expansion boards mounted on the ISA expansion unit.
(The total values for two slots are indicated.)
Voltage Rating
+5V"10% 3.0 A maximum
+12V"10% 0.5 A maximum
–12V"10% 0.1 A maximum
–5V"10% 0.05 A maximum
(5) Other
In addition to the cautions given above, normal operation may be
impossible under any of the following conditions.
D When pull–up or pull–down processing has been applied to the ISA
bus signals.
D When the refresh cycle of the ISA bus is in use.
In addition to the above, note that further conditions may be added
in the future.
185
www.plcworld.cn
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2 B–63003EN/04
9 FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
186
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
9.1 The FANUC intelligent terminal type 2 (hereafter called intelligent

terminal type 2) is on an IBM PC compatible panel computer. Connecting
OVERVIEW the intelligent terminal type 2 to an i Series CNC system via a high–speed
optical fiber (high–speed serial bus) provides the system with personal
computer functions.
9.2 The copyrights to Windows 95, Windows NT, and other supplied
software used in the intelligent terminal type 2 are owned by Microsoft
CAUTIONS Corporation of the USA, Chips and Technologies of the USA,
International Business Machines Corporation of the USA, Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co. of Japan, Ltd and/or Fanuc Ltd of Japan.
The software stated above and the related manuals may not be used or
reproduced in part or whole without permission. They may not be sold
separately from the intelligent terminal type 2.
They can be used only when the purchaser agrees all the terms and
conditions stated in the license attached to the intelligent terminal type 2.
The purchaser’s applying power to the intelligent terminal type 2 is
deemed as their intention to agree to the terms and conditions in the
license.
NOTE
1 IBM is a registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation of the USA.
2 Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation
of the USA.
3 Other company names and product names mentioned in
this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
respective companies.
187
www.plcworld.cn
9.3
CONNECTION
Connection with the intelligent terminal
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ FA
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Control Intelligent typewriter–
unit style
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

terminal
keyboard
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
24VDC
A 50 cm (approximate
length) flat cable for soft
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
keys is provided with the
intelligent terminal.
If the intelligent terminal is
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
equipped with a touch
panel, this cable need not
be used.
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
MDI
Unit
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂ Â
ÂÂ Â
CK2
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂ ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
JD45
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ CK1
ÂÂÂÂ
This section describes the connection of only those components enclosed in the dotted lines
above. Either an FA typewriter–style keyboard or an MDI unit can be connected.
188
www.plcworld.cn
9.4
GENERAL
CONNECTION
DIAGRAMS
9.4.1
Having Neither Soft
Keys nor a Touch
Panel
189
www.plcworld.cn
CNC control unit

Power supply unit Ž
Ž
: Optical link module cable
: AMP (dynamic)
HSSB interface board : AMP (6–pin mini DIN)
: Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
Ÿ
HSSB (COP7) (20–pin PCR)
Ÿ
: Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. (34–pin flat cable)
Other printed–circuit
boards : AMP (4–pin EI series)
MDI (JA2)
: Others
Power supply (+24 VDC)
Intelligent terminal type 2

FA
typewriter– *1
style
ŽŽ
Ž
HSSB (COP7) keyboard Mouse
+24V (CP5)
ŽŽ
Ž
or 10.4 FA–use liquid crystal panel
10.4 TFT liquid crystal panel
*1 Typewriter–style
KEYBOARD keyboard
(CD32A)
MOUSE (CD32B) *1
Mouse
RS–232C channel 1 Power

RS232–1 (JD33) I/O unit supply
RS–232C channel 2
RS232–2 (JD34)
Power
ŸŸ
Ÿ
I/O unit
CENTRO (JD9) supply
ŸŸ
Ÿ
FDD SIGNAL (CD34) *1 Power
Printer
ŸŸ
supply
FDD POWER (CN2)
ISA
ŸŸ
Floppy
PCMCIA card slot
ISA ex-
PCMCI expansion disk drive
pansion
card backplane board
ISA
ISA ex- expansion
pansion
board
*1 This device can be used only for application development; it cannot be used for a production run.
Refer to the applicable CNC connection manual for descriptions of

connections not explained above.
190
www.plcworld.cn
9.4.2
Having Soft Keys but
No Touch Panel
CNC control unit
ŽŽ
Power supply unit : AMP (dynamic)
HSSB (COP7)
ŸŸ : Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
ŸŸ
(20–pin PCR)
: Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. (34–pin flat cable)
Other printed–circuit
MDI (JA2)
: Others
Stand–alone type MDI
(CNK1)
(CNK2)
Soft key
HSSB (COP7)
ŽŽ
Ž
+24V (CP5)
ŽŽ
Ž
*1
Typewriter–style
keyboard
KEYBOARD (CD32A)
*1
MOUSE (CD32B) Mouse
RS–232C channel 1 Power

RS232–1 (JD33) I/O unit supply
RS–232C channel 2
RS232–2 (JD34)
ŸŸ
Ÿ
Power
CENTRO (JD9) I/O unit supply
FDD SIGNAL (CD34)
ŸŸ
Ÿ *1 Power
ŸŸ
Printer supply
FDD POWER (CN2)
ŸŸ
Floppy
PCMCIA card slot
ISA ex-
pansion disk drive
PCMCIA ISA board
expansion ISA
card
backplane ISA ex- expansion
pansion
board

191
www.plcworld.cn
9.4.3
Having a Touch Panel
but No Soft Key
CNC control unit
Ž
Ž
Power supply unit
: AMP (dynamic)
HSSB (COP7)
Ÿ : Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
Ÿ
(20–pin PCR)
Other printed–circuit : Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. (34–pin flat cable)
MDI (JA2)
: Others
Stand–alone type MDI (*1)
(CNK1)

FA typewrit-
er–style *2
keyboard
HSSB (COP7)
ŽŽ
Ž (*1) Mouse
+24V (CP5)
ŽŽ
Ž
*2 Typewriter–style
KEYBOARD (CD32A) keyboard
MOUSE (CD32B) *2 Mouse
RS232–1 (JD33) RS–232C channel 1(*3)

RS–232C channel 2
RS232–2 (JD34)
Power
ŸŸ
Ÿ
I/O unit supply
CENTRO (JD9)
FDD SIGNAL (CD34)
ŸŸ
Ÿ *2 Power
ŸŸ
Printer supply
FDD POWER (CN2)
ŸŸ
PCMCIA card slot
ISA ex- Floppy

PCMCIA disk drive
pansion
card ISA board ISA
expansion
backplane ISA ex- expansion
pansion
board
*1 Either a stand–alone type MDI or FA typewriter–style keyboard can be used.

*3 RS–232C channel 1 is used for the touch panel. It cannot be used for any other device.

192
www.plcworld.cn
9.5
SPECIFICATIONS
9.5.1 When using intelligent terminal type 2, observe the following conditions
Installation relating to the cabinet in which the terminal is installed.
Environmental Ambient temperature Operating: 5°C to 45°C (*1)
Storage: –20°C to 60°C
Conditions
Temperature drift 20°C/hour (maximum)
Ambient relative Regular: 10% to 75% (without condensation)

humidity Short term (within one month): 10% to 90% (without
condensation)
Vibration Operating: 0.5 G or less(*2)

Storage: 1.0 G or less
Atmosphere Enclosure in a completely sealed cabinet
Altitude Operating: –60 to 1000 m

Storage: –60 to 1200 m
*1 Operating ambient temperature:

A temperature sensor in the intelligent terminal type 2 is used to check
whether the temperature range described above is satisfied. (The
detected state can be confirmed from the LEDs on the high–speed
serial bus interface board of the CNC.)
1) If the specified temperature range is not satisfied when the power
is switched on, the system hangs without displaying anything on
the screen. This error status can be confirmed using the LEDs
mentioned above. When the temperature falls within the specified
range the system, including the terminal, starts automatically.
2) If the temperature moves outside the specified range after the
system starts, an error is detected when an attempt is made to access
the hard disk.
*2 Vibration:
The intelligent terminal type 2 and its built–in hard disk may be
subject to vibration. After the terminal is mounted on the machine,
carefully check for vibration. If an ISA expansion board is used, the
vibration tolerance may be lower than that listed above, depending on
the specification of the card.
CAUTION
Even when the environmental conditions listed above are
satisfied, an operator error or an accident may destroy data
on the hard disk. This is quite likely if the power is switched
off while the hard disk is being accessed. Do NOT switch
off the power while the hard disk is being accessed. Be sure
inform end users of this caution. Always create and keep
a backup copy of the data on the hard disk to prepare for the
worst case.
Also note that options for development and maintenance use may not
satisfy the above requirements.
193
www.plcworld.cn
9.5.2 (1) Input power

Power Supply (a) Specification
Specification To use the intelligent terminal type 2, prepare a power supply that
satisfies the requirements listed below:
Input power supply voltage +24 VDC ±10%
Input power supply current 3.5 A (maximum)
NOTE
Use of the FANUC I/O unit also requires +1 A.
(b) Timing
The intelligent terminal type 2 should be switched on and off
within ±100 ms of the CNC power supply being switched on and
off.
(2) Supply power
The intelligent terminal type 2 can supply power, as listed below, to
peripheral equipment. Check the amount of current drawn by each
unit you want to use.
Supply voltage Peripheral unit Current (maxi-
mum)
+12V ISA, 400mA

FDD (CN2)
+5V FDD (CN2), keyboard 1000mA

(CD32, JD33), mouse (JD33)
ISA 3500mA
–12V ISA 180mA
–5V ISA 74mA
(3) Heat dissipation

37 W (during normal operation)
NOTE
The amount of heat generated by the intelligent terminal
type 2 increases if a peripheral unit or ISA expansion board
is connected.
9.5.3 Before switching off the intelligent terminal type 2, terminate all
applications and the OS according to the normal shutdown procedure. If
Shutdown
the terminal is switched off while an application or the OS is still running,
the terminal may fail to operate normally next time it is switched on. In
the worst case, the initialization command for the hard disk drive may
become inoperable.
194
www.plcworld.cn
9.6 The space shown below must be available around the intelligent terminal
type 2 after it is installed.
INSTALLATION
A: Space for cables. Provide an appropriate area at A so that the cables
SPACE to be used can be installed. If an ISA expansion board is used,
determine dimension X so that the cable to be used with the ISA
expansion board can be installed.
B: This space is required for battery replacement in the intelligent
terminal mounted on the panel. Battery replacement requires that the
operator work at the rear of the terminal.
C: This space is required for ventilation.
D If you want to perform fuse replacement in intelligent terminal type 2
while the terminal is mounted on the panel, there must be sufficient
space available for maintenance work at the rear of the terminal.
80
50 C
C
ISA expansion B 100

B
board location
Front Rear
Fuse
Battery
A
A
110 290
(Unit: mm)
195
www.plcworld.cn
9.7
PERIPHERAL
EQUIPMENT AND
CONNECTION
9.7.1
Connector Layout
Diagram
Rear view
PCMCIA card slot

(LCD side)
CD32A
JD34
JD33
CN2
JD9
CD32B
CP5
CD34
COP7
Marking Function
CP5 Main power supply input ³ 9.7.2
CD34 Floppy disk drive signal ³ 9.7.3 Soft key
CD32A Typewriter–style keyboard ³ 9.7.4 (connected to stand–alone
CD32B Mouse ³ 9.7.5 type MDI)
JD9 Parallel port ³ 9.7.6 ³9.7.10
JD34 Serial port 2 ³ 9.7.7
JD33 Serial port 1 ³ 9.7.8
CN2 Floppy disk drive power supply output ³ 9.7.3
COP7 High–speed serial bus (HSSB) ³ 9.7.9
PCMCIA card ³ 9.7.11
NOTE
1 No ISA expansion unit is used in the above example.
2 The soft key is provided only on the intelligent terminal type
2 with soft keys.
196
www.plcworld.cn
9.7.2
Main Power Supply
Input
CP5
1 +24V
2 0V +24 VDC input
3
AMP
2–178288–3 (CASE)
1–175218–5 (CONTACT)
1
+24V +24V
2
0V 0V
(2) Recommended cable conductor

Use a cable whose conductor is not smaller than 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2).
NOTE
This power supply cable should be routed away from the
signal lines of the intelligent terminal.
197
www.plcworld.cn
9.7.3
Floppy Disk Drive
(Signal and Power
Supply)
Intelligent terminal type 2 Panel–mount type 3.5″ floppy

disk drive
CD34
1 0V 2 DENSEL 1 0V 2 DENSEL
3 0V 4 3 0V 4
5 0V 6 5 0V 6
7 0V 8 :INDEX 7 0V 8 :INDEX
9 0V 10 :MT0 9 0V 10 :DS0
11 0V 12 :DS1 11 0V 12 :DS1
13 0V 14 :DS0 13 0V 14
15 0V 16 :MT1 15 0V 16 :MT0
17 0V 18 :DIR 17 0V 18 :DIR
19 0V 20 :STEP 19 0V 20 :STEP
21 0V 22 :WDATA B A 21 0V 22 :WDATA
23 0V 24 :WE 23 0V 24 :WE
25 0V 26 :TRK0 25 0V 26 :TRK0
27 0V 28 :WPRT 27 0V 28 :WPRT
29 0V 30 :RDATA IDC type FAS–34–17 29 0V 30 :RDATA
31 0V 32 HDSEL produced by Yamaichi 31 0V 32 HDSEL
33 0V 34 :DSKCH Denki 33 0V 34 :DSKCH
CN2 J2
4321
1234 1 +12V 1 +5V
2 0V 2 0V
3 0V 3 (NC)
4 +5V 4 (NC)
AMP EI series 4–pin connector
Housing: 171822–4
Contact: 170262 and 170263
NOTE
1 This is a standard interface for the IBM PC compatible. Note the following:
D Only two floppy disk density modes (720 Kbytes and 1.44 Mbytes) are supported.
D The DENSEL signal level is fixed to low.
D Not all commercial floppy disk drives require both +12 V and +5 V power supplies. If your
floppy disk drive requires +12 VDC, pay careful attention to its power requirements.
2 Commercial floppy disk drives are prone to compatibility problems with personal computers to
some degree. It is not guaranteed that the intelligent terminal type 2 can operate with every
commercial floppy disk drive. Machine tool builders are requested to check the operability of
the floppy disk drives they select. Keep in mind that commercial floppy disk drives are neither
dust–proof nor moisture–resistant.
3 The interface on the drive side shown above is only an example. Design an interface cable
according to the specification of the drive with which it is used.
198
www.plcworld.cn
1 1 1
0V 0V
2 2 2
DENSEL DENSEL
3 3 3
0V 0V
4 4 4
(NC) (NC)
5 5 5
0V 0V
6 6 6
(NC) (NC)
7 7 7
0V 0V
8 8 8
*INDEX *INDEX
9 9 9
0V 0V
10 10 16
*MT0 *MT0
11 11 15
0V 0V
12 12 14
*DS1 (NC)
13 13 13
0V 0V
14 14 12
*DS0 *DS1
15 15 11
0V 0V
16 16 10
*MT1 *DS0
17 17 17 Panel–mount type
0V 0V
18 18 18 3.5″ floppy disk unit
CNC *DIR *DIR
19 19 19
CD34 0V 0V
20 20 20
*STEP *STEP J1
21 21 21
0V 0V
22 22 22
*WDATA *WDATA
23 23 23
0V 0V
24 24 24
*WE *WE
25 25 25
0V 0V
26 26 26
*TRK0 *TRK0
27 27 27
0V 0V
28 28 28
*WPRT *WPRT
29 29 29
0V 0V
30 30 30
*RDATA *RDATA
31 31 31 Pin assignment for
0V 0V
32 32 32 connector A on the
HDSEL HDSEL
33 33 33 previous page (see
0V 0V
34 34 34 Note)
*DSKCH *DSKCH
Pin assignment for connector B

on the previous page (see Note)
CN2 CN2 J2 J2
1 1
+5V 4 +5V +5V 1 +5V
2 2
0V 3 0V 0V 2 0V
3 3
0V 2 0V (NC) 3 (NC)
4 4
+12V 1 +12V (NC) 4 (NC)
This is the standard interface for the IBM PC compatible.

Commercially available cables are cross–connected between pins 10
and 16 (between the CNC and drive A) as shown above. In this case,
“drive No. setting pin” on drive A should be set to 1 (second drive).
The floppy disk unit (A02B–0207–C006) offered by FANUC should
be attached to connector A, described above.
(2) Specification of the recommended cable
A02B–0207–K801: Signal cable and power supply cable (1.0 m long)
199
www.plcworld.cn
9.7.3.1 When using this unit on the machine, observe the following cautions:
Operating environment (1) Dust
Because the intelligent terminal type 2 is not covered with panels,
except for the front door section, it must be enclosed in a sealed
cabinet. While the door is open, dust can enter the floppy disk unit and
cabinet via the disk insertion slot. If the terminal is installed in a dusty
environment, more floppy disk failures than normal may occur.
(2) Temperature
+5°C to +45°C (operating)
The operating temperature range for this unit is stricter than ordinary
units because of the restrictions imposed by the floppy disk. So, pay
special attention to the way it is cooled.
Avoid blowing air directly from a cooling fan, as dust in the air may
stick to the components of the unit.
9.7.3.2 Do NOT switch on the power to intelligent terminal type 2 while a floppy
Handling precautions disk is inserted, and especially when the floppy disk is being accessed
(LED is on). Machine tool builders are requested to provide this
information to their end users.
200
www.plcworld.cn
9.7.4
High–speed Serial Bus
(HSSB)

HSSB interface board (CNC side)
Optical fiber
COP7 COP7
1) Recommended cables (optical fiber cables)

Only the following optical fiber cables can be used.
A66L–6001–0026#L1R003: Cable length = 1 m
NOTE
1 The high–speed serial bus cannot use an optical fiber cable
designed for the FANUC I/O link, FSSB extension line, or
serial spindle.
2 Machine tool builders cannot cut or extend optical fiber
cables. Select an appropriate type from the above list.
201
www.plcworld.cn
9.7.5
Typewriter–style
Typewriter–style keyboard
Keyboard Intelligent terminal type 2 (commercial model)
CD32A
(mini DIN6)
Alternatively, FA typewriter–
style keyboard
1) Recommended full keyboard

A86L–0001–0210 . . . . . . 101–key keyboard (commercial model)
. . . . . . for development and maintenance use only
A86L–0001–0211 . . . . . . 106–key keyboard (commercial model)
A02B–0234–C120#JC . . FA typewriter–style keyboard 
(Japanese–language version) 

A02B–0234–C120#EC . . FA typewriter–style keyboard 
(English–language version) 
. . . . . . Typewriter–style keyboard
designed to be incorporated
into the intelligent terminal
NOTE
1 Commercial typewriter–style keyboards are prone to
compatibility problems with personal computers to some
degree. It is not guaranteed that the intelligent terminal type
2 can operate with every commercial typewriter–style
keyboard. Machine tool builders are requested to check the
operability of the typewriter–style keyboards they select.
Keep in mind that general commercial typewriter–style
keyboards are neither dust–proof nor moisture–resistant.
2 If an FA typewriter–style keyboard is incorporated into the
system, clamp its cable at a point as close to it as possible
so that the weight of the cable is not applied directly to the
connector.
202
www.plcworld.cn
9.7.6
Mouse
Mouse (commercial model)
Alternatively, FA typewriter–
style keyboard
Mouse (commercial model)
1) Recommended mouse
A86L–0001–0212 . . . . . Standard PS/2 mouse (commercial model)
NOTE
1 Commercial mice are prone to compatibility problems with
personal computers to some degree. It is not guaranteed
that the intelligent terminal type 2 can operate with every
commercial mouse. Machine tool builders are requested to
check the operability of the mice they select. Keep in mind
that general commercial mice are neither dust–proof nor
moisture–resistant.
2 If an FA typewriter–style keyboard is incorporated into the
system, clamp its cable at a point as close to it as possible
so that the weight of the cable is not applied directly to the
connector.
203
www.plcworld.cn
9.7.7
Centronics Parallel
Port
Intelligent terminal type 2 Example) Printer
JD9
1 STD0 11 :STB 1 :STB 19 0V

2 STD1 12 0V 2 STD 20 0V
3 STD2 13 :AFD 3 STD1 21 0V
4 STD3 14 0V 4 STD2 22 0V
5 STD4 15 :INIT 5 STD3 23 0V
6 STD5 16 0V 7 STD5 25 0V
7 STD6 17 :SLIN 6 STD4 24 0V
8 STD7 18 :ACK 8 STD6 26 0V
9 PE 19 :ERROR 9 STD7 27 0V
10 SLCT 20 BUSY 10 :ACK 28 0V
11 BUSY 29 0V
12 PE 30 0V
13 SLCT 31 :INIT
14 :AFD 32 :ERROR
15 33 0V
16 0V 34
1) Recommended cable conductor
A66L–0001–0284#10P: 10 pairs of 0.08 mm2 wires 17 FG 35
2) Recommended cable–end connectors (JD9 side)
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.) 18 36 :SLIN
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Limited)
NOTE
1 The interface on the printer side shown above is only an example. Design an interface cable
according to the specification of the printer with which it is used.
2 Commercial printers are prone to compatibility problems with personal computers to some
degree. It is not guaranteed that intelligent terminal type 2 can operate with every commercial
printer. Machine tool builders are requested to check the operability of the printers they select.
Keep in mind that general commercial printers are neither dust–proof nor moisture–resistant.
204
www.plcworld.cn
9.7.8
Serial Port 2
Intelligent terminal type 2 Example) Host computer
JD34F
1 RD 11 SD 1 FG
14
2 0V 12 0V 2 SD
15
3 DR 13 ER 3 RD
16
4 0V 14 0V 4 RS
17
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS
18
6 0V 16 0V 6 DR
19
7 CD 17 7 SG
20 ER
8 0V 18 8 CD
21
9 RI 19 (+24V) 9
22 RI
10 (+24V) 20 10
23
( ): Used for a FANUC 11
24
I/O unit
12
25
13
A66L–0001–0284#10P: 10 pairs of 0.08 mm2 wires
NOTE
1 The interface on the host computer side shown above is
only an example. Design an interface cable according to the
specification of the host computer with which it is used.
2 The +24 V lines in the interface of the personal computer
interface connection unit side, shown above, can be used
only with FANUC I/O units (such as the FANUC cassette and
FANUC Handy File). Do not use these lines for any other
purpose. Also, do not connect more than one of these units
to one CNC control unit. Otherwise, the +24 V power supply
capacity may be exceeded.
3 Do not connect anything to pins that are not labeled.
205
www.plcworld.cn
9.7.9 For an intelligent terminal having a touch panel, the touch panel controller
Serial Port 1 uses serial port 1. So this connector cannot be used for any other purpose.
The touch panel controller is connected, using a dedicated connector
rather than JD33.
Intelligent terminal type 2 Example) Host computer
JD33
1 RD 11 SD 1 FG
14
2 0V 12 0V 2 SD
15
3 DR 13 ER 3 RD
16
4 0V 14 0V 4 RS
17
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS
18
6 0V 16 0V 6 DR
19
7 CD 17 7 SG
20 ER
8 0V 18 8 CD
21
9 RI 19 (+24V) 9
22 RI
10 (+24V) 20 10
23
( ): Used for a FANUC 11
24
I/O unit
12
25
13
A66L–0001–0284#10P: 10 pairs of 0.08 mm2 wires
NOTE
1 he interface on the host computer side shown above is only
an example. Design an interface cable according to the
specification of the host computer with which it is used.
2 The +24 V lines in the interface on the personal computer
interface connection unit side shown above can be used
only for FANUC I/O units (such as the FANUC cassette and
FANUC Handy File). Do not use these lines for any other
purpose. Also, do not connect more than one of these units
to one CNC control unit. Otherwise, the +24 V power supply
capacity may be exceeded.
3 Do not connect anything to those pins that are not labeled.
206
www.plcworld.cn
9.7.10
Soft Keys
Intelligent terminal type 2 Stand–alone type MDI unit
CNK2
50cm
(1) Cable length: 50 cm
207
www.plcworld.cn
9.8
ISA EXPANSION
BOARD
9.8.1 (1) Usable boards

Installation Method Up to two ISA expansion boards (shown below) can be used in
intelligent terminal type 2.
Components installed on the rear surface of

the board may not be taller than 3.81 mm.
Components installed on the front surface of the board

may not be taller than 13.34 mm.
Portions held with damping metal fixtures

5 5
Between 79 mm and
20 20
113 mm (inclusive)
(If the board size does
not fall within the range
stated above, it can not
be held with damping
metal fixtures.
170 mm or less
Unit : mm
NOTE
FANUC does not guarantee the normal operation of any
commercial ISA expansion board and is not responsible for
its maintenance.
(2) ISA expansion board installation procedure

(See the following diagram.)
a) Remove the damping metal fixtures.
b) Fully insert the board into the connector.
c) Fasten the board with the provided screws.
d) Screw down the damping metal fixtures while holding them
against the board.
If more than one ISA expansion board is installed, the board
installed in slot A must be shorter than that installed in slot B;
otherwise, it will be impossible to hold both with damping metal
fixtures.
208
www.plcworld.cn
Slot B
Damping metal fixture A
Screw
Slot A
Damping metal
fixture B
Screw–down portion B
Screw–down portion A
ISA expansion board installation
9.8.2 (1) Address map

Handling Precautions D Intelligent terminal type 2 uses the same memory space
configuration as the IBM PC and compatibles. It cannot use
E0000H to EFFFFH, however.
D The ISA expansion board cannot use the I/O space between 0280H
and 028FH, because the intelligent terminal type 2 uses this I/O
space. However, these addresses can be changed using the rotary
switch on the main printed–circuit board.
The I/O addresses for the intelligent terminal

Rear view type 2 are LMN0H to LMNFH. They are
factory–set as follows:
L = 0 (SW3)
M = 2 (SW2)
N = 8 (SW1)
209
www.plcworld.cn
The other areas for intelligent terminal type 2 are the same as for the
IBM PC and compatibles.
D COM1, COM2, and parallel ports are specified at setup.
(2) Interrupt and DMA requests
D The IRQ signals not used by the intelligent terminal type 2 are as
follows: IRQ10 and IRQ11
D The DRQ signal used by the intelligent terminal type 2 is as
follows: DRQ2 (floppy disk drive)
(3) Allowable power supply current
For the allowable power supply current for the ISA expansion board,
see Section 9.5.2, “Power supply specification.”
(4) Cabling
For cabling, see Section 9.6, “Installation Space.”
(5) Environmental conditions for ISA expansion board installation
For the environmental conditions that must be satisfied when
installing an ISA expansion board, see the respective ISA expansion
board specifications. If your ISA expansion board does not satisfy the
conditions stated in Section 9.5.1, “Installation environmental
conditions,” the environmental conditions for your intelligent
terminal type 2 will default to those for your ISA expansion board.
(6) Miscellaneous
In addition to the handling precautions stated above, the ISA
expansion board may not operate normally if:
D Its ISA signal is pulled up or down.
D It uses the ISA bus refresh cycle.
D It functions as the bus master to perform 8–bit write access to the
host.
Note that the AHA–154 SCSI interface board manufactured by
Adaptec cannot be used in intelligent terminal type 2.
It is likely that conditions will be added in the future.
FANUC does not guarantee the normal operation of any ISA

expansion board. In addition, FANUC is not able to provide
troubleshooting or maintenance related to ISA expansion
boards.
210
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10 CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
211
www.plcworld.cn
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63003EN/04
10.1 The FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface which connects the CNC, cell
controller, I/O Unit–A, or Power Mate and transfers I/O signals (bit data)
GENERAL at high speeds between each device. The FANUC I/O Link regards one
device as the master and other devices as slaves when more than one
device is connected. Input signals from the slaves are sent to the master
at specified intervals. Output signals from the master are also sent to the
slaves at specified intervals.
212
www.plcworld.cn
10.2 On i Series, the interface connector JD1A for I/O Link is provided on the
main board.
CONNECTION In the I/O there are the master station and its slave stations. The master
is the control unit of the CNC, and the slave is the I/O unit–A. The slaves
are divided into groups, and up to 16 groups can be connected to one I/O
Link. A maximum of two base I/O units can be connected as a group.
The I/O Link is connected in different ways depending on the types of
units actually used and the I/O points. To connect the I/O Link, the
assignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been made
programmable with the PMC program. The maximum number of I/O
points is 1024.
The two connectors of the I/O Link are named JD1A and JD1B, and are
common to all units (that have I/O Link function). A cable is always
connected from JD1A of a unit to JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1A
of the last unit is not used and left open, it need not be connected with a
terminator.
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all
units on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on Subsec. 10.2.1. Use the
figures when connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.
Main I/O256/256 or less per group

board
JD1A
FANUC I/O Link
I/O1024/1024 or less in total I/O Link
Series 21 FANUC I/O Unit– MODEL A 2max

control unit
Base unit 1 Base unit 2
JD1B Group
#0 Magnetic
JD1A
circuit
Max.
16 group JD1B Group
JD1A #1
…
…
JD1B Group
#2
JD1A
Fig. 10.2 I/O Link connection diagram
213
www.plcworld.cn
Control unit
I/O Link
JD1A
I/O UNIT–A
JD1B
I/O UNIT–A
DC24V
This figure is an example of connecting the I/O Link to an i Series

CNC with a LCD–mounted type panel.
214
www.plcworld.cn
10.2.1
Connection of FANUC
I/O Link by Electric
Cable
Control unit or preceding slave unit I/O unit MODEL A
JD1A JD1B
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A) (PCR–E20LMD) JD1A
(PCR–E20LMD)
1 SIN 11 0V JD1B 1 SIN 11 0V
2 :SIN 12 0V 2 :SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V
Next slave
4 :SOUT 14 0V 4 :SOUT 14 0V unit
5 15 5 15
6 16 6 16
7 17 7 17
8 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)
+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O Link adapter. They are not necessary
when connecting with a metal cable.
A line for the +5V terminal is not required when the Optical I/O Link
Adapter is not used.
Cable wirinr
SIN 1 3 SOUT
:SIN 2 4 :SOUT
SOUT 3 1 SIN
:SOUT 4 2 :SIN
0V 11 11 0V
0V 12 12 0V
0V 13 13 0V
0V 14 14 0V
Shield
Ground Plate
Recommended wire material
A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10pair)
Recommended cable connectors

FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Ltd.)
The recommended cable–end connector F130–20S (Hirose Electric Co.,

Ltd.) can be used only as connector JD1A for the i Series CNC with a
LCD–mounted type panel.
215
www.plcworld.cn
10.2.2 The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 m
Connection of FANUC with optical fiber cables using an optical I/O Link adapter. The length of
the electrical cable connected to the optical conversion adapter must not
I/O Link Optical Fiber exceed 2 m.
Cable
In the following cases, use an optical fiber cable.
D When the cable is more than 15 meters long.
D When the cable is run between different cabinets, and the cabinets
cannot be connected with each other via a ground wire of 5.5 mm2 or
more.
If the power magnetics cabinet includes an I/O Link slave unit, and
cables are connected through a duct to the operator’s panel (as shown
below), the control section I/O Link slave unit can be assumed to be
incorporated in the same cabinet.
CNC
Operator’s
panel I/O control
section Distribution I/O,
etc.
Operator’s panel Other units
Power magnetics cabinet
D When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise; for
example :
When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source beside the cable
such as a welding machine.
When a noise generating cable such as a power cable runs for a long
distance in parallel with the cable.
External dimension of
optical link adapter
66.0
40.0 4–M3
connector
for unit Optical connector
connecting COP1
45.0
JD1 FANUC
7.0
18.0
Unit : mm
216
www.plcworld.cn
Weight of optical link Main body: Approx. 100 g.

adapter
Connection
D Connection diagram
Unit Unit
JD1 JD1
JD1A JD1B
Connecting COP1 Optical COP1 Connecting

cable between cable cable between
unit Optical I/O Optical I/O unit
link adapter link adapter
D Interunit connecting cables
01 SIN 11 0V Unit side Adapter side

JD1A,JD1B JD1
02 :SIN 12 0V
03 SOUT 13 0V SIN(01) (03)SOUT
04 :SOUT 14 0V :SIN(02) (04):SOUT
05 15 0V SOUT(03) (01)SIN
06 16 0V :SOUT(04) (02):SIN
07 17 +5V(09) (09)+5V
08 18 +5V +5V(18) (18)+5V
09 +5V 19 +5V(20) (20)+5V
10 20 +5V 0V(11) (11)0V
0V(12) (12)0V
0V(13) (13)0V
0V(14) (14)0V
0V(15) (15)0V
0V(16) (16)0V
1 Recommended cable connectors

FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Ltd.)
NOTE
The recommended cable–end connector FI30–20S (Hirose
Electric Co., Ltd.) can be used only as connector JD1A for
the i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted type panel.
2 Recommended cable (wire material) : A66L–0001–0284#10P

3 Cable length : Max. 2 m (when the recommended cable is used)
217
www.plcworld.cn
D Optical cable 1 Specification:

A66L–6001–0009# L5R003 5 m long
A66L–6001–0009# L10R03 10 m long
A66L–6001–0009# L15R03 15 m long
2 Cable length
Maximum length: 200 m (standard type)
Maximum length: 100 m (high–speed type)
NOTE
Be careful not bend optical cables to a radius of 25 mm or
less. Be extremely careful not to twist them.
D Maximum number of connectable stages

Up to 16 high–speed type I/O link adapter stages can be connected in
one I/O link, while only up to five conventional I/O link adapters
(standard type) can be connected.
1) Standard type (A13B–0154–B001) ... up to 5 adapter stages can be
connected in series
2) Standard type (A13B–0154–B002) ... up to 16 adapter stages can
be connected in series
NC or Optical I/O Optical I/O NC or Optical I/O Optical I/O NC or

I/O Unit link adapter link adapter I/O Unit link adapter link adapter I/O Unit
One stage
NOTE
It is impossible to use both high–speed and standard type
adapters on the same line.
D Power supply
The same power supply type can be used for both the standard type
(A13B–0154–B001) and high–speed type (A13B–0154–B002).
(a) Power supply voltage: 4.75 to 5.25 V (at receiving end)
(b) Required current: 200 mA
218
www.plcworld.cn
Installation conditions (a) The optical link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it with
the CNC control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
(b) Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical link adapter.
(c) The optical link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to mount
it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact with other
circuits to prevent possible short–circuits. When mounting the optical
link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an L–type fitting using the case
fixing screws (M3) of the optical link adapter.
L fitting
Required parts For making up an I/O Link using the optical link adapter, the following
parts are necessary:
1 Optical I/O Link adapter 2
2 Interunit connecting cable 2
3 Optical cable 1
D Relay with an optical fiber connection adapter
For the outline drawing of the optical fiber connection adapter, see
Appendix D.
NOTE
Optical fiber cables can be relayed only at are location.
When a high–speed optical link adapter is used, no optical
fiber connection adapter can be used.
D Maximum transmission distance with an optical fiber cable(s)

The table below shows the maximum transmission distance with an
optical fiber cable(s), which varies depending on whether a connection
adapter is used for a relay.
Relay Maximum transmission distance
Standard type No 200m
Yes 100m (total)
High–speed type No 100m
Yes N/A
219
www.plcworld.cn
10.2.3 Except for the FS20i, two channels of FANUC I/O Link interfaces are
Connection when Two provided. Since this feature is additional, however, some previous
control units may not be capable of using two channels. Use of two
Channels of FANUC I/O channels allows the number of usable I/Os to be increased to 2048 for both
Links are Used inputs and outputs (previously, only 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs were
usable).
Technical report called FANUC PMC Ladder Language Programming
Supplement (document number: B–61863/12–5) is available separately
to let you know how to use this feature, the overall version of the
corresponding PC board, PMCs that can take advantage of this feature,
and the series and version of their management software as well as the
series and version of the CNC management software.
NOTE
When this feature is to be used by the i Series CNCs
described above, PMC–SB6 needs to be specified.
The PMC on the loader control board cannot use this
feature.
Signals for two channels are assigned to the FANUC I/O Link connector
on the CNC. When using two channels, use the I/O Link branching
adapter to branch off the FANUC I/O Link.
Connection
CNC I/O Link branching

adapter
JD1A JD44B
JD1A–1 FANUC I/O Link channel 1
JD1A–2 FANUC I/O Link channel 2
Connection after the I/O Link branching adapter is the

same as that for the FANUC I/O Link.
Part number of the I/O Link branching adapter: A20B–1007–0680 (60 g)
Restrictions When two channels are used, a total of up to eight FANUC B I/O unit
groups can be connected to them.
220
www.plcworld.cn
Connection between the

CNC and I/O Link
branching adapter CNC I/O Link branching adapter
JD1A JD44B
(such as PCR–E20MDK–SL–A) (PCR–E20MDT)
1 SIN1 11 0V 1 SIN1 11 0V
2 *SIN1 12 0V 2 *SIN1 12 0V
3 SOUT1 13 0V 3 SOUT1 13 0V
4 *SOUT1 14 0V 4 *SOUT1 14 0V
5 SIN2 15 0V 5 SIN2 15 0V
6 *SIN2 16 0V 6 *SIN2 16 0V
7 SOUT2 17 7 SOUT2 17
8 *SOUT2 18 (+5V) 8 *SOUT2 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 (+24V) 9 (+5V) 19
10 (+24V) 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)
The +5V pin is provided to use the optical I/O Link adapter for optical
fiber transmission. When not using the optical I/O Link adapter, leave the
+5V pin unconnected.
Do not connect anything to the +24V pin.
Cabling
CNC I/O Link branching adapter
JD1A JD44B
SIN1 1 3 SOUT1
*SIN1 2 4 *SOUT1
SOUT1 3 1 SIN1
*SOUT1 4 2 *SIN1
SIN2 5 7 SOUT2
*SIN2 6 8 *SOUT2
SOUT2 7 5 SIN2
*SOUT2 8 6 *SIN2
0V 11 11 0V
0V 12 12 0V
0V 13 13 0V
0V 14 14 0V
0V 15 15 0V
0V 16 16 0V
(+5V) 18 18 (+5V)
(+5V) 20 20 (+5V)
(+5V) 9 9 (+5V)
Shield
h When not using the optical I/O Link adapter, leave

the +5V pin unconnected.
Recommended cable connectors: PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo

Co., Ltd.)
221
www.plcworld.cn
The FI30–20S connector (from Hirose Electric) cannot be used as

connector JD1A on the main CPU board in the separate–type i Series.
Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0284#10P
Connection between the The I/O Link branching adapter can be connected to I/O units in the same
I/O Link branching way as for the conventional FANUC I/O Link. See 10.2.1.
adapter and FANUC I/O
Link I/O units
Cable length
CNC I/O Link branching I/O unit

adapter
lA
JD1A JD44B
lB
JD1A–1 JD1B
JD1A–2
The total of lA and lB must not exceed 10 m; where lA is the length of

the cable between connector JD1A on the CNC and connector JD44B on
the I/O Link branching adapter, and lB is the length of the cable between
connector JD1A–1 or JD1A–2 on the I/O Link branching adapter and
connector JD1B on the I/O unit. When all cables are accommodated in
the same cabinet, however, a total cable length of up to 15 m is allowed.
Installation of the I/O Install the I/O Link branching adapter in a hermetically sealed cabinet like
Link branching adapter the CNC.
222
www.plcworld.cn
External dimensions of
the I/O Link branching
adapter 60
JD44B JD1A–1 JD1A–2
45
85
Unit: mm
Allow a clearance of about 10 cm above the adapter for connection and

routing of cables.
Installation of the I/O 1) Installation on the DIN rail

Link branching adapter
35
25
Unit: mm
Recommended DIN rail

2) Screwing
11.6
2–M4
70
Unit: mm
Drilling on the plate
223
www.plcworld.cn
10.3 Basically, the i Series can be connected to any unit that has a FANUC I/O
Link slave interface. The following table lists general units that can be
UNITS THAT CAN BE connected to the i Series. Detailed descriptions of each unit are given later
CONNECTED USING in this section. For details of other units, refer to the documentation
FANUC I/O Link provided with the unit.
General units that can be connected to the i Series
Unit Description Reference
FANUC I/O Modular I/O unit that supports a Connection and

Unit–MODEL A combination of the input/output signals maintenance
required by a power magnetics circuit. manual
B–61813E
FANUC I/O Distribution type I/O unit that supports a Connection and
Unit–MODEL B combination of input/output signals maintenance
required by a power magnetics circuit. manual
B–62163E
Connector panel Distribution type I/O unit that handles Sec. 10.4
I/O module the input/output signals required by the
power magnetics circuit; it has an
interface with a manual pulse
generator.
Operator’s panel Unit having an interface with a machine Sec. 10.5

I/O module operator’s panel; it has an interface with
(for matrix input) a manual pulse generator.

I/O module operator’s panel that handles the
input/output signals required by the
power magnetics circuit; it has an
interface with a manual pulse
generator.
Power magnetics Unit having an interface with a power Sec. 10.6

panel I/O module magnetics panel that handles the
input/output signals required by the
power magnetics circuit.
Machine operator’s Unit having an interface with a matrix of Sec. 10.7

panel interface unit key switches and LEDs on the machine
operator’s panel as well as an interface
with a manual pulse generator.

connection unit operator’s panel
Source type output Unit having an interface with a machine Sec. 10.9
operator’s panel operator’s panel; a source type output
connection unit circuit is used in the DO signal output
driver.
FANUC I/O Link Unit connecting FANUC I/O Link Sec. 10.10
connection unit masters to enable the transfer of DI/DO
signals
FANUC servo unit β Unit connected with the CNC via the Sec. 10.11
series FANUC I/O Link to control a servo motor
(with I/O Link)
224
www.plcworld.cn
10.4
CONNECTION OF
CONNECTOR PANEL
I/O MODULE
10.4.1
Configuration
Flat cable for module connection
Extension module 3
Extension module 2
Extension module 1
(with manual pulse generator)
Basic module
I/O Link cable
Manual pulse generator cable
NOTE
For direction connection to the connection printed circuit board, expansion modules are
installed to the right of the basic module on the installation plane. For installation using DIN
rails or screws, expansion modules are installed to the left of the basic module on the installation
plane.
225
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.2
Connection Diagram
CNC
I/O UNIT
JD1B
I/O Link
JD1A
JD1B
JD1A
CA52 CB150
Basic module
MPG
+24 V power supply

MPG
JA3
DI/DO
module
MPG
Connector panel
CA53
CB150 Machine side

DI/DO
CA52
Extension module
(with MPG (Note))
2A output
CA53 module
CB154
CA52
Extension module 2
Analog
CA53 input
module
CB157
CA52
Extension module 3
226
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
1 Ensure that the extension module with the MPG interface is located nearest to the basic
module, as shown in the figure. The MPG can be connected to the connector panel I/O module
only when the i series CNC is used. When the connector panel I/O module is used together
with a unit (such as an operator’s panel I/O module) connected to the I/O Link supporting
another MPG interface, only the MPG interface of the unit (module) closest to the CNC
connected to the I/O Link is effective.
2 The connection diagram above shows an example of using a DI/DO module, 2A output module,
and analog input module as expansion modules. These expansion modules can be used in
any combination.
10.4.3 Types of modules

Module Specifications Reference
Name Drawing No. Specifications item
I/O module for A03B–0818–C001 DI/DO : 24/16

connection
(basic module)

connection With MPG interface
(expansion module A)

connection Without MPG
(expansion module B) interface
I/O module for A03B–0818–C004 DO : 16

connection 2A output module
(expansion module C)
I/O module for A03B–0818–C005 Analog input module

connection
(expansion module D)
Fuse (accessory) A03B–0815–K002 1A

(For basic module)
Inter–module flat A03B–0815–K100 20 mm long

cable Suitable for a module
interval of 32 mm
Module specifications (common items)

Item Specifications Remarks
Interface with CNC FANUC I/O Link Expandable up to 16 units or

connection 1024/1024 points as CNC slaves
Interface between Bus connection Up to three expansion modules

basic module and using a flat cable connectable per basic module
expansion modules
For the specifications (such as signal input requirements) specific to each

module, see the relevant pages of each item.
227
www.plcworld.cn
Installation conditions
Ambient temperature Operation: 0°C to 55°C
for the unit Storage and transportation: –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change 1.1°C/minute maximum
Humidity Normal condition: 75% (relative humidity)

Short term (within one month): 95% (relative humidity)
Vibration Operation: 0.5 G or less
Atmosphere Normal machining factory environment (For use in an

environment with relatively high levels of dust, coolant,
organic solutions, and so forth, additional measures are
required.)
Other conditions (1) Use each I/O module in a completely sealed cabinet.
(2) For ventilation within each I/O module, each module
must be installed in the orientation shown below.
Moreover, for ventilation and wiring, allow a
clearance of 100 mm or more above and below each
module. Never place a device that generates a large
amount of heat below an I/O module.
(3) While referring to Section 9.4.18, ensure that the vent
hole of the basic module is not obstructed by the flat
cable.
Upper side
Basic module
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
module 1
module 2
module 3
I/O Link connection
MPG connection Lower side
Power supply rating

Module Power supply Power supply Remarks
voltage rating
Basic module 24 VDC "10% is fed 0.2A+7.3mA DI Number of DI

through the I/O points with DI=ON
connector (CB150) of
Expansion the basic module; 0.1A+7.3mA DI Number of DI
modules A "10% includes points with DI=ON
and B momentary variations
and ripples.
Expansion 0.1A
module C
(2A module)
Expansion 0.1A
module D
(analog input
module)
As a guideline for the heat dissipation, assume [power supply capacity

24 (W)].
228
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.4 This section describes the DI/DO connector pin allocation of the basic
DI/DO Connector Pin module and expansion modules A and B.
Assignment CB150 (HONDA MR–50RMA)
33 DOCOM 01 DOCOM 50 male pins with fittings for
34 Yn+0.0 02 Yn+1.0 fixing the connector covers
19 0V
35 Yn+0.1 03 Yn+1.1
20 0V
36 Yn+0.2 04 Yn+1.2
21 0V
37 Yn+0.3 05 Yn+1.3
22 0V
38 Yn+0.4 06 Yn+1.4
23 0V
39 Yn+0.5 07 Yn+1.5
24 DICOM0
40 Yn+0.6 08 Yn+1.6
25 Xm+1.0
41 Yn+0.7 09 Yn+1.7
26 Xm+1.1
42 Xm+0.0 10 Xm+2.0
27 Xm+1.2
43 Xm+0.1 11 Xm+2.1
28 Xm+1.3
44 Xm+0.2 12 Xm+2.2
29 Xm+1.4
45 Xm+0.3 13 Xm+2.3
30 Xm+1.5
46 Xm+0.4 14 Xm+2.4
31 Xm+1.6
47 Xm+0.5 15 Xm+2.5
32 Xm+1.7
48 Xm+0.6 16 Xm+2.6
49 Xm+0.7 17 Xm+2.7
50 +24V 18 +24V
NOTE
1 The DI and DO addresses for the basic and extension
modules run contiguously. These basic and extension
module DI and DO addresses are allocated to the I/O Link
as a group. For example, when the DI and DO top
addresses are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4 and n = 0),
respectively, then the addresses are allocated as shown in
the following table.
2 Pins 18 and 50 (+24V) of connector CB150 are used to
apply 24 V externally to a module. Be sure to connect these
pins because the +24 V applied to the module is used
internally.
DI DO
Basic module X4–X6 Y0–Y1
Extension module 1 X7–X9 Y2–Y3
229
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.5 This section describes the DI (input signal) connections of the basic
DI (Input Signal) module and expansion modules A and B.
Connection d A maximum of 96 points are provided
(24 points per module; 1 basic module + 3 extension modules).
Pin number
Address number CB150(18)

+24V
Bit number CB150(50)
Xm+0.0 CB150(42)
RV
+24V 0V
Xm+0.1 CB150(43) +24 V stabilized power supply
RV
Xm+0.2 CB150(44)
RV
Xm+0.3 CB150(45)
RV
Xm+0.4 CB150(46)
RV
Xm+0.5 CB150(47)
RV
Xm+0.6 CB150(48)
RV
Xm+0.7 CB150(49)
RV
CB150(24)
DICOM0
CB150 (19),(20),(21)
(22),(23)
Xm+1.0 CB150(25)
RV
Xm+1.1 CB150(26)
RV
Xm+1.2 CB150(27)
RV
Xm+1.3 CB150(28)
RV
Xm+1.4 CB150(29)
RV
Xm+1.5 CB150(30)
RV
Xm+1.6 CB150(31)
RV
Xm+1.7 CB150(32)
RV
230
www.plcworld.cn
Pin number
Address number CB150(18)

+24V
Bit number CB150(50)
Xm+2.0 CB150(10)
RV
+24V 0V
Xm+2.1 CB150(11) +24 V stabilized power supply
RV
Xm+2.2 CB150(12)
RV
Xm+2.3 CB150(13)
RV
Xm+2.4 CB150(14)
RV
Xm+2.5 CB150(15)
RV
Xm+2.6 CB150(16)
RV
Xm+2.7 CB150(17)
RV
CB150 (19),(20),(21)
(22),(23)
NOTE
Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 are DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected. That is, by
connecting the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can be input with
its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has the same effect
as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent such accidents, the connection of the DICOM0
CB150(24) pin to the 0 V power supply is recommended whereever possible.
For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to be allocated to an appropriate bit of
the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed, ranging from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 or from
Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7. See 9.4.20 for information about how to allocate the emergency stop
signal.
For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed (from
Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7), the logic is fixed to “0”. For unused pins
allocated to Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the logic is fixed
to “0” when the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is connected to the 0 V power supply. When the
DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is connected to the +24 V power supply, the logic is fixed to “1”. The
logic of the unused pins allocated to Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 is variable when the contact of the
DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is open.
231
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.6 This section describes the DO (output signal) connections of the basic
DO (Output Signal) module and expansion modules A and B.
Connection d A maximum of 64 points are provided (16 points per module; 1 basic
module + 3 extension modules).
Pin number
DOCOM
CB150(01),(33)
Address number
Bit number
+24V 0V
+24 V stabilized power supply
Yn+0.0 CB150(34)
Relay
DV
Yn+0.1 CB150(35)
DV
Yn+0.2 CB150(36)
DV
Yn+0.3 CB150(37)
DV
Yn+0.4 CB150(38)
DV
Yn+0.5 CB150(39)
DV
Yn+0.6 CB150(40)
DV
Yn+0.7 CB150(41)
DV
Yn+1.0 CB150(02)
DV
Yn+1.1 CB150(03)
DV
Yn+1.2 CB150(04)
DV
Yn+1.3 CB150(05)
DV
Yn+1.4 CB150(06)
DV
Yn+1.5 CB150(07)
DV
Yn+1.6 CB150(08)
DV
Yn+1.7 CB150(09)
DV
CB150 (19),(20),(21)
(22),(23)
232
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.7 This section describes the specifications of the DI/DO signals used with
DI/DO Signal the basic module and expansion modules A and B.
Specifications
DI (input signal specifications)
Number of points 24 points (per module)
Contact rating 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Leakage current between 1 mA or less (26.4 V)

contacts when opened
Voltage decrease between 2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)

contacts when closed
Delay time The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum). In

addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and
I/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period
(depending on CNC)] must be considered.
DO (output signal specifications)
Maximum load current 200 mA or less including momentary variations

when ON
Saturation voltage when 1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA

ON
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
Leakage current when 20 µA or less

OFF
Delay time The driver delay time is 50 µs (maximum). In

addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and
I/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period
(depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output

signals)
By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO
signals (output signals), all the DO signals of each module can be turned
off at the same time. At this time, the DO state is as shown below.
ON
DOCOM
OFF
DO state when ON
DO is on in the
sequence OFF
DO state when ON
DO is off in the
sequence OFF
233
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
When DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state of
DOCOM is directly reflected in the DO state as indicated
above by the dashed box. The +24 V signal to be supplied
to the I/O module must not be turned off during operation.
Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm is issued. Ensure
that +24 V is supplied either when or before the power to the
CNC is turned on, and that +24 V is removed either when
or after the power to the CNC is turned off.
Parallel DO (output signal) connection

A DO load current of twice the level can be obtained by connecting DO
points in parallel and exercising ON/OFF control at the same time in the
sequence. Namely, the maximum load current per DO point is 200 mA.
By connecting two DO points in parallel and turning on the two DO points
at the same time, 400 mA can be obtained. In this case, however, the
leakage current is doubled up to 40 µA when the DO points are turned off.
DOCOM
CB150(01),(33)
+24V 0V
+24 V regulated power supply
Relay
DV
DV
234
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.8 This section describes the 2A output connector pin allocation of

2A Output Connector expansion module C.
Pin Allocation CB154 (HONDA MR–50RMA)
33 DOCOMA 01 DOCOMA 50 pins, male,
34 Yn+0.0 02 Yn+1.0 with a metal fitting for securing
19 GNDA the connector cover
35 Yn+0.1 03 Yn+1.1
20 GNDA
36 Yn+0.2 04 Yn+1.2
21 GNDA
37 Yn+0.3 05 Yn+1.3
22 GNDA
38 Yn+0.4 06 Yn+1.4
23 GNDA
39 Yn+0.5 07 Yn+1.5
24
40 Yn+0.6 08 Yn+1.6
25
41 Yn+0.7 09 Yn+1.7
26
42 10
27
43 11
28
44 12
29
45 13
30
46 14
31
47 15
32
48 16
49 DOCOMA 17 DOCOMA
50 DOCOMA 18 DOCOMA
NOTE
1 The DI/DO addresses of an expansion module and the
DI/DO addresses of the basic module are contiguous.
Addresses allocated to I/O Link are handled as a group
covering the basic and expansion modules. That is, when
the first addresses allocated are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4,
n = 0), the DI/DO addresses are as listed below.
2 When the 2A output module is used, the DI addresses of the
module cannot be used. (When the 2A output module is
used as expansion module 3, X13 through X15 cannot be
used.)
DI DO
Basic module X4 to X6 Y0 to Y1
Expansion module 1 X7 to X9 Y2 to Y3
235
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.9 This section describes the 2A output connector connections of expansion

2A DO (Output Signal) module C.
Connection
Address number
Bit number
24VDC
Solenoid,
etc.
236
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.10 This section describes the specifications of the 2A output DO signals used
2A Output DO Signal with expansion module C.
Specifications DO (output signal specifications)
Maximum load current 2 A or less per point.

when ON 12 A maximum for the entire module
(DO: 16 points) (including momentary variations).
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less (including momentary

variations)
Leakage current when OFF 100 µA or less
Delay time [I/O Link transfer time (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder

scan period (depending on CNC)] must be
considered.
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output

signals)
By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO
signals (output signals), all the DO signals of each module can be turned
off at one time. At this time, the DO state is as shown below.
ON
DOCOM
OFF
DO state when ON
DO is on in the
OFF
sequence
DO state when ON
DO is off in the
sequence OFF
NOTE
When DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state of
DOCOM is directly reflected in the DO state as indicated
above by the dashed box. The +24 V signal to be supplied
to the I/O module must not be turned off during operation.
Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm is issued. Ensure
that +24 V is supplied either when or before the power to the
CNC is turned on, and that +24 V is removed either when
or after the power to the CNC is turned off.
Parallel DO (output signal) connection

The 2A output module does not allow parallel DO connections including
parallel connections with the DO signals of other modules.
237
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.11 This section describes the analog input connector pin allocation of
Analog Input expansion module D.
Connector Pin CB157 (HONDA MR–50RMA)
Allocation 33 INM3 01 INM1 50 pins, male,
34 COM3 02 COM1 with a metal fitting for securing
19 FGND the connector cover
35 FGND3 03 FDND1
20 FGND
36 INP3 04 INP1
21 FGND
37 JMP3 05 JMP1
22 FGND
38 INM4 06 INM2
23 FGND
39 COM4 07 COM2
24
40 FGND4 08 FGND2
25
41 INP4 09 INP2
26
42 JMP4 10 JMP2
27
43 11
28
44 12
29
45 13
30
46 14
31
47 15
32
48 16
49 17
50 18
NOTE
1 The DI/DO addresses of an expansion module and the
DI/DO addresses of the basic module are contiguous.
Addresses allocated to I/O Link are handled as a group
covering the basic and expansion modules. That is, when
the first addresses allocated are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4,
n = 0), the DI/DO addresses are as listed below.
2 With the analog input module, the DO space is also used as
an input channel selection area.
DI DO
Basic module X4 to X6 Y0 to Y1
238
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.12 This section provides a diagram of the analog input connector

Analog Input Signal connections of expansion module D.
Connections
Analog input module
Pin number
Not connected
For voltage input
Voltage
source
(Common to all channels)
Analog input module
Pin number
For current input
Current
source
(Common to all channels)
239
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
1 In the diagram above, n represents each channel (n = 1, 2,
3, 4).
2 Current input or voltage input can be selected on a
channel–by–channel basis. For current input, connect
JMPn to INPn.
3 For the connection, use a shielded twisted pair.
4 In the diagram above, the shield of each channel is
connected to FGNDn, and FGND is used for shield
processing of all channels. However, the shield of a channel
may be directly connected to frame ground with a cable
clamp, instead of using FGNDn.
5 If the voltage (current) source has a GND pin, as shown in
the figure above, connect COMn to this pin. Otherwise,
connect INMn and COMn together in the analog input
module.
240
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.13 This section describes the specifications of the analog input signals used
Analog Input Signal with expansion module D.
Specifications Item Specifications Remarks
Number of input Four channels

channels (Note)
Analog input DC –10 to +10 V Voltage input or current

(Input resistance: 4.7 ohms) input can be selected on
DC –20 to +20 mA channel–by–channel
(Input resistance: 250 ohms) basis.
Digital output (Note) 12 bits (binary) Represented as two’s

complement
Input/output Analog input Digital output

correspondence
+10V +2000
+5V or +20mA +1000
0V or 0mA 0
–5V or –20mA –1000
–10V –2000
Resolution 5 mV or 20 µA
Overall precision Voltage input: "0.5% With respect to full scale

Current input: "1%
Maximum input "15V/"30mA

voltage/current
Minimum conversion Ladder scan period of CNC

time (Note) connected
Number of occupied DI = 3 bytes, DO = 2 bytes

input/output points
(Note)
NOTE
This analog input module has four input channels. The
digital output section consists of a group of 12 bits within the
three–byte occupied input points. This means that the
channel to be used can be dynamically selected by the
ladder. The channel switching DO point for channel
selection is included in the two–byte occupied output points.
241
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.14 (Digital output)

Analog Input This digital input module has four input channels. The digital output
Specifications section consists of a group of 12 bits within the three–byte occupied input
points. The output format is indicated below.
Address in the module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm (even–numbered address) D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Xm+1 (odd–numbered address) 0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08
D00 to D11 represent 12–bit digital output data. D00 and D11 correspond
to weightings of 20 and 211, respectively.
D11 is a sign bit expressed as a two’s complement. CHA and CHB
represent analog input channels.
This means that when the two bytes above are read with a PMC program,
the A–D converted data of the CHA and CHB input channels can be read
from D11 to D00. For CHA and CHB, see the description of channel
selection, below.
Section 6.3 provides notes on reading data with a PMC program.
(Channel selection)
With this analog input module, which of the four channels is to be output
to the digital output section must be determined with a PMC program.
The DO points used for this selection are CHA and CHB (two–byte
occupied output points). These are mapped as indicated below.
Yn X X X X X X X X
Yn+1 X X X X X X CHB CHA
By writing the values indicated below to CHA and CHB, the

corresponding channel is selected, and the A–D converted data of the
channel and the data of the selected channel can be read as DI data. The
character X indicated above represents an unused bit, so that either 1 or
0 may be written in place of X.
CHB CHA Channel selected
0 0 Channel 1
0 1 Channel 2
1 0 Channel 3
1 1 Channel 4
(Address)
The start address of X (DI) of the basic modules including the analog input
module must always be allocated at an even–numbered address. With this
allocation, the digital output addresses of the analog input module are as
described below, depending on where the analog input module is
allocated
D When the analog input module is allocated in the space for expansion
module 1 (m represents the allocation start address.)
242
www.plcworld.cn

Xm+3 (odd–numbered address) Undefined
Xm+4 (even–numbered address) D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Xm+8 (even–numbered address) Undefined
Xm+9 (odd–numbered address) Undefined
NOTE
When two–byte digital output addresses are to be
referenced with a PMC program, a read must always be
performed word–by–word (16 bits).
243
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.15 An example in which three manual pulse generators are connected to

Manual Pulse extension module A is shown below. The manual pulse generator can be
connected only for the i series CNC.
Generator Connection
Extension module Manual pulse generators
Manual pulse generator #1
JA3 (PCR–E20LMDT) (M3 screw terminal)
3 4 5 6
1 HA1 11
+5V 0V HA1 HB1
2 HB1 12 0V
3 HA2 13 Manual pulse generator #2
4 HB2 14 0V (M3 screw terminal)
5 HA3 15 3 4 5 6
6 HB3 16 0V +5V 0V HA2 HB2
7 17 Manual pulse generator #3
8 18 +5V (M3 screw terminal)
9 +5V 19 3 4 5 6
10 20 +5V +5V 0V HA3 HB3
Cable connection Manual pulse

Terminal block generators
#1
1 7Red 5
HA1 HA1 HA1
2 7White 6
HB1 HB1 HB1
9 5Red 3
+5V +5V +5V
12 2Black 4
0V 0V 0V
#2
3 8Red 5
HA2 HA2 HA2
4 8Black 6
HB2 HB2 HB2
18 4Red 3
+5V +5V +5V
14 3Black 4
0V 0V 0V
#3
5 9Black 5
HA3 HA3 HA3
6 9White 6
HB3 HB3 HB3
20 6Red 3
+5V +5V +5V
16 1Black 4
0V 0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate
Cable Wire
Recommended wire material:

A66L–0001–0286 (#20 AWG × 6 + #24 AWG × 3 pairs)
A02B–0120–K303 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: FI40–2015S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
(Case: FI40–20–CV5 (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
Recommended cables:
A02B–0120–K841 (7 m)
(for connecting three manual pulse generators)
A02B–0120–K848 (7 m)
(for connecting two manual pulse generators)
A02B–0120–K847 (7 m)
(for connecting one manual pulse generator)
244
www.plcworld.cn
(These cables do not include the wire shown in the above figure.)
NOTE
The number of connectable manual pulse generators
depends on the type and option configuration.
10.4.16 Like a pulse coder, the manual pulse generator operates on 5 VDC. The
Cable Length for supply voltage drop due to the cable resistance must be held below 0.2 V
(when those of the 0–volt and 5–volt wires are combined), as expressed
Manual Pulse in the following expression:
Generator
0.2 u
+
0.1 R
m
2L
Where
0.1 = manual pulse generator supply current (0.1 A)
R = resistance per unit cable length (W/m)
m = number of 0–volt and 5–volt wires
L = cable length (m).
Therefore, the cable length can be determined using the following

expression.
Lt
+R
m
In the case of the A66L–0001–0286 cable, for example, when three pairs
of signal wires and six power supply wires (20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m) are
used (three power supply wires connected to 5 V and the other three to 0
V), the cable length is:
Lt
+
3 + 76.75[m]
0.0394
However, the maximum pulse transmission distance for the manual pulse
generator is 50 m. Taking this into consideration, the cable length may
be extended to:
38.37 m (when two generators are used), or
25.58 m (when three generators are used).
245
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.17 In the case of the FS20i, four manual pulse generators are sometimes
Connecting to the connected. However, only up to three manual pulse generators can be
connected to the separate wiring I/O module or to the control panel I/O
Manual Pulse module. For this reason, in the case of the FS20i, two separate wiring I/O
Generator on the FS20i modules or control panel I/O modules having a manual pulse generator
interface are used. Even in a combination of two of these modules having
the same specifications, the connection is possible even in a combination
of one of each of these modules.
Connect these two modules by I/O–Link, and connect the three manual
pulse generators to the module close to the controller, and the remaining
manual pulse generator to the module next closest to the controller.
NOTE
This method of use is applied only in the case of the FS20i,
and cannot be used on other machine types.
Example)
The following describes an example of input signal assignments when
a control panel I/O module (A20B–2002–0470) and a separate wiring
module (A20B–2002–0520) are used.
D Assign 16 bytes from x0008 as the start of the input signal on
A20B–2002–0470 and 16 bytes from x0024 as the start of the input
signal on A20B–2002–0520.
246
www.plcworld.cn
X0008 General–purpose input signal on A20B–2002–0470

X0009
X0010 Reserve area on A20B–2002–0470
X0011
X0012 Matrix input signal on A20B–2002–0470
:
X0018 Control
panel I/O
X0019 Reserve area on A20B–2002–0470 module
X0020 Manual pulse generator on A20B–2002–0470
(used as 1st generator)
(used as 2nd generator)
(used as 3rd generator)
X0023 DO alarm detection on A20B–2002–0470
X0024 General–purpose input signal on A20B–2002–0520
:
X0029
X0030 Reserve area on A20B–2002–0520
:
X0035 Separate
type I/O
X0036 Manual pulse generator on A20B–2002–0520 module
(used as 4th generator)
(not available)
(not available)
X0039 DO alarm detection on A20B–2002–0520
247
www.plcworld.cn
Manual Pulse Generator When using other manufacturers’ manual pulse generators, ensure that
Interface the following specifications are satisfied.
Pulse width The relationship between the HAn and HBn signals and the CNC pulses
shall be as shown in Fig. 10.4.17 (a).
Pulse cycle T1 shall be 200 msec or more. Pulse cycle T1/4–direction pulse
shall be 50 msec or more.
T1
HAn
T1
4 T1
HBn
T1 T1
4 4
+ direction pulse
– direction pulse
Forward rotation Backward rotation
Reverse direction
Click point
Fig. 10.4.17 (a)

Receiver The circuit that receives signals input from the manual pulse generator
shall be configured as shown in Fig. 10.4.17 (b).
Manual pulse
generator
+5V Filter
10kW
R
Connector
–
+
C
0V Receiver’s internal 0V
circuit
Fig. 10.4.17 (b)

Input signal level change point (threshold)
When the voltage is 3.7 V or higher, the input signal level changes from
low to high.
When the voltage is 1.5 V or lower, the input signal level changes from
high to low.
248
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.18 Modules can be connected in the same way, regardless of whether you are
Connection of Basic connecting the basic module to an extension module or connecting two
extension modules. Connect the modules by using 34–pin flat cable
and Extension Modules connectors as shown in the figure below. Ensure that all 34 pins at one
end of the cable are connected to the corresponding pins at the other end;
e.g., connect the A1 pin to the pin having the same designation (A1) at
the other end.
DI/DO interface side DI/DO interface side DI/DO interface side
A1 pin mark
34–pin flat cable
34–pin flat cable
34–pin flat cable

CA52
CA55
CA52
CA53
CA52
Ventilation
slot
Basic module Extension module Extension module
DIN rail DIN rail DIN rail

mounting side mounting side mounting side
Top view
Flat cable–side connector specification:
HIF3BA–34DA–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
Module connector–side specification:
HIF3BA–34PA–2.54DS (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) or
FAP–3403–1202–0BS (Yamaichi Denki Co., Ltd.)
NOTE
Modules need to be spaced at least 32 mm apart, in which case a flat cable of about 20 mm
in length is required. To install modules further away from each other, the cable length will be
20 mm plus the extra distance. Note that the maximum length of a flat cable is 100 mm. To
ensure adequate ventilation, install the modules in such a way that the flat cables lie on top of
them. The basic module has a vent at the top (as indicated by the dotted lines in the above
figure). When connecting modules, install extension modules so that the flat cables do not
cover the vent, as shown in the above figure.
Therefore, for direct connection to the connection printed circuit board, expansion modules are
installed to the right of the basic module on the installation plane. For installation using DIN
rails or screws, expansion modules are installed to the left of the basic module on the installation
plane.
249
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.19 When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly

Module Installation (external module view and mounting diagram)
Dimensions of connector panel

printed circuit board ±0.2
Board thickness
1.6 mm
Square hole
No. 1
pin
Square
hole
I/O Link
I/O interface interface
MPG interface
(for extension
module)
Connector panel printed circuit board connector specification:

HONDA MRH–50FD (50–pin female straight connector without fitting)
NOTE
1 A connector with a fitting (HONDA MRH–50RMA) is used for the module–side I/O interface.
Always use a connector having no fitting for the connector panel printed circuit board.
2 Area where pattern printing is prohibited
: Prohibited area on soldered side
: Prohibited area on component side
250
www.plcworld.cn
When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly

(mounting and dismounting a module)
Hook
Stopper
Connector panel
Mounting the module

1. Insert the hook of the module into the square hole located at the upper part of the connector panel
2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, push the module in the direction of B , and attach the module’s
connector to the connector on the printed circuit board.
3. Push the stopper into the lower hole of the printed circuit board until it clicks into place.
Dismounting the module
1. Press the stopper C upward.
2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, pull the lower part of the module in the direction of A .
NOTE
When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and bottom surfaces.
Avoid applying force to the sides where there are slits.
251
www.plcworld.cn
When mounting a DIN rail (external module view and mounting diagram)
Mount the DIN rail here.
MPG interface
I/O Link interface
(for extension
module)
Note
I/O interface
NOTE
Recommended connector: A02B–0098–K891 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: HONDA MR–50FH solder type)
(Case: HONDA MR–50NSB angled type)
Recommended wire material: A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18, 50 pins)
252
www.plcworld.cn
When mounting a DIN rail (mounting and dismounting a module)
Hook
DIN rail
Stopper
Slotted screwdriver
Mounting the module

1. Hook the module at the upper end of the DIN rail.
2. Push the stopper into the slit located at the lower
end of the rail until it clicks into place.
Dismounting the module
1. Insert the tip of the slotted screwdriver and push
out the stopper in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
NOTE
When dismounting the module, take care not to damage the stopper by applying excessive
force with the screwdriver.
When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and bottom surfaces.
Avoid applying force to the sides where there are slits.
253
www.plcworld.cn
When mounting a module using screws (external module view and

mounting diagram)
Note
Screw
holes
I/O interface
I/O Link interface
MPG interface
(for extension module)
NOTE
Recommended connector: A02B–0098–K891 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: HONDA MR–50FH solder type)
(Case: HONDA MR–50NSB angled type)
Recommended wire material: A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18, 50 pins)
254
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.20
Other Notes
DO signal reaction to a If a system alarm occurs in a CNC using the connector panel I/O module,
system alarm or if I/O Link communication between the CNC and connector panel I/O
module fails, all the DO signals of the I/O module are turned off.
Therefore, due care must be taken when setting up the machine sequence.
Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power to the CNC or the I/O
module is turned off.
Address allocation For the connector panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
DI space map DO space map

Xm Yn Basic
Xm+1 Basic Yn+1 module
module
Xm+2 Yn+2 Extension
Xm+3 Yn+3 module 1
Extension
Xm+4 Yn+4 Extension
module 1
Xm+5 Yn+5 module 2
Xm+6 Yn+6 Extension
Extension module 3
Xm+7 Yn+7
module 2
Xm+8
Xm+9
Extension
Xm+10 module 3
Xm+11
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Extension
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG)
module 1
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 Basic
(DO alarm detection) module
The basic connector panel I/O module is allocated a group of DI addresses

(16 bytes) and a group of DO addresses (8 bytes). Up to three hardware
extension modules can be added or removed as required. The reason for
this address allocation is explained below.
The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies a DI space from Xm+12
through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed regardless of whether
extension module 2 or 3 is used, and Xm+12 through Xm+14 must be
allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG. Therefore, when
using an MPG for the i series CNC, allocate DI addresses in units of 16
bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14 for Ladder;
the CNC processes the MPG counter value directly.
DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheating
alarms that occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see the
section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.] This
address is fixed regardless of whether extension module 2 or 3 is used, and
it must be allocated as a work area before it can be used. When using this
area, therefore, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.
Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the connector panel I/O
modules freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider also the
addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep the following
in mind.
255
www.plcworld.cn
Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for FS21i/210i)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X0004 SKIP ESKIP –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
SKIP ESKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *ESP
X0009 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
The upper row indicates those signals used for the T series. Those in the
lower row are for the M series.
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0004
X0004 SKIPn and other fixed signals

X0005 Basic module
X0006
X0007
Extension
X0008 *ESP fixed signal
module 1
X0009 *DECn fixed signal
X0010
Extension
X0011
module 2
X0012
X0013
Extension The minimum configuration consists of the basic module and
X0014 extension module 1. Extension modules 2 and 3 may be added
module 3
X0015 as required. This allows fixed signals, such as SKIPn and
X0016 (for 1st MPG) *DECn, to always be used and the *ESP fixed signal to be
Extension
X0017 (for 2nd MPG) allocated to an address for which the common voltage is fixed to
module 1
X0018 (for 3rd MPG) 24 V. Also, with the I series CNC, the MPG interface provided
X0019 by extension module 1 can always be used.
Basic module
(DO alarm detection)

X0007
X0008 Basic module *ESP fixed signal
X0010
Extension
X0011 module 1
X0012
X0013
Extension
X0014 module 2
X0015
X0016 The minimum configuration consists of the basic module only.
Extension
X0017 module 3 Extension modules 1, 2, and 3 may be added as required. In
X0018 the minimum configuration, SKIP and other fixed signals and the
X0019 (for 1st MPG) MGP interface of extension module 1 cannot be used. In this
Extension case, however, the *DECn fixed signal can always be used and
X0020 (for 2nd MPG) module 1 the *ESP fixed signal can be allocated to an address for which
X0021 (for 3rd MPG)
the common voltage is fixed to 24 V in the minimum
X0022 Basic module configuration.
(DO alarm detection)
256
www.plcworld.cn
DO (output signal) alarm The DO driver of the Basic and Extension module A/B is capable of
detection detecting an overcurrent and measuring its own temperature. If an
accident, such as the connecting of the cable to ground, causes an
abnormal increase in the load current or in the driver temperature, a
protection circuit, which is provided for each DO driver (1 byte), is
activated and keeps the DO signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF state
until the cause of the problem is eliminated. Even if this occurs, the CNC
and I/O module continue operating. The DI address (Xm+15) identifies
the DO driver which has detected the alarm. The following table shows
the correspondence between the DI address (Xm+15) bits and the DO
addresses. Bit value “1” indicates that the corresponding DO driver has
detected an alarm. The contents of the Xm+15 area can be checked by
using the DGN screen of the CNC or by performing alarm processing for
the area in advance by using Ladder. This helps alarm detection and
recovery.
Alarm detection DO address Location

address and bit
Xm+15.0 Yn+0 Basic module
Xm+15.1 Yn+1 Basic module
Xm+15.2 Yn+2 Extension module 1
NOTE
This function is not supported by the 2A output module or
analog input module.
Allocation of the 2A output module and analog input module

The 2A output module and analog input module can be allocated to any
of the spaces for expansion modules 1, 2, and 3. In addition, up to three
2A output modules or analog input modules can be allocated to all the
spaces for expansion modules 1, 2, and 3. When an MPG interface is
required, the module occupies the space for expansion module 1; no 2A
output module or analog input module can be allocated in the space for
expansion module 1.
The 2A output module does not involve DI points, so that the DI area of
the space in which a 2A output module is allocated is unusable. When a
2A output module is allocated to the space for expansion module 2, for
example, the areas from Xm+6 to Xm+8 cannot be used. (The spaces for
the other modules are not shifted. In this case, the DI space of expansion
module 3 remains at Xm+9 through Xm+11.)
257
www.plcworld.cn
10.4.21 By changing the setting (rotary switch) for the expansion modules,
Distribution I/O Setting connections can be made by omitting some expansion modules as shown
below.
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Basic module
Basic module
Basic module
Expansion module 1 Expansion module 2 Expansion modules 1 and 2
is omitted. is omitted. are omitted.
Method of setting (control and method of setting the control)

As shown below, the control (rotary switch) is located on an expansion
module. To change the setting, turn the switch with a flat–bladed
screwdriver with a tip width of about 2.5 mm.
258
www.plcworld.cn
The function of the rotary switch is as follows:

Setting Actual Meaning of setting
position indication
0 0 This is the standard setting. The rotary switch is

factory–set to this position. This setting is used
when no expansion module is omitted.
1 – Set the rotary switch on an expansion module to

this position when the preceding expansion
module is omitted.
2 2 Set the rotary switch on an expansion module to

this position when the preceding two expansion
modules are omitted.
3 – This setting is prohibited.
4 to F 4, –, 6, –, 4, 8, or C has the same effect as 0.

8, –, A, –, 5, 9, or D has the same effect as 1.
C, –, E, –, 6, A, or E has the same effect as 2.
7, B, or F has the same effect as 3. (This setting,
however, is prohibited.)
259
www.plcworld.cn
Examples of setting
(When expansion module 1 is omitted)

On expansion module 2, set the rotary
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
switch to setting position 1. On expan-
sion module 3, keep the rotary switch
Basic module
set to setting position 0.
(When expansion module 2 is omitted)

Expansion module 1 On expansion module 3, set the rotary
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
switch to setting position 1. On expan-
sion module 1, keep the rotary switch
Basic module
set to setting position 0.
(When expansion modules 1 and 2

are omitted)
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
On expansion module 3, set the rotary

switch to setting position 2.
Basic module
NOTE
1 Expansion module A (DI/DO = 24/16, with manual pulse
interface) (A03B–0815–C002) is fitted with an additional
rotary switch as other types of modules are modified.
However, expansion module A is always mounted at the
location of expansion module 1, so that its factory setting
need not be changed.
2 This feature was added in the middle. The expansion
modules shipped before August 1998 are not provided with
this feature.
260
www.plcworld.cn
10.5
CONNECTION OF
OPERATOR’S PANEL
I/O MODULE
(FOR MATRIX INPUT)
10.5.1
Overall Connection
Diagram
CNC
I/O UNIT
JD1B
I/O Link
JD1A
JD1B
JD1A
CE53
MPG JA3 Machine operator’s panel
MPG
MPG
CE54
+24 V power supply CPD1(IN)
+24 V power supply CPD1(OUT)
NOTE
The MPG can be connected to this operator’s panel I/O module only when the i series CNC
is used. When the operator’s panel I/O module is used together with a unit (connector panel
I/O module) connected to the I/O Link supporting another MPG interface, only the MPG
interface of the unit (module) closest to the CNC connected to the I/O Link is enabled. The
following screw type connectors, newly incorporated into the i series main board, cannot be
used to connect the I/O Link or MPG.
261
www.plcworld.cn
Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side

Specification Manufacturer
Connector FI–20–CV7 Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Connector case and FI30–20S–CV7 Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.

connector
10.5.2 Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the power
Power Connection necessary for printed circuit board operation and that for DI operation.
To facilitate power division, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT) exactly
as it is input from CPD1 (IN). When power division is required, use
CPD1 (OUT).
CPD1(IN)
01 +24V
24 V power
supply 02 0V
03
CPD1(OUT)
01 +24V
24 V power
supply 02 0V
03
Recommended cable–side connector:

A02B–0120–K324
(including the following connector housing and case)
(Housing: Japan AMP 1–178288–3)
(Contacts: Japan AMP 1–175218–5)
NOTE
The specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN)
is the same as that for CPD1 (OUT). There are no
indications on the printed circuit board to distinguish
between the IN and OUT connectors. Do not turn off the
+24 V supply to the connector during operation. Turning off
the +24 V supply will cause a CNC communication alarm.
When turning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O
module must be turned on before or at the same time as the
power supply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the
+24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned off after or
at the same time as the power supply to the CNC.
262
www.plcworld.cn
10.5.3
DI/DO Connector Pin
CE53 CE54
Arrangement
A B A B
01 0V 0V 01 0V 0V
02 N.C. +24V 02 COM1 +24V
03 Xm+0.0 Xm+0.1 03 Xm+1.0 Xm+1.1
04 Xm+0.2 Xm+0.3 04 Xm+1.2 Xm+1.3
05 Xm+0.4 Xm+0.5 05 Xm+1.4 Xm+1.5
06 Xm+0.6 Xm+0.7 06 Xm+1.6 Xm+1.7
07 Yn+0.0 Yn+0.1 07 Yn+3.0 Yn+3.1
08 Yn+0.2 Yn+0.3 08 Yn+3.2 Yn+3.3
09 Yn+0.4 Yn+0.5 09 Yn+3.4 Yn+3.5
10 Yn+0.6 Yn+0.7 10 Yn+3.6 Yn+3.7
11 Yn+1.0 Yn+1.1 11 Yn+4.0 Yn+4.1
12 Yn+1.2 Yn+1.3 12 Yn+4.2 Yn+4.3
13 Yn+1.4 Yn+1.5 13 Yn+4.4 Yn+4.5
14 Yn+1.6 Yn+1.7 14 Yn+4.6 Yn+4.7
15 Yn+2.0 Yn+2.1 15 Yn+5.0 Yn+5.1
16 Yn+2.2 Yn+2.3 16 Yn+5.2 Yn+5.3
17 Yn+2.4 Yn+2.5 17 Yn+5.4 Yn+5.5
18 Yn+2.6 Yn+2.7 18 Yn+5.6 Yn+5.7
19 KYD0 KYD1 19 Yn+6.0 Yn+6.1
20 KYD2 KYD3 20 Yn+6.2 Yn+6.3
21 KYD4 KYD5 21 Yn+6.4 Yn+6.5
22 KYD6 KYD7 22 Yn+6.6 Yn+6.7
23 KCM1 KCM2 23 KCM5 KCM6
24 KCM3 KCM4 24 KCM7 DOCOM
25 DOCOM DOCOM 25 DOCOM DOCOM

A02B–0120–K342
(HIFBB–50D–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
50 contacts
Cable material specification:
A02B–0120–K886
(61–meter, 50–pin cable
(Hitachi Cable, Ltd. or Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.))
263
www.plcworld.cn
10.5.4
DI (General–purpose
Input Signal) Pin number
Connection Address number CE53(B02)
+24V
Bit number CE54(B02)
Xm+0.0 CE53(A03)
RV
Xm+0.1 CE53(B03)
RV
Xm+0.2 CE53(A04)
RV
Xm+0.3 CE53(B04)
RV
Xm+0.4 CE53(A05)
RV
Xm+0.5 CE53(B05)
RV
Xm+0.6 CE53(A06)
RV
Xm+0.7 CE53(B06)
RV
Xm+1.0 CE54(A03)
RV
Xm+1.1 CE54(B03)
RV
Xm+1.2 CE54(A04)
RV
Xm+1.3 CE54(B04)
RV
Xm+1.4 CE54(A05)
RV
Xm+1.5 CE54(B05)
RV
Xm+1.6 CE54(A06)
RV
Xm+1.7 CE54(B06)
RV
COM1 CE54(A02)
CE53(A01),(B01),
CE54(A01),(B01)
264
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
Xm+1.0 through Xm+1.7 are DI pins for which a common
voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the COM1
CE54(A02) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can
be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable
is connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting
an ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring, the
connection of the COM1 CE54(A02) pin to the 0 V power
supply is recommended whereever possible.
For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to be
allocated to an appropriate bit of the addresses for which
the common voltage is fixed, ranging from Xm+0.0 to
Xm+0.7. See “Address allocation” in Section 9.5.10 for
details of how to allocate the emergency stop signal.
For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which the
common voltage is fixed (from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7), the logic
is fixed to “0”. For unused pins allocated to Xm+1.0 to
Xm+1.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the
logic is fixed to “0” when the COM1 CE54(A02) pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply. When the COM1
CE54(A02) pin is connected to the +24 V power supply, the
logic is fixed to “1”. The logic of the unused pins allocated
to Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 is variable when the contact of the
COM1 CE54(A02) pin is open.
265
www.plcworld.cn
10.5.5 d A maximum of 56 points are provided.

DI (Matrix Input Signal)
Connection
*KCM1 CE53(A23) Xn+4.0 Xn+4.1 Xn+4.2 Xn+4.3 Xn+4.4 Xn+4.5 Xn+4.6 Xn+4.7
CE53(B23) Xn+5.0 Xn+5.1 Xn+5.2 Xn+5.3 Xn+5.4 Xn+5.5 Xn+5.6 Xn+5.7

*KCM2
CE53(A24) Xn+6.0 Xn+6.1 Xn+6.2 Xn+6.3 Xn+6.4 Xn+6.5 Xn+6.6 Xn+6.7
*KCM3
*KCM4
*KCM5
*KCM6
*KCM7
CE53(A19)
*KYD0
CE53(B19)
*KYD1
CE53(A20)
*KYD2
CE53(B20)
*KYD3
CE53(A21)
*KYD4
CE53(B21)
*KYD5
CE53(A22)
*KYD6
CE53(B22)
*KYD7
NOTE
Detour prevention diodes must be incorporated for matrix
signal input, as shown in the following figure. Otherwise,
only two signals can be input at the same time. Inputting
three or more signals simultaneously without using detour
prevention diodes may result in data input errors.
*KCMn
*KYDn
266
www.plcworld.cn
10.5.6 d A maximum of 56 points are provided.

DO (Output Signal)
Connection
Pin number
CE53(A25,B25)
DOCOM
CE54(A25,B24,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V 0V
Yn+0.0 CE53(A07)
Relay
DV
Yn+0.1 CE53(B07)
DV
Yn+0.2 CE53(A08)
DV
Yn+0.3 CE53(B08)
DV
Yn+0.4 CE53(A09)
DV
Yn+0.5 CE53(B09)
DV
Yn+0.6 CE53(A10)
DV
Yn+0.7 CE53(B10)
DV
Yn+1.0 CE53(A11)
DV
Yn+1.1 CE53(B11)
DV
Yn+1.2 CE53(A12)
DV
Yn+1.3 CE53(B12)
DV
Yn+1.4 CE53(A13)
DV
Yn+1.5 CE53(B13)
DV
Yn+1.6 CE53(A14)
DV
Yn+1.7 CE53(B14)
DV
CE53(A01,B01)
CE54(A01,B01)
267
www.plcworld.cn
Pin number
CE53(A25,B25)
DOCOM
CE54(A25,B24,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V 0V
Yn+2.0 CE53(A15)
Relay
DV
Yn+2.1 CE53(B15)
DV
Yn+2.2 CE53(A16)
DV
Yn+2.3 CE53(B16)
DV
Yn+2.4 CE53(A17)
DV
Yn+2.5 CE53(B17)
DV
Yn+2.6 CE53(A18)
DV
Yn+2.7 CE53(B18)
DV
Yn+3.0 CE54(A07)
DV
Yn+3.1 CE54(B07)
DV
Yn+3.2 CE54(A08)
DV
Yn+3.3 CE54(B08)
DV
Yn+3.4 CE54(A09)
DV
Yn+3.5 CE54(B09)
DV
Yn+3.6 CE54(A10)
DV
Yn+3.7 CE54(B10)
DV
CE53(A01,B01)
CE54(A01,B01)
268
www.plcworld.cn
Pin number
CE53(A25,B25)
DOCOM
CE54(A25,B24,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V 0V
Yn+4.0 CE54(A11)
Relay
DV
Yn+4.1 CE54(B11)
DV
Yn+4.2 CE54(A12)
DV
Yn+4.3 CE54(B12)
DV
Yn+4.4 CE54(A13)
DV
Yn+4.5 CE54(B13)
DV
Yn+4.6 CE54(A14)
DV
Yn+4.7 CE54(B14)
DV
Yn+5.0 CE54(A15)
DV
Yn+5.1 CE54(B15)
DV
Yn+5.2 CE54(A16)
DV
Yn+5.3 CE54(B16)
DV
Yn+5.4 CE54(A17)
DV
Yn+5.5 CE54(B17)
DV
Yn+5.6 CE54(A18)
DV
Yn+5.7 CE54(B18)
DV
CE53(A01,B01)
CE54(A01,B01)
269
www.plcworld.cn
Pin number
CE53(A25,B25)
DOCOM
CE54(A25,B24,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V 0V
Yn+6.0 CE54(A19)
Relay
DV
Yn+6.1 CE54(B19)
DV
Yn+6.2 CE54(A20)
DV
Yn+6.3 CE54(B20)
DV
Yn+6.4 CE54(A21)
DV
Yn+6.5 CE54(B21)
DV
Yn+6.6 CE54(A22)
DV
Yn+6.7 CE54(B22)
DV
CE53(A01,B01)
CE54(A01,B01)
10.5.7 For details of the connection of the manual pulse generator, see Section
Manual Pulse 10.4.15.
270
www.plcworld.cn
10.5.8
External View
24 V power supply connection

Manual pulse generator connection
I/O Link signal connection
Machine operator’s panel DI/DO interface
Note) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear
Note face of the printed circuit board. Ensure that printed circuit
boards are spaced 5 mm or more from one another to prevent
interference.
: Polarity guide
: A1 pin mark
Rear mounting area

(Perspective drawing
viewed from the front)
271
www.plcworld.cn
10.5.9 Installation specifications

Specifications Ambient temperature During operation 0°C to 58°C
During storage and transportation –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change Max. 1.1°C/min.
Relative humidity Normal : 75% or less

Short term (1 month or less) : 95% or less
Vibration During operation : 0.5 G or less
Environment Ordinary machining factory environment

(Special consideration is required when installing the
module in a dusty location or where highly concen-
trated cutting lubricant or organic solvent is used.)
Other requirements (1) Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
Ordering specifications
Item Specification Remarks
Operator’s panel I/O A20B–2002–0470 General–purpose DI: 16 points

module Matrix DI: 56 points
DO: 56 points
MPG interface is supported.
Fuse A03B–0815–K001 1A
(replacement part)
Module specifications
General–purpose DI 16 points 24–V input
Matrix DI 56 points (8 7) 5–V input
DO points 56 points 24 V source type output
CNC interface FANUC I/O Link Up to 16 modules can be

connection connected as CNC slaves. Or, a
maximum of 1024 points can be
supported on both the input and
output sides.
MPG interface Max. 3 units MPG interface can be used only

for the i series CNC.
Power supply rating

Module Supply voltage Current rating Remarks
Operator’s panel 24 VDC "10% supplied 0.35A The total power

I/O module from the power supply consumption of
connector CPD1. The DI points is
allowance of "10% included.
should include The power
instantaneous voltage consumption of
and ripple voltage. DO points is not
included.
272
www.plcworld.cn
DI (input signal) specifications

(General–purpose input signal)
Open circuit intercontact 1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)

leakage current
Closed circuit intercontact 2 V or less

voltage drop (including cable voltage drop)
Delay Receiver delay: Max. 2 ms

The time required for I/O Link transmission
between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2 ms +
CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be taken into
account.
(Matrix input signal)

Open circuit intercontact 0.2 mA or less (at 26 V)

leakage current
Closed circuit intercontact 0.9 V or less (with a current of 1 mA)

voltage drop
Delay The maximum matrix period of 16 ms, the

maximum time of I/O Link transfer between CNC
and I/O module of 2 ms, and the ladder scanning
period (by CNC) must be considered.
NOTE
When detour prevention diodes are used, the voltage drop
across closed contacts indicated above must be
maintained, including the diode voltage drop.
DO (output signal) specifications

Maximum load current in ON state 200 mA or less
(including momentary current)
Saturation voltage in ON state Max. 1 V (when load current is 200 mA)
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less

(including momentary values)
Leakage current in OFF state 20 mA or less
Delay Driver delay: Max. 50 ms

The time required for I/O Link transmission
between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2
ms + CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be
taken into account.
NOTE
Ensure that the maximum current per DOCOM pin (DO
power supply pin) does not exceed 0.7 A.
273
www.plcworld.cn
10.5.10
Other Notes
DO signal reaction to a If a system alarm occurs in the CNC using the operator’s panel I/O
system alarm module, or if I/O Link communication between the CNC and operator’s
panel I/O module fails, all the DO signals of the I/O module are turned
off. Therefore, sufficient care is necessary when setting up the machine
sequence. Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power to the CNC
or the I/O module is turned off.
Address allocation For the operator’s panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.

Xm General–purpose Yn
Xm+1 input signal Yn+1
Xm+2 Yn+2
Reserved Output signal
Xm+3 Yn+3
Xm+4 Yn+4
Xm+5 Yn+5
Xm+6 Yn+6
Matrix input
Xm+7 signal Yn+7 Reserved
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11 Reserved
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG) MPG
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 (DO alarm DO alarm
detection) detection
The operator’s panel I/O module is allocated a group of DI addresses (16

bytes) and a group of DO addresses (8 bytes). This address allocation is
explained below.
The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies DI space from Xm+12
through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed, and Xm+12 through Xm+14
must be allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG.
Therefore, when using an MPG for the I series CNC, allocate DI addresses
in units of 16 bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14
for Ladder; the CNC processes the MPG counter value directly.
alarms that may occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see
the section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.] This
address is fixed, and must be allocated as a work area before it can be used.
Therefore, when using this area, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.
Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the operator’s panel I/O
module freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider also the
fixed addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep the
following in mind.
274
www.plcworld.cn
Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for FS21i/210i)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SKIP ESKIP –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE
X0004 SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *ESP
X0008 General–purpose *ESP fixed signal

input signal
X0010
Reserved
X0011
X0012
X0013
X0014
X0015 Matrix input
signal
X0016
X0017
X0018
X0019 Reserved Although fixed signals such as SKIP cannot be used,
X0020(for 1st MPG)
allocating DI addresses starting from X0008 allows the *DECn
signal to be used and the *ESP fixed signal to be allocated to
X0021(for 2nd MPG) MPG an address for which the common voltage is fixed to 24 V.
X0022(for 3rd MPG) (Fixed signals cannot be allocated to the for the matrix input
X0023(DO alarm DO alarm signals.)
Turning the DO (output All the DO signals can be turned off simultaneously by turning off
signal) power on and off (opening) the DO (output signal) power supply pin “DOCOM”. Doing
(DOCOM) so causes the DO signal status to change as shown below.
ON
DOCOM OFF
When DO is ON in ON
the sequence OFF
When DO is OFF
ON
in the sequence
OFF
275
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
When the DO signal is in the ON state in the sequence, the
ON or OFF state of the DOCOM pin determines the state of
the signal, as indicated by the dotted lines in the above
figure. Do not turn off the +24 V supply, provided by the
CPD1 to the I/O module, during the operation. Turning off
the +24 V supply would cause a CNC communication alarm.
Parallel DO (output The DO load current can be doubled by connecting two DO points in
signal) connection parallel and turning them on and off simultaneously in sequence, as
shown in the figure below. The maximum load current per DI point is 200
mA. Connecting two DO points in parallel and turning them on at the
same time produces a current of 400 mA. Note that, however, when two
DO points are connected in parallel, the leakage current also doubles
while they are off (max. 40 mA).
CE53(A25), (B25)
DOCOM CE54(B24), (A25), (B25)
+24V 0V
+24 stabilized power supply
Relay
DV
DV
276
www.plcworld.cn
DO (output signal) alarm The DO driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting an overcurrent
detection and measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such as connecting the
cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in the load current or in the
driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided for each DO
driver (1 byte), is activated which keeps the DO signal for the relevant 1
byte in the OFF state until the cause of the problem is eliminated. Even
if this occurs, the CNC and the I/O module continue operating. The DI
address (Xm+15) identifies which DO driver has detected an alarm. The
following table shows the correspondence between the DI address
(Xm+15) bits and the DO addresses. Bit value “1” indicates that the
corresponding DO driver has detected an alarm. The contents of the
Xm+15 area can be checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC or by
performing the alarm processing for the area in advance by using Ladder.
This helps alarm detection and recovery.
Alarm detection address
DO address Remarks
and bit
Xm+15.0 Yn+0
Xm+15.1 Yn+1
Xm+15.2 Yn+2
Xm+15.3 Yn+3
Xm+15.4 Yn+4
Xm+15.5 Yn+5
Xm+15.6 Yn+6
Xm+15.7 Yn+7 Reserved
277
www.plcworld.cn
10.6 The difference between the operator’s panel I/O module and the power
magnetics cabinet I/O module lies in whether an interface to a manual
CONNECTION OF pulse generator is provided. The power magnetics cabinet does not
OPERATOR’S PANEL provide an interface to a manual pulse generator.
I/O MODULE AND
POWER MAGNETICS
CABINET I/O
MODULE
10.6.1
Overall Connection
Diagram
CNC
I/O UNIT
JD1B
I/O LINK
JD1A
JD1B
JD1A
CE56
MPG JA3
MPG
MPG
CE57
Power
+24V CPD1(IN)
supply
Power
+24V CPD1(OUT)
supply
278
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
The MPG can be connected to this operator’s panel I/O module only when the i series CNC
is used. When the operator’s panel I/O module is used together with a unit (connector panel
I/O module) connected to the I/O Link supporting another MPG interface, only the MPG
interface of the unit (module) closest to the CNC connected to the I/O Link is enabled. The
following screw type connectors, newly incorporated into the i series main board, cannot be
used to connect the I/O Link or MPG.

Connector FI–20–CV7 Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Connector case and connector FI30–20S–CV7 Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
10.6.2 Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the power
Power Connection necessary for the printed circuit board operation and that for DI operation.
To facilitate power division, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT) exactly
as it is input from CPD1 (IN). When power division is required, use
CPD1 (OUT).
CPD1(IN)
01 +24V
24 V power
supply 02 0V
03
CPD1(OUT)
01 +24V
24 V power
supply 02 0V
03
Recommended cable–side connector: A02B–0120–K324

(including the following connector housing and case)
(Housing: Japan AMP 1–178288–3)
(Contacts: Japan AMP 1–175218–5)
279
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
The specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN)
is the same as that for CPD1 (OUT). There are no
indications on the printed circuit board to distinguish
between the IN and OUT connectors. Do not turn off the +24
V supply to the connector during operation. Turning off the
+24 V supply will cause a CNC communication alarm.
10.6.3
DI/DO Connector Pin
CE56 CE57
Arrangement
A B A B
01 0V +24V 01 0V +24V
02 Xm+0.0 Xm+0.1 02 Xm+3.0 Xm+3.1
03 Xm+0.2 Xm+0.3 03 Xm+3.2 Xm+3.3
04 Xm+0.4 Xm+0.5 04 Xm+3.4 Xm+3.5
05 Xm+0.6 Xm+0.7 05 Xm+3.6 Xm+3.7
06 Xm+1.0 Xm+1.1 06 Xm+4.0 Xm+4.1
07 Xm+1.2 Xm+1.3 07 Xm+4.2 Xm+4.3
08 Xm+1.4 Xm+1.5 08 Xm+4.4 Xm+4.5
09 Xm+1.6 Xm+1.7 09 Xm+4.6 Xm+4.7
10 Xm+2.0 Xm+2.1 10 Xm+5.0 Xm+5.1
11 Xm+2.2 Xm+2.3 11 Xm+5.2 Xm+5.3
12 Xm+2.4 Xm+2.5 12 Xm+5.4 Xm+5.5
13 Xm+2.6 Xm+2.7 13 Xm+5.6 Xm+5.7
14 DICOM0 14 DICOM5
15 15
16 Yn+0.0 Yn+0.1 16 Yn+2.0 Yn+2.1
17 Yn+0.2 Yn+0.3 17 Yn+2.2 Yn+2.3
18 Yn+0.4 Yn+0.5 18 Yn+2.4 Yn+2.5
19 Yn+0.6 Yn+0.7 19 Yn+2.6 Yn+2.7
20 Yn+1.0 Yn+1.1 20 Yn+3.0 Yn+3.1
21 Yn+1.2 Yn+1.3 21 Yn+3.2 Yn+3.3
22 Yn+1.4 Yn+1.5 22 Yn+3.4 Yn+3.5
23 Yn+1.6 Yn+1.7 23 Yn+3.6 Yn+3.7

A02B–0120–K342
(HIF3BB–50D–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
50 contacts
Cable material specification:
A02B–0120–K886
(61–meter, 50–pin cable
(Hitachi Cable, Ltd. or Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.))
280
www.plcworld.cn
10.6.4
DI (General–purpose
Input Signal)
Connection
Pin number
Address number CE56(B01)
Bit number +24V
CE57(B01)
Xm+0.0 CE56(A02)
RV
Xm+0.1 CE56(B02)
RV
Xm+0.2 CE56(A03)
RV
Xm+0.3 CE56(B03)
RV
Xm+0.4 CE56(A04)
RV
Xm+0.5 CE56(B04)
RV
Xm+0.6 CE56(A05)
RV
Xm+0.7 CE56(B05)
RV
DICOM0 CE56(A14)
CE56(A01)
CE57(A01)
Xm+1.0 CE56(A06)
RV
Xm+1.1 CE56(B06)
RV
Xm+1.2 CE56(A07)
RV
Xm+1.3 CE56(B07)
RV
Xm+1.4 CE56(A08)
RV
Xm+1.5 CE56(B08)
RV
Xm+1.6 CE56(A09)
RV
Xm+1.7 CE56(B09)
RV
281
www.plcworld.cn
Pin number
Bit number +24V
CE57(B01)
Xm+2.0 CE56(A10)
RV
Xm+2.1 CE56(B10)
RV
Xm+2.2 CE56(A11)
RV
Xm+2.3 CE56(B11)
RV
Xm+2.4 CE56(A12)
RV
Xm+2.5 CE56(B12)
RV
Xm+2.6 CE56(A13)
RV
Xm+2.7 CE56(B13)
RV
Xm+3.0 CE57(A02)
RV
Xm+3.1 CE57(B02)
RV
Xm+3.2 CE57(A03)
RV
Xm+3.3 CE57(B03)
RV
Xm+3.4 CE57(A04)
RV
Xm+3.5 CE57(B04)
RV
Xm+3.6 CE57(A05)
RV
Xm+3.7 CE57(B05)
RV
282
www.plcworld.cn
Pin number
Bit number +24V
CE57(B01)
Xm+4.0 CE57(A06)
RV
Xm+4.1 CE57(B06)
RV
Xm+4.2 CE57(A07)
RV
Xm+4.3 CE57(B07)
RV
Xm+4.4 CE57(A08)
RV
Xm+4.5 CE57(B08)
RV
Xm+4.6 CE57(A09)
RV
Xm+4.7 CE57(B09)
RV
Xm+5.0 CE57(A10)
RV
Xm+5.1 CE57(B10)
RV
Xm+5.2 CE57(A11)
RV
Xm+5.3 CE57(B11)
RV
Xm+5.4 CE57(A12)
RV
Xm+5.5 CE57(B12)
RV
Xm+5.6 CE57(A13)
RV
Xm+5.7 CE57(B13)
RV
DICOM5 CE57(B14)
CE56(A01)
CE57(A01)
283
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 and Xm+5.0 through Xm+5.7 are
DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected. That
is, by connecting the DICOM0 CE56(A14) or DICOM5
CE57(B14) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can
be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable
is connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting
an ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring, the
connection of the DICOM0 CE56(A14) and DICOM5
CE57(B14) pins to the 0 V power supply is recommended
whereever possible.
For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to be
allocated to an appropriate bit of the addresses for which
the common voltage is fixed. See “Address allocation” in
Section 9.6.9 for details of how to allocate the emergency
stop signal.
For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which the
common voltage is fixed, the logic is fixed to “0”. For unused
pins allocated to the addresses for which the common
voltage can be selected, the logic is fixed to “0” when the
DICOM0 CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply. When the DICOM0
CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin is connected to the
+24 V power supply, the logic is fixed to “1”. The logic of the
unused pins is variable when the contacts of the DICOM0
CE56(A14) and DICOM5 CE57(B14) pins are open.
284
www.plcworld.cn
10.6.5
DO (Output Signal)
Connection
Pin number
CE56(A24,B24,A25,B25)
DOCOM
CE57(A24,B24,A25,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V 0V
Yn+0.0 CE56(A16)
Relay
DV
Yn+0.1 CE56(B16)
DV
Yn+0.2 CE56(A17)
DV
Yn+0.3 CE56(B17)
DV
Yn+0.4 CE56(A18)
DV
Yn+0.5 CE56(B18)
DV
Yn+0.6 CE56(A19)
DV
Yn+0.7 CE56(B19)
DV
Yn+1.0 CE56(A20)
DV
Yn+1.1 CE56(B20)
DV
Yn+1.2 CE56(A21)
DV
Yn+1.3 CE56(B21)
DV
Yn+1.4 CE56(A22)
DV
Yn+1.5 CE56(B22)
DV
Yn+1.6 CE56(A23)
DV
Yn+1.7 CE56(B23)
DV
CE56(A01)
CE57(A01)
285
www.plcworld.cn
Pin number
CE56(A24,B24,A25,B25)
DOCOM
CE57(A24,B24,A25,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V 0V
Yn+2.0 CE57(A16)
Relay
DV
Yn+2.1 CE57(B16)
DV
Yn+2.2 CE57(A17)
DV
Yn+2.3 CE57(B17)
DV
Yn+2.4 CE57(A18)
DV
Yn+2.5 CE57(B18)
DV
Yn+2.6 CE57(A19)
DV
Yn+2.7 CE57(B19)
DV
Yn+3.0 CE57(A20)
DV
Yn+3.1 CE57(B20)
DV
Yn+3.2 CE57(A21)
DV
Yn+3.3 CE57(B21)
DV
Yn+3.4 CE57(A22)
DV
Yn+3.5 CE57(B22)
DV
Yn+3.6 CE57(A23)
DV
Yn+3.7 CE57(B23)
DV
CE56(A01)
CE57(A01)
286
www.plcworld.cn
10.6.6 For details of the connection of the manual pulse generator, see Section
Manual Pulse 10.4.15.
10.6.7
External View
24 V power supply connection

Manual pulse generator connection
I/O Link signal connection
Machine operator’s panel DI/DO interface
Note) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear
Note face of the printed circuit board. Ensure that the printed circuit
boards are spaced 5 mm or more from one another to prevent
interference.
: Polarity guide
: A1 pin mark
Rear mounting area

(Perspective drawing
viewed from the front)
287
www.plcworld.cn
10.6.8 Installation specifications

Specifications Ambient temperature During operation 0° to 58°C
During storage and transportation –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change Max. 1.1°C/min.
Relative humidity Normal: 75% or less

Short term (1 month or less): 95% or less
Vibration During operation: 0.5 G or less
Environment Ordinary machining factory environment (Special

consideration is required when installing the module in
a dusty place or where highly concentrated cutting
lubricant or organic solvent is used.)
Other requirements (1) Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
Ordering specifications
Operator’s panel A20B–2002–0520 DI: 48 points

I/O module DO: 32 points
(with MPG interface) MPG interface is supported.
Power magnetics panel A20B–2002–0521 DI: 48 points

I/O module DO: 32 points
(without MPG interface) MPG interface is not
supported.
Fuse (replacement part) A03B–0815–K001 1A
Module specifications
DI points 48 points 24 V input
DO points 32 points 24 V source type output
CNC interface FANUC I/O Link Up to 16 modules can be

connection connected as CNC slaves.
Or, a maximum of 1024 points
can be supported on both the
input and output sides.
MPG interface Max. 3 units MPG interface can be used

only for the i series CNC.
288
www.plcworld.cn
Power supply rating

Power supply
Module Supply voltage Remarks
rating
Operator’s 24 VDC ±10% is 0.3 A+7.3 mA×DI DI = number of DI

panel I/O supplied from points in the ON
module power supply state
connector CPD1.
The tolerance of
±10% includes
momentary and
ripple currents.
DI (input signal) specifications

(general–purpose input signal)
Open circuit intercontact leakage 1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)

current
Closed circuit intercontact voltage 2 V or less

drop (including cable voltage drop)
Delay Receiver delay: Max. 2 ms

The time required for I/O Link
transmission between the CNC and I/O
module (max. 2 ms + CNC ladder scan
cycle) must also be taken into account.
DO (output signal) specifications

Maximum load current in ON state 200 mA or less
(including momentary current)
Saturation voltage in ON state Max. 1 V

(when load current is 200 mA)
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less

(including momentary values)
Leakage current in OFF state 20 mA or less
Delay Driver delay: Max. 50 ms

The time for I/O Link transmission
between the CNC and I/O module (max.
2 ms + CNC ladder scan cycle) must
also be taken into account.
NOTE
Ensure that the maximum current per DOCOM pin (DO
power supply pin) does not exceed 0.7 A.
289
www.plcworld.cn
10.6.9
Other Notes
DO signal reaction to a If a system alarm occurs in a CNC using this 48/32–point I/O module, or
system alarm if I/O Link communication between the CNC and operator’s panel I/O
module fails, all the DO signals of the I/O module are turned off.
Therefore, due care must be taken when setting up the machine sequence.
Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power of the CNC or the I/O
module is turned off.
Address allocation For the operator’s panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.

Xm Yn
Xm+1 Yn+1
Output signal
Xm+2 Yn+2
Input signal
Xm+3 Yn+3
Xm+4
Xm+5
Xm+6
Xm+7
Xm+8 Not used
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG) MPG
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 (DO alarm DO alarm
Basically, this 48/32–point I/O module is allocated a group of DI

addresses (16 bytes) and a group of DO addresses (4 bytes). This address
allocation is explained below.
The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies DI space from Xm+12
through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed, and Xm+12 through Xm+14
must be allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG.
Therefore, when using an MPG for the i series CNC, allocate DI addresses
in units of 16 bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14
for Ladder; the CNC processes the MPG counter value directly.
alarms that occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see the
section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.] This
address is fixed, and must be allocated as a work area before it can be used.
When using this area, therefore, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.
Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the 48/32–point I/O module
freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider also the fixed
addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep the following
in mind.
290
www.plcworld.cn
Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for FS21i)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SKIP ESKIP –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE
X0004 SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *ESP

X0004
X0005
X0006
X0007 Input signal
X0008 *ESP fixed signal
X0010
X0011
X0012
Not used
X0013
X0014
X0015
X0016 (for 1st MPG) Allocating DI addresses from X0004 allows the fixed signals,
X0017 (for 2nd MPG) MPG such as SKIP and *DECn, to be used and the *ESP fixed
X0018 (for 3rd MPG) signal to be allocated to an address for which the common
X0019 (DO alarm
voltage in fixed to 24 V.
DO alarm
Turning the DO (output All the DO signals can be turned off simultaneously by turning off
signal) power on and off (opening) the DO (output signal) power supply pin “DOCOM”. Doing
(DOCOM) so causes the DO signal status to change as shown below.
ON
DOCOM OFF
When DO is ON in ON
the sequence OFF
When DO is OFF
ON
in the sequence
OFF
291
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
When the DO signal is in the ON state in the sequence, the
ON or OFF state of the DOCOM pin determines the state of
the signal, as shown within dotted lines in the above figure.
Do not turn off the +24 V supply provided by the CPD1 to the
I/O module during the operation. Turning off the +24 V
supply causes a CNC communication alarm. When turning
on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O module must be
turned on before or at the same time as the power supply
to the CNC. When turning off the power, the +24 V supply
to the I/O module must be turned off after or at the same time
as the power supply to the CNC.
Parallel DO (output The DO load current can be doubled by connecting two DO points in
signal) connection parallel and turning them on and off simultaneously in sequence, as
shown in the figure below. The maximum load current per DI point is 200
mA. Connecting two DO points in parallel and turning them on at the
same time produces a current of 400 mA. Note that, however, when two
DO points are connected in parallel, the leakage current also doubles
when they are off (max. 40 mA).
CE56(A24, B24, A25, B25)

DOCOM CE57(A24, B24, A25, B25)
+24V 0V
+24 stabilized
power supply
Relay
DV
DV
292
www.plcworld.cn
DO (output signal) alarm The DO driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting an overcurrent
detection and measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such as the connecting
of the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in the load current or
in the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided for each
DO driver (1 byte), is activated and keeps the DO signal for the relevant
1 byte in the OFF state until the cause of the problem is eliminated. Even
if this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continue operating. The DI
address (Xm+15) identifies the DO driver which has detected the alarm.
The following table shows the correspondence between the DI address
(Xm+15) bits and the DO addresses. Bit value “1” indicates that the
corresponding DO driver has detected an alarm. The contents of the
Xm+15 area can be checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC or by
performing alarm processing for the area in advance by using Ladder.
This helps alarm detection and recovery.
Alarm detection address
DO address Remarks
and bit
Xm+15.0 Yn+0
Xm+15.1 Yn+1
Xm+15.2 Yn+2
Xm+15.3 Yn+3
293
www.plcworld.cn
10.7 The machine operator’s panel interface unit (A16B–2201–0110) is

connected to the control unit through the I/O Link and is used for
CONNECTION OF interfacing with the machine operator’s panel.
MACHINE It features interfaces with matrix key switches, LEDs and manual pulse
OPERATOR’S PANEL generators.
INTERFACE UNIT
Machine operator’s
panel I/F unit FANUC I/O Link
Control unit

(supplied by a machine tool
builder)
10.7.1
Function Overview
Number of DI/DO points

Operator’s panel control PCB
allocation to the I/O Link DI/DO = 128/128 DI/DO = 256/256
DI/DO
(module name)
DI DO DI DO
(OC02I) (OC02O) (OC03I) (OC03O)
DI or DO
Number of matrix key switch inputs 64 96
Number of matrix LED data outputs 64 64
Number of general–purpose switch 32 32

inputs
Number of general–purpose LED data 32 32

outputs
Number of total DI/DO points 96 96 128 96
D Matrix key switch inputs (matrix DI)

Ninety–six DI points are provided by a matrix of twelve common
signals times eight data signals. Note that I/O Link allocation may
limit the number of usable key switch inputs.
D Matrix LED data outputs (matrix DO)
Sixty–four DO points are provided by a matrix of eight common
signals times eight data signals.
D General–purpose switch inputs (general–purpose DI)
Each general–purpose DI point has an individual interface.
D General–purpose LED data outputs (general–purpose DO)
Each general–purpose DO point has an individual interface.
294
www.plcworld.cn
Analog signal inputs D Two inputs (input voltage: 0 to +10 V)

D Input voltages are converted from analog to digital. The resulting five
bits of data are sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.
D The analog signal input function can be used regardless of whether I/O
Link allocation is 128/128 or 256/256.
Terminal for signal D Emergency stop and OT release signals are forwarded without change
forwarding to the power magnetics cabinet.
D Power ON/OFF control signals are forwarded without change to an
input unit.
D Analog signal inputs described in item “Analog signal inputs” can be
sent out without being changed.
First manual pulse Pulse information from the manual pulse generator is transferred via an
generator I/O Link.
When this unit is used together with a unit (connector panel I/O module)
connected to the I/O Link supporting another MPG interface, only the
MPG interface of the unit (module) closest to the CNC connected to the
I/O Link is valid.
295
www.plcworld.cn
10.7.2
System Configuration
CNC Machine operator’s panel Machine operator’s

interface unit panel
Note 2
FANUC JD1B CM26 Matrix DI/DO
I/O Link (I/O Link)
*ESP, OTR, and
general–purpose
JD1A CM15
DI/DO
Other machine
interface CM16 General–purpose
DI/DO
CM17 General–purpose
Power supply unit CPD1 DI/DO
(24V)
Note 1 CNB1 LM/SM

Power ON/OFF
(*)
CA40
(*) Power magnetics

+ cabinet
general– *ESP , OTR

CNA1
purpose
DI/DO Input unit power
ON/OFF
CRT/MDI
Spindle amp LM/
SM
*ESP : Emergency stop signal
OTR : OT release signal
ON/OFF : Power ON/OFF control signal
LM/SM: Load meter or speed meter signal
* : Manual pulse generator
NOTE
1 Power requirements
When 60% of the DI/DO points are on, this interface unit
requires “1.0 A”
2 The cable connected to CM26 must not be longer than 30
cm.
296
www.plcworld.cn
10.7.3
Signal Assignment
Connector pin signal

assignment CM15 (General DI/DO) CM16 (General DI/DO) CM17 (General DI/DO)
A B A B A B
01 +5E DI06 01 DI20 DI22 01 0V 0V
02 0V DO06 02 DI24 +5E 02 DO20 DO21
03 +5E DI07 03 DI23 DI21 03 DO22 DO23
04 0V DO07 04 DI25 DI26 04 DO24 DO25
05 +5E DI16 05 DI27 +5E 05 DO26 DO27
06 0V DO16 06
ÇÇÇ
DO00 0V 06 0V 0V
ÇÇÇ
07 +5E DI17 07 DI05 +5E 07 DO30 DO31
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
08 0V DO17 08 DO01 0V 08 DO32 DO33
09 *ESP ECM1 09 DI15 +5E 09 DO34 DO35
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
10 OTR ECM2 10 DO02 0V 10 DO36 DO37
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
11 DI00 D102 11 DO03 DO04 11 0V 0V
12 DI04 +5E 12 DO05 0V 12 +5E +5E
13
ÇÇÇ
DI03 DI01 13 0V 0V
ÇÇÇÇ
13
ÇÇÇ
DI30 DI31
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
14 DI05 DI10 14 DO10 DO11 14 DI32 DI33
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
15 DI12 DI14 15 DO12 DO13 15 DI34 DI35
16 +5E DI13 16 DO14 DO15 16 DI36 DI37
17
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
DI11 DI15 17 +5E +5E
CA40 (Connector on the manual pulse generator)
17 +5E +5E
14
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
DI37 01 +5V
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
08 DI31
15 0V 02 +5V
09 DI32
ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
16 DO37 03 HA1
10 DI33
17 0V 04 HB1
ÇÇÇÇ
11 DI34
18 05
12 DI35
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
19 +5E 06
13 DI36
20 +5E 07 DI30
CNA1 (Connector on the machine side)
ÇÇÇ
10 ECM2 20
9 0M 19 OTR
8 ECM1 18
7 DO36 17 *ESP
6 SM 16
5 SM 15 COM
4 0M 14
3 0M 13 EOF
2 LM 12
1 LM 11 EON
ÇÇÇÇ
CNB1 (Connector on the operator’s panel side) CPD1 (Power supply)
01 LM 05 EON
ÇÇÇÇ
09 HA1 3 2 1
ÇÇÇÇ
02 SM 06 EOF 10 HB1 0V +24V
03 0M 07 COM 11 +5V 6 5 4
04 0M 08 0V 12 0V 0V +24V
Pins shaded by are those for forwarding signals. Pins with the same
name are connected directly to one another.
297
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
1 LM and SM also function as input terminals to the A/D
converter.
ÇÇ
2 OM is connected to 0 V on the PCB.
Input/output pins shaded by are in pairs. Only one in
each pair is usable.
3 Do not connect a cable longer than 30 cm to CM15, CM16,
or CM17.
JD1A (FANUC I/O Link : NEXT SLAVE)

10 20 +5V
9 +5V 19
8 18 +5V
7 17
6 16 0V
5 15 0V
4 *TXB 14 0V
3 TXB 13 0V
2 *RXB 12 0V
1 RXB 11 0V
JD1B (FANUC I/O Link : BEFORE SLAVE)

10 20 +5V
9 +5V 19
8 18 +5V
7 17
6 16 0V
5 15 0V
4 *TXA 14 0V
3 TXA 13 0V
2 *RXA 12 0V
1 RXA 11 0V
CM26 (Matrix DI/DO)

A B
01 0V *MND1
02 *KYD0 *KYD1
03 *KYD2 *KYD3
04 *KYD4 *KYD5
05 *KYD6 *KYD7
06 *KYC0 *KYC1
07 *KYC2 *KYC3
08 *KYC4 *KYC5
09 *KYC6 *KYC7
10 *KYC8 *KYC9
11 *KYCA *KYCB
12 *BZMD 0V
13 *LD0 *LD8
14 *LD1 *LD9
15 *LD2 *LD10
16 *LD3 *LD11
17 *LD4 *LD12
18 *LD5 *LD13
19 *LD6 *LD14
20 *LD7 *LD15
21 LC1L LC1H
22 LC2L LC2H
23 LC3L LC3H
24 LC4L LC4H
25 0V 0V
298
www.plcworld.cn
DInx General–purpose DI LM Load meter voltage
DOnx General–purpose DO SM Speed meter voltage
*ESP Emergency stop 0M LM/SM reference voltage (0V)
ECM1 *ESP common signal *KYDx Matrix DI data signal
OTR OT release *KYCx Matrix DI common signal
ECM2 OTR common signal *LDx Matrix DO data signal
EON/OF Power ON/OFF control signal LCnL/H Matrix DO common signal
COM EON/EOF common signal *MNDI Three DI points acceptable
HAI Input from manual pulse generator *BZMD Buzzer off
HBI Input from manual pulse generator
See Subsec. 10.7.4 for details of connection and signal meanings.
10.7.4
Interface
General–purpose DI
+5E
DI00 to DI37
RV
0V
Input signal specifications

Contact rating 5VDC, 3.2mA or higher
Leakage current between open contacts 0.2mA or lower (5 VDC)
Voltage drop across closed contacts 0.75V or lower
299
www.plcworld.cn
General–purpose DO
+24V
Photocoupler
DO00 to DO37 +
FET
0V
Output signal specifications

Maximum load current 0.03A
Maximum open–circuit leakage current 0.1mA
Maximum closed–circuit voltage drop 0.1V
NOTE
When using an LED at the DO point, connect an external
resistor that meets the requirements of the LED.
300
www.plcworld.cn
Matrix DI
D Key switch addresses See Subsec. 10.7.5 for the corresponding PMC addresses.
CM26–A06 KY07 KY06 KY05 KY04 KY03 KY02 KY01 KY00 BZ0
*KYC0
CM26–B06 KY17 KY16 KY15 KY14 KY13 KY12 KY11 KY10 BZ1
*KYC1
*KYC2
*KYC3
*KYC4
*KYC5
*KYC6
*KYC7
*KYC8
*KYC9
CM26–A11 KYA7 KYA6 KYA5 KYA4 KYA3 KYA2 KYA1 KYA0 BZA
*KYCA
CM26–B11 KYB7 KYB6 KYB5 KYB4 KYB3 KYB2 KYB1 KYB0 BZB
*KYCB
CM26–B05
*KYD7
CM26–A05
*KYD6
CM26–B04
*KYD5
CM26–A04
*KYD4
CM26–B03
*KYD3
CM26–A03
*KYD2
CM26–B02
*KYD1
CM26–A02
*KYD0
CM26–A12
*BZMD
CM26–B01
*MNDI
When *MNDI = 0, it enables three or more simultaneous inputs.
CM26–A01 When *MNDI = 1, it inhibits three or more simultaneous inputs.
0V
301
www.plcworld.cn
D Mode selection - Preventing malfunctions that may be caused by detouring current

When there are three or more matrix DI points, detouring current can
cause a nonexistent DI input to be falsely detected as existing.
As shown below, if KY01, KY03, and KY21 are closed
simultaneously, current detours through the path indicated with
arrows, thus causing a false input of *KY23 to be detected because of
a current path formed by a combination of common signal *KYC2 and
data signal *KYD3.
KY03 KY01
*KYC0
*KYC1
KY23 KY21
*KYC2
*KYC3
*KYD3
*KYD2
*KYD1
*KYD0
Two modes are available to prevent this malfunction. One should be

selected according to the user applications.
[Method 1]
D Ignoring all occurrences of three or more simultaneous inputs
Action : Make the *MNDI signal open (see item “D Key switch
addresses”)
NOTE
If there are two inputs and a third is added, all three are
ignored. When one of the three inputs is removed, two are
accepted.
[Method 2]
D Attaching detour prevention diodes to enable three simultaneous
inputs
Action : Connect the *MNDI signal (see item “D Key switch
addresses”) to 0V.
A diode must be connected in series with a switch, as shown below.
Detour prevention diode
*KYCn
*KYDn
302
www.plcworld.cn
- This PCB can raise a confirmation sound when a key is pressed. The
condition to raise an audible alarm is set in 8–bit units, or in *KYCn
units. If *BZMD and common *KYCn are disconnected, a KYnx
input causes a sound to generate. If they are connected, a KYnx input
does not generate the sound.
To generate a confirmation sound for key input, the DO (PMC address
DO + 00.7) “MD07” must have been turned to “1” (see Subsec.
10.7.5).
1 A diode is necessary to connect *BZMD and *KYCn, as

shown below.
2 This setting cannot be changed when power is supplied.
3 The sound is generated when the circuit closes between
common signal *KYCn and data signal *KYDx. It does not
sound when the circuit is disconnected. If key switches are
used, the sound is heard at the moment a key is pressed.
It does not sound when a key is released or when a key is
held pressed.
*KYCn
*BZMD
(Example)
If *BZMD is connected to *KYC0 and *KYC2, but disconnected from
*KYC1 and *KYC3, as shown below, closing a switch at key
addresses KY10 to KY17 and KY30 to KY37 causes a confirmation
sound for key input to be heard, but closing a switch at key addresses
KY00 to KY07 and KY20 to KY27 does not.
See item “D Key switch addresses”.
*KYC0
*KYC1
*KYC2
*KYC3
*BZMD
303
www.plcworld.cn
D Signal specification
Contact rating 6VDC, 2mA or higher
Leakage current between open contacts 0.2mA or lower (6VDC)
Voltage drop across closed contacts 0.9V or lower (1 mA) Note )
NOTE
This voltage must be maintained even when detour
prevention diodes are used.
304
www.plcworld.cn
Matrix DO
D LED addresses See Subsec. 10.7.5 for the corresponding PMC addresses.
LC4L CM26–A24
LC3L CM26–A23
LC2L CM26–A22
LC1L CM26–A21
CM26–A13 L1L0
*LD0
CM26–A14 L1L1
*LD1
*LD2 CM26–A15 L1L2
*LD3 CM26–A16 L1L3
*LD4 CM26–A17 L1L4
*LD5 CM26–A18 L1L5
*LD6 CM26–A19 L1L6

CM26–A20 L1L7
*LD7
L2L0
L2L1
L2L2
L2L3
L2L4
L2L5
L2L6
L2L7
L3L0
L3L1
L3L2
L3L3
L3L4
L3L5
L3L6
L3L7
L4L0
L4L1
L4L2
L4L3
L4L4
L4L5
L4L6
L4L7
NOTE
The timing for the common signals are shown below. Their
duty cycle is 2 ms for LEDs being on and 6 ms for LEDs
being off.
LC4L (H)
LC3L (H)
LC2L (H)
LC1L (H)
8ms
305
www.plcworld.cn
CM26–B24
LC4H
CM26–B23
LC3H
CM26–B22
LC2H
CM26–B21
LC1H
CM26–B13 L1H0
*LD8
CM26–B14 L1H1
*LD9
CM26–B15 L1H2
*LD10
CM26–B16 L1H3
*LD11
CM26–B17 L1H4
*LD12
CM26–B18 L1H5
*LD13
CM26–B19 L1H6
*LD14
CM26–B20 L1H7
*LD15
L2H0
L2H1
L2H2
L2H3
L2H4
L2H5
L2H6
L2H7
L3H0
L3H1
L3H2
L3H3
L3H4
L3H5
L3H6
L3H7
L4H0
L4H1
L4H2
L4H3
L4H4
L4H5
L4H6
L4H7
D Internal circuit The circuit contains a 100–ohm resistor, as shown below.

Connecting an LED does not require an external resistor.
+5V
CM26 LCnL (H)
CM26 *LDx
100 Ω LnL(H)x
306
www.plcworld.cn
D Signal specifications The LEDs must have the following rating

Forward voltage 2.4V max (If=5mA)(Typical value)
Forward current 30mA max
Reverse voltage 3V max
Interface for manual

pulse generator
D Connection of connector One interface is provided on connector CNB1.
CNB1
Manual pulse
HA1 9 HA1 generator
When only the
manual pulse HB1 10 HB1
generator is directly
connected +5V 11 +5V
0V 12
0V
CNB1
Control PCB
D Connection of connector Pendant–type manual pulse generator with axis selection and multiplier
CA40 setting functions can be connected to connector CA40.
Pendant–type manual
pulse generator
When a
HA1 3 HA1
pendant–type
manual pulse
HB1 4 HB1
generator Axis Multiplier
with including selection setting
+5V 1, 2 +5V
axis selection
and multiplier
0V 17,18 0V
setting
functions is 0V 15 0V
connected
7 to DI
DI30 to DI37 14
DO37 16 DO
CA40
Control PCB
NOTE
1 When DI30 to DI37 of connector CA40 are allocated as the
DIs used for the axis selection and multiplier setting, DI30
to DI37 of connector CM17 cannot be used.
2 One DO is available for the manual pulse generator side at
the user’s discretion. When this is used, DO37 of CM17
cannot be used, as in the case for DIs above.
307
www.plcworld.cn
Analog signal inputs Analog inputs received from the outside are forwarded without change to
output terminals.
D Connection diagram Analog inputs from the spindle amp being output for load meter and speed
(example) meter indications.
LM
Spindle LM 1, 2 1
amp Load
0M 3 3 0M meter
(Operator’s
0M 4 4 0M panel)
Speed
SM 5, 6 2 meter
SM
CNA1 CNB1
panel interface unit
D Sent to the CNC Analog inputs received on the Machine operator’s panel interface unit are
converted to five–bit digital values, which are sent to the CNC though the
I/O Link.
See Subsec. 9.7.5 for PMC addresses.
LM conversion data : “LM03 to LM07”
SM conversion data : “SM03 to SM07”
D Analog signal
specifications
Acceptable input voltage 0V to +15V
Voltage that can be converted to digital 0V to +10V Note)
NOTE
Any voltage higher than +10V is converted to the same
digital value as +10V is.
D A/D conversion
specifications
Conversion error 5% (max)
Resolution 5 bit (min)
308
www.plcworld.cn
D Emergency stop A signal generated by the emergency stop switch on the machine
operator’s panel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet. (This signal
cannot be sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
Emergency stop
signal
A09 17 *ESP
*ESP *ESP
B09 8 24V
ECM1 ECM1
CM15 CNA1
Machine operator’s Power magnetics

panel interface unit cabinet
D OT release A signal generated by the OT release switch on the machine operator’s

panel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet.
(This signal cannot be sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
OT release switch
A10 19 OTR
OTR OTR
B10 10
ECM2 ECM
ECM2
CM15 CNA1
Machine operator’s Power magnetics

panel interface unit cabinet
D Power ON/OFF control Signals generated by the power ON/OFF control switches on the machine
signal operator’s panel can be sent to an input unit. (These signals cannot be sent
to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
5 11 EON
ON switch EON
6 13 ECF
ECF
OFF switch
7 15 COM
COM
CM15 CNA1
panel interface unit Input unit
NOTE
The LM, OM, SM, D036, ECM, EON, EOF, COM, ESP, and
OTR signals are all assigned to the pins of one connector
(CNA1).
They can be connected to the machine using only one cable.
309
www.plcworld.cn
10.7.5
PMC Addresses
Scope in which PMC

addresses can be used
BIT NUMBER I/O Link allocation
PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 128/128 256/256
ADDRESS
DI+00 FUSE
DI+01 KY07 KY06 KY05 KY04 KY03 KY02 KY01 KY00
DI+09 DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00
DI+13 LM07 LM06 LM05 LM04 LM03
DI+14 SM07 SM06 SM05 SM04 SM03
DI+15 MP17 MP16 MP15 MP14 MP13 MP12 MP11 MP10
DI+16 Reserved for use by FANUC
DI+17
DI+20 KYA7 KYA6 KYA5 KYA4 KYA3 KYA2 KYA1 KYA0
DI+21 KYB7 KYB6 KYB5 KYB4 KYB3 KYB2 KYB1 KYB0
DO+00 MD07 MD06 FUSE

DO+01 L1L7 L1L6 L1L5 L1L4 L1L3 L1L2 L1L1 L1L0
DO+05 L1H7 L1H6 L1H5 L1H4 L1H3 L1H2 L1H1 L1H0
DO+09 DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00
FUSE : When 1, it indicates the +5E fuse has blown.

Shorting of the general–purpose DI input is considered as a possible cause. Turn off the power at
once, check the general–purpose DI input and its vicinity, replace the fuse and turn the power on.
DInx : General–purpose DI
LM0x : Load meter indication
SM0x : Speed meter indication
KYnx : Ky signal (matrix)
LnL (H) x : LED signal (matrix)
DOnx : General–purpose DO
MD07 : Buzzer mode selection (It is possible to sound the key entry confirmation tone at the matrix DI input by
turning this to “1”.)
MD06 : Buzzer ON/OFF setting (The buzzer sounds as this is turned to “1” and stops as it is turned to “0”. This
operation is performed irrespective of MD07.)
MP1X : First manual pulse generator
310
www.plcworld.cn
10.7.6 D Use flat cables for connectors CM15, CM16, CM17, and CM26.
Major Connection When splitting and connecting flat cables to the machine operator’s
panel or other equipment, be careful not to break or short the
Precautions conductors.
D All signals with the same name described in Subsec. 10.7.3 are
connected to one another.
D One of the holes for mounting the PCB is also used for grounding.
Before mounting the PCB, check the location of that hole with the
diagram in Subsec. 10.7.10.
10.7.7 L1 (green) :
Monitors +5E. When on, it indicates that the fuse is intact (+5E: 5V for
State of the LEDs on
connector output).
the Machine Operator’s When off, it indicates that the fuse has blown.
Panel Interface Unit L2 (green) :
Monitors key scanning. When blinking, it indicates that the keys are
being scanned normally. When on or off, it indicates key scanning is at
halt.
L3 (red) :
When on, it indicates that an alarm condition has occurred. When off, it
indicates that there is no alarm condition.
311
www.plcworld.cn
10.7.8
Connector Connector Major use Specification
(on the Cable Side)
CM15, General–purpose HIF3BA–34D–2.54R :
Specifications CM16, DI/DO Manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC
CM17 CO., LTD.
CNA1 Relay terminal PCR–E20FS :

(to the machine) Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KO-
GYO CO., LTD.
CNB1 Relay terminal MVSTBR2.5/12–ST–5.08 :

(to the machine Manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT
operator’s panel) GmbH & Co.
JD1A, FANUC I/O Link PCR–E20FS :

JD1B Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KO-
GYO CO., LTD.
CPD1 Power supply Dynamic D3100 (three pins) :

Manufactured by AMP JAPAN, LTD.
1–178288–3 : Connector
1–175218–5 : Contact
CM26 Matrix DI/DO HIF3BB–50D–2.54R :

Manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC
CO., LTD.
CA40 Manual pulse MR–20LFH (solder type) :

generator Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KO-
GYO CO., LTD.
NOTE
1 Several types of connectors are available for use at the
other end of the cable leading to connector CNB1. Refer to
brochures of PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co..
The connector used on the machine operator’s panel
interface unit side is MSTBVA2.5/12–G–5.08.
2 Crimped type cable connector is available for CA40. For
purchase from FANUC, please specify as below.
A02B–0029–K890 : Solder type
A02B–0029–K892 : Crimped type
312
www.plcworld.cn
10.7.9
Machine Operator’s
Panel Interface Unit
Dimension Diagram
(Including Connector
Locations)
89 22
CM26 A1
CPD1
B25
15
11
A1
17 10
60
CNB1
CM17
150
CNA1
9
B17
41
75
16
JD1B
1 CA40 CM16 CM15 A1
JD1A
A1
22
20 B17 B17
40
124 89 26
310
Unit : mm
Tolerance : "5 (mm)
CPD1
CND1
CNA1
CA40 JD1A
JD2B
Approx. 100mm 10mm
1.6mm
313
www.plcworld.cn
10.7.10
Machine Operator’s
Panel Interface Unit
Mounting Dimension
Diagram
Mounting hole position

20
CM26
18
CM17
150
110
114
Hole for connecting to a ground
4.5f
CM16 CM15
20
18
296
310
Fasten the PCB with four M4 screws. Unit : mm
314
www.plcworld.cn
Sheet fixing area It is possible to fix the sheet, spacer, etc. only in the area shown in the
(mounting face side) diagram below.
15 12
10
10
CM26
10
8
18
25
7
CM17
130
130
7 5
CM16 CM15
20
14
10
8
10
10
12 14
NOTE
Applied to the PCB version number “03A” and beyond.
Sheet fixing area It is possible to fix the sheet, spacer, etc. only in the area shown in the
(Soldering face side) diagram below.
14 12
CM26
13
10
7
8
14
21
CM17
126
124
3
CM16 CM15
17
12
7
8
13
10
13 14
NOTE
Applied to the PCB version number “03A” and beyond.
315
www.plcworld.cn
10.7.11
Fuse Mounting
Position
CM26
FU1
CPD1
FU3
FU2
CM17
JD1A
JD1B
CM16 CM15
FU1 : +24V fuse (general–purpose DO, this supplies printed board power protection)
FU2 : +5V fuse (IC power, manual pulse generator protection)
FU3 : +5E fuse (general–purpose DI protection)
NOTE
FU2 is not mounted on Revision 05A or later.
316
www.plcworld.cn
10.8 The operator’s panel connection unit (A16B–2200–0660, 0661) is

connected to the control unit through the FANUC I/O Link and is used for
CONNECTION OF interfacing with the machine operator’s panel.
OPERATOR’S PANEL The electric interface and pin layout of the connectors CM1 to CM4 are
CONNECTION UNIT fully compatible with those for Series 15. There are two units available
depending on the number of I/O points.
Specification Input Output
A16B–2200–0660 96 points 64 points
A16B–2200–0661 64 points 32 points
Operator’s panel connection unit

A16B–2200–0660,0661
Control unit
or I/O unit
JD1A JD1B JDIA To next device
If there is no equipment
beyond this connection
unit, JD1A can remain
open.
24V DC power CP61 CM1 Machine

operator’s
CM2 panel
BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.
3P CONNECTOR
(Brown) CM3
Housing : SMS3PNS–5
CM4
Contact : RC16M–SCT3
1 +24V
2 GND
3
Power supply input specification

Voltage : 24 VDC "10%
Capacity : 500 + 7.3 n mA
n : number of inputs that turn on simultaneously
CAUTION
For a power cable, use a cable of 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or
thicker.
317
www.plcworld.cn
10.8.1 The input signal of the operator’s panel connection unit is 0V common
Input Signal non–insulation type interface as shown below.
Regulations for
Operator’s Panel Machine Operator’s panel connection unit
tool
Connection Unit Direct +24V
current Receiver
input output
signal signal
Filter and level
converter circuit
Receiver circuit
Fig. 10.8.1 (a) Receiver circuit
Direct current (Signal) (Signal)

input signal Logi 0
OFF (High) (more
ON (Low) than 18V)
Logi 1
(less
Chattering of 5ms than 6V)
or less is ignored
Receiver output
signal
5 to 22ms 5 to 22ms
Fig. 10.8.1 (b) Width of input signals and delay time
In the above figure, it is logic 0 when the contact is open and logic 1 when
closed.
Connect the common line of the input signal of the operator’s panel
connection unit as shown below.
Machine tool Connector

CM1
DI00 to DI57
COM1
Connector Operator’s panel
CM2 connection unit
DI60 to DIB7
COM2
Fig. 10.8.1 (c) Connection of common lines
318
www.plcworld.cn
WARNING
All signals input to this operator’s panel connection unit are
of source type.
When a source interface is used, a ground fault in an input
signal has the same effect as closing the contacts. From the
viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not recommend
the use of such an interface for input signals. In particular,
input signals X008.0 to X008.7 must be connected in a sink
layout, because these signals include the emergency stop
signal.
Do not use this operator’s panel connection unit for
safety–critical input signals (such as an emergency stop
signal).
319
www.plcworld.cn
10.8.2 Output signals DO00 to DO77 of the operator’s panel connection unit
Output Signal drive indicators and LEDs on the machine operator’s panel and use NPN
transistor for drivers.
Regulations for Prepare 24VDC for power supply of indicators and LEDs and connect 0V
Operator’s Panel to COM3 and COM4. For LEDs, however, 5VDC 300mA output from
Connection Unit the terminal +5N of the connector CM3 can be used. There is no +5N in
the connector CM4; use +5N in connector CM3 as shown below:
Output regulation Load voltage : 24V +20% or less
Load current : 40mA
Connector CM3 Indicator

Transistor output
R
DO00 to 57
LED
R
+5N
+5VDC COM3
300mA
max
Connector CM4 Indicator
Transistor output
R
DO60 to 77
LED
R +
24V
stabilized
power
–
COM4
Operator’s panel
connectIon unit
WARNING
When a sink output interface is used, a ground fault in an
output signal causes the output signal to remain on. From
the viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not
recommend the use of such an interface for output signals.
320
www.plcworld.cn
10.8.3
Connector Layout for
Operator’s Panel
Connection Unit
CM1
1 DI00 33
2 DI03 34 DI02 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DI01
3 DI06 35 DI05
20 DI04 Xn DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00
4 DI11 36 DI10
21 DI07
5 DI14 37 DI13 DI17 DI16 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11 DI10
22 DI12 Xn+1
6 DI17 38 DI16
23 DI15
7 DI22 39 DI21 Xn+2 DI27 DI26 DI25 DI24 DI23 DI22 DI21 DI20
24 DI20
8 DI25 40 DI24
25 DI23 DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI31 DI30
9 DI27 41 DI26 Xn+3
26 DI30
10 DI32 42 DI31
27 DI33 Xn+4 DI47 DI46 DI45 DI44 DI43 DI42 DI41 DI40
11 DI35 43 DI34
28 DI36
29 DI41 Xn+5
13 DI43 45 DI42
30 DI44
14 DI46 46 DI45
31 DI47
15 DI51 47 DI50
32 DI52
16 DI54 48 DI53
17 DI56 9 DI55
18 COM1 50 DI57
CM2
1 DI60 33
2 DI63 34 DI62 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DI61
3 DI66 35 DI65
20 DI64 Xn+6 DI67 DI66 DI65 DI64 DI63 DI62 DI61 DI60
4 DI71 36 DI70
21 DI67
22 DI72 Xn+7
6 DI77 38 DI76
23 DI75
7 DI82 39 DI81 Xn+8 DI87 DI86 DI85 DI84 DI83 DI82 DI81 DI80
24 DI80
8 DI85 40 DI84
25 DI83 DI97 DI96 DI95 DI94 DI93 DI92 DI91 DI90
9 DI87 41 DI86 Xn+9
26 DI90
10 DI92 42 DI91
27 DI93 Xn+10 DIA7 DIA6 DIA5 DIA4 DIA3 DIA2 DIA1 DIA0
11 DI95 43 DI94
28 DI96
12 DIA0 44 DI97 DIB7 DIB6 DIB5 DIB4 DIB3 DIB2 DIB1 DIB0
29 DIA1 Xn+11
13 DIA3 45 DIA2
30 DIA4
14 DIA6 46 DIA5
31 DIA7
15 DIB1 47 DIB0
32 DIB2
16 DIB4 48 DIB3
17 DIB6 9 DIB5
18 COM2 50 DIB7
NOTE
n in addresses can be 0 to 127.
64 points (DI00 to DI77) can be used for the
A16B–2200–0661.
321
www.plcworld.cn
CM3
1 DO00 33 +5N
2 DO03 34 DO02 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DO01
3 DO06 35 DO05
20 DO04 Yn DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00
4 DO11 36 DO10
21 DO07
5 DO14 37 DO13
22 DO12 Yn+1 DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11 DO10
6 DO17 38 DO16
23 DO15
7 DO22 39 DO21 Yn+2 DO27 DO26 DO25 DO24 DO23 DO22 DO21 DO20
24 DO20
8 DO25 40 DO24
25 DO23
26 DO30
10 DO32 42 DO31
11 DO35 43 DO34
28 DO36
12 DO40 44 DO37
13 DO43 45 DO42
30 DO44
14 DO46 46 DO45
31 DO47
15 DO51 47 DO50
32 DO52
16 DO54 48 DO53
17 DO56 9 DO55
18 COM3 50 DO57
CM4
1 DO60 14 DO60
8 DO62
2 DO64 15 DO63 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9 DO65
3 DO67 16 DO66
4 DO72 17 DO71
11 DO73
12 DO76
6 19 DO77
13
7 COM4 20
NOTE
n in addresses can be 0 to 127.
32 points (DO00 to DO37) can be used for the
A16B–2200–0661.
322
www.plcworld.cn
10.8.4
External View of
Operator’s Panel
Connection Unit
11.8mm
Approx.
100mm
Weight : 1.2 kg
Fig. 10.8.4 External view of operator’s panel connection unit
323
www.plcworld.cn
10.9 The operator’s panel connection unit (A16B–2202–0730, 0731), which

connects to the control unit via the FANUC I/O Link, acts as an interface
CONNECTION OF with the machine operator’s panel.
SOURCE OUTPUT Connectors CM51, CM52, CMB3, and CMB4, used to interface with the
TYPE CONNECTION operator’s panel, feature an electrical interface and pin assignment which
are fully compatible with those of the source type output operator’s panel
UNIT
connection unit for the Series 15. The following two units are available
with different numbers of I/O points:
Specifications No. of input points No. of output points
A16B–2202–0730 96 64
A16B–2202–0731 64 32
Operator’s Panel Connection Unit

A16B–2202–0730,0731
Control unit
or
I/O unit JD1A JD1B JD1A To next device
When no other device is
connected to the connec-
tion unit, leave JD1A open.
24VDC power CM51
CM52 Machine
BURNDY 3P CONNECTOR (Brown) operation’s
Housing: SMS3PNS–5 CMB3 panel
Contact: RC16M–SCT3
CMB4
1 +24V
2 GND
Power input regulations

Voltage : 24VDC"10%
Capacity : 500+7. 3 n (mA)
n: Number of input points which are simultaneously turned on
CAUTION
Use 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or heavier wire as the power cable.
324
www.plcworld.cn
10.9.1 Most input signals for the source output type connection unit support a
Input Signal sink type non–isolated interface. For some input signals, however, either
sink or source type can be selected. (European safety standards demand
Specifications for the use of sink types.)
Source Output Type The machine’s contacts shall conform to the following specifications:
Connection Unit
Capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or higher
Intercontact leakage current in closed circuit:
1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)
Intercontact voltage drop in closed circuit:
2 V or less (including the voltage drop in the cables)
Circuit of sink type input receiver
Machine Operator’s panel connection unit

Receiver
output
Input signal Filter and level
signal
conversion cir-
Contact cuit
+24V R
+24V
Circuit of input receiver for which common voltage can be selected
Machine Operator’s panel connection unit Receiver

output
Input signal Filter and level signal
conversion cir-
Contact cuit
DICMN1 R
or
DICMN2
+24V
+24V
0V
Receiver
output
Input signal Filter and level signal
conversion cir-
Contact cuit
DICMN1 R
or
DICMN2
+24V
+24V
0V
Fig. 10.9.1 (a) Receiver circuit

Always connect both DICMN1 and DICMN2 to 24 V or 0 V. Do not leave
them open.
325
www.plcworld.cn
DC input signal
OFF (High) (Signal) (Signal)
ON (Low) Logical 0
(18 V or
higher)
Logical 1
(6V or
lower)
Chattering of 5
ms or less is ig-
nored.
Receiver output
signal
5 to 22ms 5 to 22ms
Fig. 10.9.1 (b) Signal width and delay of input signal
In the above figure, logical 0 corresponds to open contacts, while logical

1 corresponds to closed contacts.
WARNING
When a source interface is used, a ground fault in an input
signal has the same effect as closing the contacts. From the
viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not recommend
the use of such an interface for input signals.
10.9.2 The output signals shall satisfy the following:

Output Signal
Maximum load current when driver is on:
Specifications for 200 mA (including momentary values)
Source Output Type Saturation voltage when driver is on:
Connection Unit 1.0 V max.
Withstand voltage: 24 V +20% (including momentary values)
Leakage current when driver is off:
100 mA
Prepare the following external power supply for the output signals:
Supply voltage: +24 V "10%

Supply current (per board):
At least total maximum load current
(including momentary values) + 100 mA
Power–on timing: At the same time as or before turning on
the power to the control unit
Power–off timing: At the same time as or after turning on the
power to the control unit
326
www.plcworld.cn
CAUTION
A power supply which satisfies the above specifications
shall be connected to the DOCOM and 0V power supply
terminals for the output signals. The maximum current that
can be carried by the DOCOM pin is 2.0 A. The total load
current must not exceed this value, therefore.
Output signal driver The output signal driver used with the operator’s panel connection unit
can output up to eight signals.
The driver element monitors the current of each output signal. If an
overcurrent is detected, the output of that signal is turned off. Once a
signal has been turned off, the overcurrent will no longer exist, such that
the driver turns the signal on again. Therefore, in the case of a ground fault
or overload, the output of a signal will be repeatedly turned on and off.
This also occurs when a load which causes a high surge current is
connected.
The driver element contains an overheat detector, which turns off all eight
output signals if the temperature in the device exceeds the set value as a
result of an overcurrent caused by a ground fault or some other failure.
This off state is held. To restore signal output, logically turn the output
off then back on again, for each signal, after the temperature falls below
the set value. Signal output can also be restored by turning the system
power off then back on again.
On the PCB, a red LED beside the driver element lights once the overheat
detection circuit operates.
NOTE
The overheat detection circuit also causes a system alarm
to be issued to the CNC. (When setting pins CP1 on the
PCB are closed (jumpered), this alarm is not issued to the
CNC.)
Correspondence
between red LEDs and Red LED name DO signals Remarks
DO signals
DAL1 Y q + 0.0 to Y q + 0.7
DAL2 Y q + 1.0 to Y q + 1.7
DAL3 Y q + 2.0 to Y q + 2.7
DAL4 Y q + 3.0 to Y q + 3.7
DAL5 Y q + 4.0 to Y q + 4.7
DAL6 Y q + 5.0 to Y q + 5.7
DAL7 Y q + 6.0 to Y q + 6.7
DAL8 Y q + 7.0 to Y q + 7.7
327
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
The above red LED and alarm transfer to the CNC are
supported by PCBs of version 03B and later.
If the output of a signal cannot be turned on even though the CNC

diagnostic indicates that the signal is on, that signal or another signal
being handled by the same element may be overloaded, thus causing the
eight output signals to be turned off. In such a case, turn the system power
off and eliminate the cause of the overload.
D Driver element block

diagram
DOCOM
OHD
CONTROL
IN#0 LOGIC
OUT#0
OCD
CONTROL
IN#1 LOGIC
OUT#1
OCD
CONTROL
IN#7 LOGIC
OUT#7
OCD
OHD: Overheat detection circuit

OCD: Overcurrent detection circuit
The power for operating this driver element is supplied from
DOCOM (24 VDC).
328
www.plcworld.cn
Notes on output signals
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions when connecting output
signals:
Output pins shall not be connected in parallel, as shown
below.
DOCOM
+24V 0V
Relay
DV
DV
0V
CAUTION
When using a dimming resistor, connect a diode to prevent
leakage.
DOCOM
+24V 0V
Dimming
resistor
Lamp
DV Leakage prevention diode

0V
329
www.plcworld.cn
10.9.3
Connector Pin Layout
for Source Output Type
Connection Unit
CM51 CM52
1 DI00 33 DICMN1 1 DI60 33 0V

2 DI03 34 DI02 2 DI63 34 DI62
19 DI01 19 DI61
3 DI06 35 DI05 3 DI66 35 DI65
20 DI04 20 DI64
4 DI11 36 DI10 4 DI71 36 DI70
21 DI07 21 DI67
5 DI14 37 DI13 5 DI74 37 DI73
22 DI12 22 DI72
6 DI17 38 DI16 6 DI77 38 DI76
23 DI15 23 DI75
7 DI22 39 DI21 7 DI82 39 DI81
24 DI20 24 DI80
8 DI25 40 DI24 8 DI85 40 DI84
25 DI23 25 DI83
9 DI27 41 DI26 9 DI87 41 DI86
26 DI30 26 DI90
10 DI32 42 DI31 10 DI92 42 DI91
27 DI33 27 DI93
11 DI35 43 DI34 11 DI95 43 DI94
28 DI36 28 DI96
12 DI40 44 DI37 12 DIA0 44 DI97
29 DI41 29 DIA1
13 DI43 45 DI42 13 DIA3 45 DIA2
30 DI44 30 DIA4
14 DI46 46 DI45 14 DIA6 46 DIA5
31 DI47 31 DIA7
15 DI51 47 DI50 15 DIB1 47 DIB0
32 DI52 32 DIB2
16 DI54 48 DI53 16 DIB4 48 DIB3
17 DI56 49 DI55 17 DIB6 49 DIB5
18 +24V 50 DI57 18 +24V 50 DIB7
CMB3 CMB4
1 DO00 33 0V 1 DO61 14 DO60
8 DO62
2 DO03 34 DO02 2 DO64 15 DO63
19 DO01 9 DO65
3 DO06 35 DO05 3 DO67 16 DO66
20 DO04 10 DO70
4 DO11 36 DO10 4 DO72 17 DO71
21 DO07 11 DO73
5 DO14 37 DO13 5 DO75 18 DO74
22 DO12 12 DO76
6 DO17 38 DO16 6 DO56 19 DO77
23 DO15 13 DO57
7 DO22 39 DO21 7 0V 20 DOCOM
24 DO20
8 DO25 40 DO24
25 DO23
9 DO27 41 DO26
26 DO30
10 DO32 42 DO31
27 DO33
11 DO35 43 DO34
28 DO36
12 DO40 44 DO37
29 DO41
13 DO43 45 DO42
30 DO44
14 DO46 46 DO45
31 DO47
15 DO51 47 DO50
32 DO52
16 DO54 48 DO53
17 DOCOM 49 DO55
18 DICMN2 50 DOCOM
330
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
When the operator’s panel connection unit having 64 DIs
and 32 DOs is selected, connector CMB4 is not mounted on
the PCB.
DICMN1, DICMN2: Pins used to switch the DI common. Usually,

jumper these pins with 0V. (input)
+24V: +24 VDC output pin. This pin shall be used only
for DI signals input to the operator’s panel
connection unit. (output)
DOCOM: Power supply for the DO driver. All DOCOM pins
are connected in the unit. (input)
I/O addresses The following PMC addresses are assigned to the operator’s panel
connection unit, depending on the number of I/O points (DI/DO = 96/64
or 64/32):
[DI address] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xp DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00

DI: DI: X p+1 DI17 DI16 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11 DI10
96 64
points points X p+2 DI27 DI26 DI25 DI24 DI23 DI22 DI21 DI20
X p+3 DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI331 DI30
X p+10 DIA7 DIA6 DIA5 DIA4 DIA3 DIA2 DIA1 DIA0
X p+11 DIB7 DIB6 DIB5 DIB4 DIB3 DIB2 DIB1 DIB0
D Address p is determined by the machine tool builder.

D The common voltage can be selected for the DIs assigned to the
following 20 addresses:
Address Common signal to correspond
Xp+0.0, Xp+0.1, Xp+0.2, Xp+0.7 DICMN1

Xp+1.0, Xp+1.1, Xp+1.2, Xp+1.7
Xp+4.0 to Xp+4.7 DICMN2
Xp+11.4, Xp+11.5, Xp+11.6, Xp+11.7 DICMN1
331
www.plcworld.cn
[DO address] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Yq DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00

DO: DO: Y q+1 DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11 DO10
64 32
points points Y q+2 DO27 DO26 DO25 DO24 DO23 DO22 DO21 DO20
Y q+3 DO37 DO36 DO35 DO34 DO33 DO32 DO31 DO30
Address q is determined by the machine tool builder.

For details of address assignment, refer to the FANUC PMC
Programming Manual (Ladder Language) (B–61863E).
332
www.plcworld.cn
10.9.4
Dimensions of Source
Output Type
Connection Unit
4–f5mm CP1
15 mm
336mm 50mm 10
mm
12 12
CP1
JD1B
43
1 2 3
JD1A
CP61
35
154 mm
120 mm
155
17.78 mm
CMB4
MR20RM
CMB3 CM52 CM51
11.72
MR50RM MR50RM MR50RM

mm
20 50 50 50
Approx.
31.05mm 46.99mm 88.9mm 88.9mm 66.16mm 100 mm
7mm 322mm
The following LEDs, fuses, variable resistors, and setting pins are
mounted on the PCB:
[LEDs]
DB1 (green, pilot) : Lights while the power to the PCB is on.
DB2 (red, alarm) : Lights if an error occurs in the PCB or CNC.
DAL1 to DAL8 : See Subsec. 10.9.2
[Variable resistors]
VR1 and VR2 : Factory–set by FANUC. The machine tool builder
need not adjust these resistors.
[Setting pin]
CP1 : Used to specify whether the CNC will be notified of
a DO signal error as a system alarm (see Subsec.
10.9.2).
333
www.plcworld.cn
10.10
FANUC I/O LINK
CONNECTION UNIT
10.10.1 This unit connects FANUC I/O Link master devices’ such as the CNC and
Overview F–D Mate, via an I/O Link to enable the transfer of DI/DO signals.
System A System B
CNC or CNC or
F–D Mate +24 V power +24 V power F–D Mate
supply supply
I/O Link Slave I/O Link Slave
FANUC I/O Link

connection unit
DI DO
DO DI
I/O Link Master : F–D Mate, Series 21i/210i etc.

I/O Link Slave : I/O unit, Power Mate, Series 0–C, etc.
: FANUC I/O Link
Fig. 10.10.1 System which uses FANUC I/O Link connection units
NOTE
This system enables I/O data transfer between two independent FANUC I/O Link master
devices. When the system is adjusted and maintained, the FANUC I/O Link can be operated
with the system power for one of the FANUC I/O Link lines switched off, that is, the link operation
is stopped. In this case, DI data sent from a system at rest consists entirely of zeros. If one
of the links is stopped, either abnormally or normally, it takes up to several hundred milliseconds
for this function to take effect. During this period, that data which exists immediately before the
link stops is sent out. Take this into account when designing your system.
334
www.plcworld.cn
10.10.2
Specification Item Specification
I/O Link function Provided with two slave mode I/O Link interface channels,
between which DI/DO data can be transferred.
[Interface types]
One of the following combinations is selected:
Electrical – optical
Electrical – electrical
Optical – optical
Number of DI/DO DI: Up to 256, DO: Up to 256

data items (The number of data items actually used varies depending
on the amount of data assigned in the host.)
Power supply Each I/O Link interface must be independently supplied with
+24 VDC.
Voltage: +24 VDC +10%, –15%
Current: 0.2 A (excluding surge)
If a master unit does not have sufficient capacity to supply
power to each unit (0.2 A per slot), use an external power
supply unit. The power supply must be switched on, either
simultaneously with or before, the I/O Link master.
The two systems can be switched on and off independently
of each other. Data from a system to which no power is
supplied appears as zeros when viewed from the other
system. The data becomes 0 within 200 ms of the power
being switched off.
External 180 mm (wide) 150 mm (high) about 50 mm (deep)

dimensions Fig. 10.10.2 (b) is an outline drawing of the unit.
Installation The unit, which is a stand–alone type, is installed in the

power magnetics cabinet. Fig. 10.10.2 (c) shows how to
mount the unit.
Operating Temperature : 0 to 60°C

environment Humidity : 5 to 75% RH (non–condensing)
Vibration : 0.5 G or less
Ordering information
Interface type Specification
Electrical–optical interface A20B–2000–0410
Electrical–electrical interface A20B–2000–0411
Optical–optical interface A20B–2000–0412
335
www.plcworld.cn
LED indications
LED5 LED3 LED4 LED2

(GREEN) (RED) (GREEN) (RED)
DC–DC
CONVERT-
ER
CP2 CP1
+5V
LED1(RED)
0V
: Check pin
Fig. 10.10.2 (a) LED locations
LED status Description
LED1 Normal
j
1
LED1 A RAM parity error occurred because of a hardware
J failure.
LED4 LED2 CP1 is supplied with the specified voltage.

J j (Pilot lamp)
LED4 LED2 CP1 is supplied with a voltage that is lower than

2
j J specified or zero.
LED4 LED2 A communication error occurred in a channel of CP1.

J J
LED5 LED3 CP2 is supplied with the specified voltage.

J j (Pilot lamp)
LED5 LED3 CP2 is supplied with a voltage that is lower than

3
j J specified or zero.
LED5 LED3 A communication error occurred in a channel of CP2.

J J
J : On j : Off
336
www.plcworld.cn
Unit: mm
180
10 160
30
Printed–circuit board
90 150
Cable Mounted components Cable
50 or less
Fig. 10.10.2 (b) Outline drawing
160
4–M4 Unit: mm
90
Fig. 10.10.2 (c) Mounting location
337
www.plcworld.cn
10.10.3
Connection
10.10.3.1
I/O Link interface (1) Connection diagram (example)
AC power input AC power input
External External
power power
I/O Link (+24 V) (+24 V) I/O Link
master master
JD1A JD1A
Optical I/O
Link adapter
CP(*) CP(*)

Electrical Optical
interface interface
JD1B(*) COPB(*)
JD1A(*) COPA(*)

FANUC I/O Link connection unit (*)
(for electrical–optical interface) 1 or 2 (channel No.)
: Signal cable (electrical)

: Signal cable (optical) Additionally, the FANUC I/O Link connection unit
frame must be grounded.
: Power supply cable
[Name of I/O Link connection unit connectors]
Electrical–optical Electrical–electrical Optical–optical
Connector name Connector name Connector name

I/O Link interface I/O Link interface I/O Link interface
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2
JD1A1 COPA2 JD1A1 JD1A2 COPA1 COPA2
JD1B1 COPB2 JD1B1 JD1B2 COPB1 COPB2
CP1 CP2 CP1 CP2 CP1 CP2
338
www.plcworld.cn
(2) Signal cable (electrical)
JD1A1/JD1A2 JD1B1/JD1B2
11 0V 1 RXB 11 0V 1 RXA
12 0V 2 :RXB 12 0V 2 :RXA
13 0V 3 TXB 13 0V 3 TXA
14 0V 4 :TXB 14 0V 4 :TXA
15 0V 5 15 0V 5
16 0V 6 16 0V 6
17 7 17 7
18 – 8 18 – 8
19 9 – 19 9 –
20 – 10 20 – 10
This unit (JD1A1/JD1A2) Another device (JD1B)

or
Another device (JD1A) This unit (JD1B1/JD1B2)
RXB (01) (03) TXA

:RXB (02) (04) :TXA Indicates a twisted pair.
TXB (03) (01) RXA
:TXB (04) (02) :RXA
(09) (09)
* (18) (18) * An optical I/O Link adapter can-
(20) (20) not be connected to this unit,
0V (11) (11) 0V because the electrical interface
0V (12) (12) 0V for this unit cannot supply +5 V.
0V (13) (13) 0V To use an optical interface, pre-
pare a appropriate unit.
0V (14) (14) 0V
These wires can, therefore, be
0V (15) (15) 0V omitted.
0V (16) (16) 0V
Shielding
Frame ground (the shielding must be grounded at either end of the cable)
S Cable–side connector specification : PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin)

S Cable specification : A66L–0001–0284#10P or equivalent
S Cable length : 10 m (maximum)
339
www.plcworld.cn
(3) Signal cable (optical)

D Optical cable specification : A66L–6001–0009#XXXX
(where XXXX is a cable length
specification)
Cable specification examples
10 m – L10R03
100 m – L100R3
D Cable length : 200 m (maximum)
(4) Power supply cable
CP1/CP2 connector
1 2 3
Y +24V 0V (Input)
X +24V 0V (Output)
D 24 VDC is supplied via a Y–connector. Provided the power supply

has sufficient capacity, power can be supplied to another device
with the X–side as output.
D Power must be supplied to both CP1 and CP2.
D Cable–side connector specification
Y–connector: A63L–0001–0460#3LKY
(AMP Japan, 2–178288–3)
X–connector: A63L–0001–0460#3LKX
(AMP Japan, 1–178288–3)
Contact : A63L–0001–0456#BS (AMP Japan, 175218–5)
Ordering information : Y + 3 contacts : A02B–0120–K323
X + 3 contacts : A02B–0120–K324
D Cable material : Vinyl–insulated electrical wire AWG20–16
D Cable length : Determine the length of the cable such that the
supplied voltage at the receiving end satisfies
the requirements, because the voltage may
fluctuate and drop as a result of the resistance
of the cable conductor.
(5) Frame grounding
Ground the frame of the unit using a wire having a cross section of at
least 5.5 m2 (class 3 or higher). An M4 frame ground terminal is
provided.
340
www.plcworld.cn
10.11
CONNECTING THE
FANUC SERVO UNIT
β SERIES WITH I/O
LINK
10.11.1 The FANUC servo unit β series with I/O Link (called the β amplifier with
I/O Link) is a power motion control servo unit that can be easily connected
Overview
to a CNC control unit via the FANUC I/O Link.
The β amplifier with I/O Link can be connected to the i Series using the
FANUC I/O Link.
NOTE
Using the β amplifier requires that the power mate CNC
manager software function be installed in the i Series. This
function is included as one of the i Series option functions.
Note that this function is not supported by the i Series with
personal computer functions also requires an optional CNC
screen display function.
341
www.plcworld.cn
10.11.2 The β amplifier with I/O Link is connected to the i Series using the usual
Connection FANUC I/O Link connection.
Control unit
FANUC SERVO UNIT β series

with I/O Link
JD1A
I/O
IOLINK LINK
JD1A I/O Link cable JD1B
I/O
LINK
I/O Link
cable
JD1B
I/O
LINK
This figure is an example of connecting to

an i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted type
panel. Connection to β series amplifier
342
www.plcworld.cn
10.11.3 The maximum number of β amplifiers with I/O Link that can be
Maximum Number of connected to a control unit depends on the maximum number of FANUC
I/O Link points provided by that control unit, as well as their assignments.
Units that can be For the i Series, the maximum number of FANUC I/O Link DI and DO
Connected points are 1024 and 1024, respectively. One β amplifier with I/O Link
occupies 128 DI/DO points in the FANUC I/O Link. If no units other than
the β amplifiers with I/O Link are connected to the control unit, up to eight
β amplifiers can be connected.
10.11.4 If the β amplifier with I/O Link is used as an I/O Link slave, I/O addresses
Address Assignment are assigned in the PMC in the CNC. Because data output from the slave
is made in 16–byte units, the number of input/output points must be set
by Ladder to 128.
The module names are OC02I (input) and OC02O (output).

The BASE is always 0, and the SLOT is 1.
343
www.plcworld.cn
10.12
CONNECTION OF
THE DISTRIBUTION
I/O MACHINE
OPERATOR’S PANEL
10.12.1 The distribution I/O machine operator’s panel is of distribution I/O type
that is connected via I/O Link to the CNC. Its panel is the same as that
Differences between
of the FS0 standard machine operator’s panel. The distribution I/O
the FS0 Standard machine operator’s panel has features both common to and different from
Machine Operator’s those of the FS0 standard machine operator’s panel, as indicated below.
Panel and Distribution
I/O Machine Operator (Small machine operator’s panel)
Panel Item FS0 standard machine Distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel operator’s panel
Panel No design modification

Override
rotary
switch
Emergency
stop button
Program Keyboard
protect key (key switch/LED)
Depth
Override 150% maximum, 200% maximum,

binary code output gray code output
Key sheet The key sheet is compatible, so that a machine tool builder’s
custom key sheet, designed for the FS0 standard machine
operator’s panel, can be used as is. When a new unit is to be
built using the existing key sheet and distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel, however, redesign is required for this
combination.
Connection with DI/DO connection I/O Link connection

CNC
Emergency stop Already wired Not wired. Perform wiring for

the system as described in
Section 10.12.5.
MPG interface None Up to three units can be

connected.
However, only i series CNCs
can be connected.
344
www.plcworld.cn
(Standard–size machine operator’s panel)

Item FS0 standard machine Distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel operator’s panel
Panel No design modification

Program protect key
Override
rotary
switch
Emergency
stop button
Manual pulse generator Keyboard (key switch/LED)
Depth
Override 150% maximum, 200% maximum,

binary code output gray code output
Key sheet The key sheet is compatible, so that a machine tool builder’s
custom key sheet designed for the FS0 standard machine
operator’s panel, can be used as is. When a new unit is to be
built using the existing key sheet and distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel, however, redesign is required for this
combination.
Connection with DI/DO connection I/O Link connection

CNC
Emergency stop Already wired Not wired. Perform wiring

suitable for the system as
described in Section 10.12.5.
Manual pulse One unit is available. One unit is available.

generator No wiring is performed. No wiring is performed.
MPG interface None Up to three units can be

connected.
However, only i series CNCs
can be connected.
345
www.plcworld.cn
10.12.2
Overall Connection
Diagram
Distribution I/O machine

operator’s panel
Emergency stop switch
CNC
+24 V power supply
+24 V power supply
I/O unit
NOTE
CNCs of the i series only allow the distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel to be used with connected MPG units.
When other units (such as I/O modules for connection) that
have an MPG interface and which are connected via I/O
Link are used together with this machine operator’s panel,
only the MPG interface of the unit (module) closest to the
CNC on the I/O Link connection is valid. For I/O Link
connection and manual pulse generator connection, the
screw connector indicated below, which has been newly
added to the main board of the i series, cannot be used.

Connector case FI–20–CV7 Hirose Electric
Connector case + connector FI30–20S–CV7 Hirose Electric
346
www.plcworld.cn
10.12.3 (1) Small machine operator’s panel

Connector Mounting Specification of the printed circuit board:
Diagram A20B–8001–0721 (with general–purpose DO)
Viewed from behind
Printed circuit board
(2) Standard–size machine operator’s panel

Specification of the printed circuit board:
A20B–8001–0721 (with general–purpose DO)
Viewed from behind
NOTE
Machine operator’s panels shipped in April, 1998 and later
use the A20B–8001–0721 printed circuit board. The
A20B–8001–0721 printed circuit board features a
general–purpose DO, and has connector CE59 dedicated
to general–purpose DO. Machine operator’s panels
shipped before April, 1998, used the printed circuit boards
listed below.
347
www.plcworld.cn
Specification of Description
A20B–8001–0210 D Without general–purpose DO

D The other input/output interface specifications are
the same as those of the A20B–8001–0721
D The outer shape of the printed circuit board is
rectangular.
A20B–8001–0720 D Without general–purpose DO

D The other input/output interface specifications and
outer shape of the printed circuit board are the
same as those of the A20B–8001–0721 printed
circuit board.
10.12.4 To connector CPD1(IN) shown below, supply the power required for the
Power Supply operator’s panel and general–purpose DI. To facilitate power
distribution, the power applied to CPD1(IN) is directly output to
Connection CPD1(OUT). Use CPD1(OUT) if power distribution is required.
(Connector table)
CPD1(IN)
24 V power
supply
CPD1(OUT)
24 V power
supply
Connector recommended for use on the cable side: A02B–0120–K324

(The following connector housing and case are provided:)
(Housing: 1–178288–3 (AMP Japan))
(Contact: 1–175218–5 (AMP Japan))
NOTE
1 Power connectors CPD1(IN) and CPD1(OUT) have the
same specification. On the actual printed circuit board, (IN)
and (OUT) are not distinguished from each other.
2 During operation, never turn off the +24 V power supply to
the connector. Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm is
issued. Ensure that +24 V is supplied either when or before
the power to the CNC is turned on, and that the +24 V supply
is removed either when or after the power to the CNC is
turned off.
348
www.plcworld.cn
10.12.5 The emergency stop switch is not wired when the unit leaves the factory.
Emergency Stop Signal Perform wiring suitable for the system.
For an emergency stop signal, a common pin and emergency stop signal
Connection pin are available with connectors CN1 and CM58 on the machine
operator’s panel. So, the wiring described below is recommended.
(1) When the emergency stop switch on the machine is not used, and only
the emergency stop switch on the operator’s panel is used
Connect contact B of the emergency stop switch to pins 2 and 3 of
CN1.

Receiver
Connector recommended for use on the CN1 cable side

Housing: 2–178288–3 (AMP Japan), Contact: 1–175218–5 (AMP Japan)
(2) When the emergency stop switch on the machine and that on the
operator’s panel are used
Connect contact B of the emergency stop switch to pins 1 and 3 of CN1
and to pins A9 and B16 of CM58.
Machine operator’s panel Machine
Receiver
Connector recommended for use on the CN1 cable side

Connector recommended for use on the CM58 cable side
HIF3BA–34DA–2.54R (Hirose Electric)
349
www.plcworld.cn
(3) When an emergency stop signal is output to other I/O
Other I/O Machine operator’s panel
Receiver
Receiver
NOTE
In the examples (1) and (2) above, an emergency stop
signal is applied to the DI address (Xm+2.4) tied to the 24V
common signal. So, allocate DI addresses as described in
Section 10.12.12. For details of the wiring used to apply an
emergency stop signal to a DI address other than Xm+2.4,
see Sections 10.12.6 and 10.12.12. In the example of (3),
Xm+2.4 can be used as a general–purpose DI address.
10.12.6 The machine operator’s panel has 24 general–purpose DI points. The

interface is as follows:
Signal Connection
Connector recommended for use on the CM58 cable side:

HIF3BA–34D–2.54R (Hirose Electric)
350
www.plcworld.cn
Pin number
Address number
Bit number
351
www.plcworld.cn
Pin number
Address number
Bit number
352
www.plcworld.cn
NOTE
1 Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and Xm+3.0 to Xm+3.7 are DI points that
allows common selection. This means that by connecting
the DICOM1 pin (CM58–A02) and DICOM3 pin
(CM58–B02) to +24 V, the DI signal whose logic is inverted
can be applied. In this case, however, if the cable is struck
by lightning, it has the effect of turning on the DI signal. For
safety reasons, therefore, the connection of the DICOM1
and DICOM3 pins to 0 V is recommended whenever
possible.
2 From the viewpoint of safety, an emergency stop signal
needs to assigned to the corresponding bit of addresses
Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7 tied to the common signal. Determine
the location of an emergency stop signal as described in
Section 10.12.12.
3 The unused DI points of addresses Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7 tied
to the common signal are used as inputs tied to 0. The
unused DI points of addresses Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and
Xm+3.0 to Xm+3.7 that allow common selection are input
signals tied to 0 when the DICOM1 pin (CM58–A02) and
DICOM3 pin (CM58–B02) are connected to 0 V; the unused
DI points are input signals tied to 1 when the DICOM1 pin
(CM58–A02) and DICOM3 pin (CM58–B02) are connected
to +24 V. When the DICOM1 pin (CM58–A02) and DICOM3
pin (CM58–B02) are open, the logic of the unused DI points
at addresses Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and Xm+3.0 to Xm+3.7 is
undefined.
353
www.plcworld.cn
10.12.7
Signal Connection
Pin number
Pin number
(Note) Bit number
+24 V power
supply
Relay
Cable recommended for use on the CE59 cable side: HIF3BA–20D–2.54R (Hirose Electric)
NOTE
With the small machine operator’s panel, all of the eight
general–purpose DO points indicated above can be used.
With the standard–size machine operator’s panel, only the
five general–purpose DO points enclosed in the bold
rectangle can be used.
354
www.plcworld.cn
10.12.8 See Section 10.4.15.

Manual Pulse
10.12.9 A relay terminal is used to relay signals on the machine operator’s panel.
Relay Terminal Relayed signals are not output to the CNC via I/O Link. An example of
using a relay terminal to relay a power ON/OFF control signal is provided
Connection here.

Printed circuit board Input unit
ON switch
OFF switch
Connector recommended for use on the CN2 cable side:

Connector recommended for use on the CM58 cable side:
Housing: HIF3BA–34DA–2.54R (Hirose Electric)
355
www.plcworld.cn
10.12.10 (Small machine operator’s panel)

Keyboard Addresses The relationship of the keyboard key switches and LED I/O addresses is
as follows:
Key/LED
Key switch/LED arrangement
Address
NOTE
T series: 42 keys
M series: 46 keys
On the machine operator’s panel of the T series, the keys
enclosed in the bold rectangles are not available.
356
www.plcworld.cn
(Standard–size machine operator’s panel)

The relationship between the keyboard key switches and LED I/O
addresses is as follows:
Key/LED
Key switch/LED arrangement
Address
NOTE
53 keys for both the T series and M series
357
www.plcworld.cn
10.12.11
Other Signal DI address Signal Name
Addresses
Xm+0.0 *OVA Override signal
(Note)
Xm+0.1 *OVB
Xm+0.2 *OVC
Xm+0.3 *OVD
Xm+0.4 *OVE
Xm+0.5 KEY Program protect signal
NOTE
Override signal (*OVA to *OVE)
Gray codes are output according to the table below.

% 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200
*OVA 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
*OVB 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
*OVC 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
*OVD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
*OVE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
358
www.plcworld.cn
10.12.12 The I/O address maps of the distribution I/O machine operator’s panel are
Allocation as follows:
Xm Override, etc. Yn
Xm+1 Yn+1
General–purpose
Xm+2 Yn+2
DI signals
Xm+3 Yn+3 Keyboard (LED)
General–purpose
Xm+4 Yn+4 DO signals
Xm+5 Yn+5
Xm+6 Yn+6
Xm+7 Keyboard Yn+7
Xm+8 (key switch)
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (first MPG)
Xm+13 (second MPG) MPG
Xm+14 (third MPG)
Xm+15 Not used
With the distribution I/O machine operator’s panel, basically allocate a

group of 16 bytes as a DI area, and allocate a group of 8 bytes as a DO area.
The reason for this is described below. The MPG interface (MPG counter)
uses Xm+12 through Xm+14 of the DI space. These addresses are fixed.
Xm+12 through Xm+14 must be allocated before the MPG interfaces can
be used. So, when using MPG interfaces with the i series, allocate a group
of 16 bytes as a DI area. The value of an MPG counter is directly
processed by the CNC, so the ladder must not use this area.
When MPG interfaces are not used, the DI area may be allocated to other
I/O groups.
359
www.plcworld.cn
Basically, arbitrary I/O addresses can be allocated on the distribution I/O

machine operator’s panel. For connection with the fixed addresses
directly monitored by the CNC, however, DI addresses must be allocated
as indicated below.
Fixed addresses directly monitored by the CNC (with FS21i/210i)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X0004 SKIP ESKIP –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE

SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *ESP
The upper row is for the T series, while the lower row is for the M series.
Example)
When 16 bytes, starting from X0006, are allocated as DI addresses
X0006 Override, etc.
X0007 ² Fixed signal of *DECn#2

General–purpose
X0008 ² Fixed signal of *ESP
input signals
X0009 ² Fixed signal of *DECn#1
X0010
When addresses starting
X0012 from X0006 are allocated, the
fixed signals of *DECn#1 and
X0013 DECn#2 can be used, and
Keyboard the fixed signal of *ESP can
X0014 (key switch input be used after allocation at an
signals) address tied to the 24 V com-
X0015 mon signal.
However, fixed signals such
X0016 as SKIP cannot be used. Al-
locate addresses according
X0017 to this example when employ-
ing the wiring shown in Sec-
X0018 (first MPG) tion 10.12.5.
(No fixed signal can be allo-
X0019 (second MPG) MPG cated to the key switch input
section.)
X0020 (third MPG)
X0021 Not used
360
www.plcworld.cn
10.12.13
Specifications
Setting environment
Ambient temperature Operation: 0°C to 58°C
Storage and transportation: –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change 1.1°C/minute maximum
Humidity Normal condition: 75% (relative humidity)

Short term (no more than one month): 95% (relative
humidity)
Vibration Operation: 0.5 G or less
Atmosphere Normal machining factory environment (For use in an

environment with relatively high levels of dust, coolant,
organic solutions, and so forth, special consideration is
required.)
Ordering information
Name Ordering code Remarks
Distribution A02B–0236–C141#TBS Small, used for T, symbol key sheet

I/O machine
operator’s A02B–0236–C141#TBR Small, used for T, English key sheet
panel
A02B–0236–C141#MBS Small, used for M, symbol key sheet
A02B–0236–C141#MBR Small, used for M, English key sheet
Distribution A02B–0236–C140#TBS Standard–size, used for T,

I/O machine symbol key sheet
operator’s
panel A02B–0236–C140#TBR Standard–size, used for T,
English key sheet
A02B–0236–C140#MBS Standard–size, used for M,

symbol key sheet
A02B–0236–C140#MBR Standard–size, used for M,

English key shee
Fuse A03B–0815–K001 1A
(accessory)
361
www.plcworld.cn
panel specifications
Item Specifications Remarks
Number of 24 points 24 V input

general–purpose DI
points
Number of Small machine operator’s 24 V output

general–purpose DO panel: 8 points
points Standard–size machine
operator’s panel: 5 points
Key switch Small machine operator’s Sheet key type.

panel: 42 keys (for T) Matrix DI.
46 keys (for M)
Standad–size machine
operator’s panel: 53 keys
(common to T and M)
LED Red Attached to all key

switches.
Matrix DO.
Override rotary switch 5 bits Gray code output
Emergency stop switch 1 bit
Program protect key 1 bit
MPG interface 3 units maximum Usable only with i series

CNCs
Interface with CNC FANUC I/O Link connection Up to 16 units as CNC

slaves. Expandable up
to 1024/1024 points.
Manual pulse 1 unit Standard–size machine

generator operator’s panel only
Power supply capacity

Power supply voltage Power supply capacity Remarks
24 VDC "10% is fed from the power 0.4A All DI signal

connector CPD1; "10% includes consumption
momentary variations and ripples. is included.
362
www.plcworld.cn
signal specifications
Contact capacity 30 VDC. 16 mA or more
Leakage current between 1 mA or less (26.4 V)

contacts when opened
Voltage decrease between 2 V or less (including voltage drop in the cable)

contacts when closed
Delay The receiver delay is 2 ms (maximum). In addition,

[I/O Link transfer time between CNC and machine
operator’s panel (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan
period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.
signal specifications Maximum load current 200 mA or less including momentary variations
when ON
Saturation voltage when 1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA

ON
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
Leakage current when OFF 20 µA or less
Delay time The driver delay is 50 s (maximum). In addition,

[I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O
module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period
(depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.
NOTE
The maximum current for each of the DOCOM power supply
pins for the DO signals must not exceed 0.7 A.
363
www.plcworld.cn
10.12.14 The keyboard of the machine operator’s panel employs a matrix

Other Notes configuration. If three or more keys are simultaneously entered in the
matrix DI configuration, a DI signal is erroneously entered due to an
abnormal current flow. A countermeasure for this malfunction can be
implemented using a ladder program.
(Protection against malfunction)

If three or more keys are entered in the matrix DI configuration, all key
inputs after the first two are invalidated. If there are no additional key
inputs after three or more invalidated key inputs, and if the total number
of inputs is two or less, all key inputs that have been performed up to that
time are valid.
State (a) State (b) State (c)

Common line 1 (Xm+4) Common line 1 (Xm+4) Common line 1 (Xm+4)

Data line 7 (bit 7)
Data line 5 (bit 5)
Data line 4 (bit 4)
Data line 3 (bit 3)
Data line 2 (bit 2)
Data line 1 (bit 1)
Data line 0 (bit 0)
Data line 7 (bit 7)
Data line 5 (bit 5)
Data line 4 (bit 4)
Data line 3 (bit 3)
Data line 2 (bit 2)
Data line 1 (bit 1)
Data line 0 (bit 0)
Data line 7 (bit 7)
Data line 5 (bit 5)
Data line 4 (bit 4)
Data line 3 (bit 3)
Data line 2 (bit 2)
Data line 1 (bit 1)
Data line 0 (bit 0)

Data line 6 (bit 6)
Data line 6 (bit 6)
Data line 6 (bit 6)
State (d) State (e) State (f)


Data line 7 (bit 7)
Data line 5 (bit 5)
Data line 4 (bit 4)
Data line 3 (bit 3)
Data line 2 (bit 2)
Data line 1 (bit 1)
Data line 0 (bit 0)
Data line 7 (bit 7)
Data line 5 (bit 5)
Data line 4 (bit 4)
Data line 3 (bit 3)
Data line 2 (bit 2)
Data line 1 (bit 1)
Data line 0 (bit 0)
Data line 7 (bit 7)
Data line 5 (bit 5)
Data line 4 (bit 4)
Data line 3 (bit 3)
Data line 2 (bit 2)
Data line 1 (bit 1)
Data line 0 (bit 0)

Data line 6 (bit 6)
Data line 6 (bit 6)
Data line 6 (bit 6)
Key switch off (“0”) Key switch on (“1”)
364
www.plcworld.cn
(Ladder operation)
The following provides examples of ladder operation based on the DI
matrix of 8 (bits) 8 (common), indicated on the next page.
(1) The number of data lines where keys are entered is checked.
The OR (R1) of the data of all the addresses is found. Among the eight
bits of the R1 data, the number of bits set to 1 represents the number
of data lines where keys are entered.
1 The R1 data is compared with 00h. If a match is found, the number
of R1 data bits set to 1 is 0.
Example) State (a): R1 = (00000000) ³
The number of data lines where keys are entered is 0.
2 The R1 data is compared with the data tables below. If the R1 data
matches the data in data table 1, the number of R1 data bits set to
1 is 1. Similarly, if the R1 data matches the data in data table 2, the
number of R1 data bits set to 1 is 2.
Example) State (b) or (c): R1 = (00000100) ³
The number of data lines where keys are entered is 1.
Example) State (d) or (e): R1 = (00010100) ³
The number of lines where keys are entered is 2.
3 If the R1 data is not 00h, and does not match the data of either data
table, the number of R1 data bits set to 1 is 3 or more.
Example) State (f): R1 = (00110100) ³
The number of lines where keys are entered is 3.
Data table 1 Data table 2

00000001 00000010 00000011 00000110 00001100 00011000
00000100 00001000 00110000 01100000 11000000 10000001
00010000 00100000 00000101 00001010 00010100 00101000
01000000 10000000 01010000 10100000 01000001 10000010
00001001 00010010 00100100 01001000
10010000 00100001 01000010 10000100
(2) Decision 1
1 When there is no line where keys are entered
³ No key switch is pressed.
Example) State (a)
2 When there are two or less lines where keys are entered
³ Go to (3)
3 When there are three or more lines where keys are entered
³ Three or more keys are entered. This case is invalid.
Example) State (f)
365
www.plcworld.cn
(3) When there are two or less data lines where keys are entered, whether
multiple keys are entered on a data line is checked.
The data of all addresses are subtracted from the OR (R1) to obtain
result R2. When R2 = 00h, there is no data line where multiple keys
are entered.
Example) When there is one data line where a key is entered
State (b): R2 = FCh
State (c): R2 = F8h
When there are two data lines where keys are entered
State (d): R2 = 00h
State (e): R2 = FCh
(4) Decision 2
1 When R2 = 00h
³ There are two or less data lines where keys are entered, and no
multiple keys are entered on a data line. In this case, the total
number of keys entered is 1 or 2, thus representing valid key
input.
Example) State (d)
2 When R2 0 00h
³ There are two or less data lines where keys are entered, and
multiple keys are entered on a data line. Go to (5).
(5) Decision 3
1 When there is one data line where keys are entered ³ Go to (6).
2 When there are two data lines where keys are entered
³ Three or more keys are entered, thus representing invalid key
input.
Example) State (e)
(6) The result of subtraction (R2) is added to the OR (R1). When the result
of addition is 00h, the total number of keys entered is 2.
Example) State (b): R1 + R2 = 04h + FCh = 00h
State (c): R1 + R2 = 04h + F8h = FCh
(7) Decision 4
1 When R1 + R2 = 00h
³ There is one data line where keys are entered, and two keys are
entered on the data line. This means that the total number of
keys entered is 2, representing valid key input.
Example) State (b)
2 R1 + R2 0 00h
³ Three or more keys are entered on a data line, thus representing
invalid key input.
Example) State (c)
(8) Only when valid key input is confirmed by decisions 1 through 4, all
DI data (Xm+4 to Xm+11) is used by the ladder program.
366
www.plcworld.cn
10.12.15
Operator’s Panel
Override rotary switch Emergency stop switch
Key switches
(sheet keys)
The circle on each
key switch repre-
sents an LED (red).
Program protect key
Fig. 10.12.15 (a) Front view of machine operator’s panel for small unit (T series)
367
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 10.12.15 (b) Front view of machine operator’s panel for small unit (M series)
368
www.plcworld.cn
Program protect key
Key switches
(sheet keys)
The circle on each
key switch repre-
sents an LED (red).
(Coordinate)
Manual pulse
Override rotary switch generator
Emergency stop button
Fig. 10.12.15 (c) Front view of machine operator’s panel for standard unit (T series)
369
www.plcworld.cn
(Coordinate)
Fig. 10.12.15 (d) Front view of machine operator’s panel for standard unit (M series)
370
www.plcworld.cn
D Symbol indication on
machine operator’s
panel
Front view of the key
sheets
(1) M series, full keypad
(2) M series, small keypad
371
www.plcworld.cn
(3) T series, full keypad
(4) T series, small keypad
372
www.plcworld.cn
D Meanings of keys
English Symbol Meaning of key
indication indication
AUTO AUTO mode selection signal: Sets automatic

operation mode.
EDIT EDIT mode selection signal: Sets program edit

mode.
MDI MDI mode selection: Sets MDI mode.
JOG JOG feed mode selection: Sets jog feed mode.
INC Step feed mode selection: Sets step feed mode.

JOG
MPG Manual handle feed mode selection: Sets

manual handle feed mode.
MPG First handle selection in manual handle feed

X1 mode: Sets manual handle feed mode, then
enables the first handle.
MPG Second handle selection in manual handle feed

X2 mode: Sets manual handle feed mode, then
enables the second handle.
HOME Reference position return mode selection: Sets

reference position return mode.
TEACH Teach–in jog (teach–in handle) mode selection

signal: Sets teach–in jog (teach–in handle)
mode.
OFSET Offset write mode selection signal: Sets tool

MESUR offset value setting mode.
? NC alarm signal (output only): Turns on the LED

NC lamp on the button when an alarm is issued on
the NC.
? Machine alarm signal (output only): Turns on the

MC LED on the button when an alarm is issued on
the machine.
SINGL Single block signal: Executes programs one by

BLOCK one. This key is used to check a program.
BLOCK Block delete (optional block skip): Skips the

DELET execution of the blocks starting with the first
block prefixed with / and ending with the end of
block (;) when this button is pressed during
automatic operation.
373
www.plcworld.cn

PRG Program stop (output only): Turns on the LED on

STOP the button when automatic operation is stopped
by M00 specified in the program.
OPT Optional stop: Stops automatic operation after

STOP execution of the block of a program where M01
is specified, when this button is pressed.
DRY Dry run: Sets the axis feedrate to the jog feedrate
RUN instead of a programmed feedrate when
automatic operation is performed by setting this
button to on. This function is used to check only
the movement of the tool when no workpiece is
mounted.
PRG Machine lock: Updates only position display on

TEST the screen without making any axis movement,
when automatic operation is performed by
setting this button to on. This function is used to
check a program.
MPG Manual handle feed X–axis selection: Performs

X movement along the X–axis when this button is
set to on in manual handle feed mode. (The
same operation is performed for the Y–axis,
Z–axis, C–axis, and four axes).
WORK Workpiece light: Illuminates the workpiece.

LIGHT
MPG Manual handle interrupt: Adds the amount of

INTRT travel made by turning the manual handle to the
amount of travel specified in the program, when
this button is set to on in manual operation.
AXIS Axis movement inhibition: Inhibits movement on

INHBT a particular axis or all axes.
LOW Upper) Jog feed (step feed) override: Overrides

X1 jog feed (or step feed).
Five–step indication
MEDL Lower) Manual handle feed magnification:

X10 Magnification for manual handle feed.
Magnified by 1, 10, 100, 1000.
MED
X100
etc.
+X Manual feed axis direction selection: Performs

movement along the selected axis in the
selected direction by jog feed (or step feed) when
this button is set to on in the jog feed mode (or
step feed mode). (The same operation is
performed for –X, +Y, –Y, +Z, and so forth.)
TRVRS Traverse: Performs jog feed at rapid traverse

rate when this button is set to on.
374
www.plcworld.cn

CYCLE Cycle start: Starts automatic operation.

START
CYCLE Cycle stop: Stops automatic operation.

STOP
CLNT Coolant on: Start the supply of coolant.

ON
CLNT Coolant off: Stops the supply of coolant.

OFF
CLNT Coolant automatic: Starts and stops the supply

AUTO of coolant automatically.
SPDL Spindle override 100%: Sets an override of

100% 100% for the spindle motor speed.
SPDL Spindle deceleration: Decelerates the spindle

DEC motor rotation.
SPDL Spindle acceleration: Accelerates the spindle

INC motor rotation.
SPDL Positive spindle rotation direction: Rotates the

CW spindle motor in the positive direction.
SPDL Negative spindle rotation direction: Rotates the

CCW spindle motor in the negative direction.
SPDL Spindle stop: Stops the spindle motor rotation.

STOP
SPDL Manual spindle feed: Rotates the spindle motor

JOG manually.
375
www.plcworld.cn
11. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL B–63003EN/04
11 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
Using the emergency stop signal effectively enables the design of safe
WARNING machine tools.
The emergency stop signal is provided to bring a machine tool to an
emergency stop. It is input to the CNC controller, servo amplifier, and
spindle amplifier. An emergency stop signal is usually generated by
closing the B contact of a pushbutton switch.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNC
controller enters the emergency stop released state, such that the servo and
spindle motors can be controlled and operated.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact opens, the CNC
controller is reset and enters the emergency stop state, and the servo and
spindle motors are decelerated to a stop.
Shutting off the servo amplifier power causes a dynamic brake to be
applied to the servo motor. Even when a dynamic brake is applied,
however, a servo motor attached to a vertical axis can move under the
force of gravity. To overcome this problem, use a servo motor with a
brake.
While the spindle motor is running, shutting off the motor–driving power
to the spindle amplifier allows the spindle motor to continue running
under its own inertia, which is quite dangerous. When the emergency stop
signal (*ESP) contact opens, it is necessary to confirm that the spindle
motor has been decelerated to a stop, before the spindle motor power is
shut off.
The FANUC servo amplifier α series products are designed to satisfy the
above requirements. The emergency stop signal should be input to the
power supply module (called the PSM). The PSM outputs a motor power
MCC control signal, which can be used to switch the power applied to the
power supply module on and off.
The CNC controller is designed to detect overtravel by using a software
limit function. Normally, no hardware limit switch is required to detect
overtravel. If the machine goes beyond a software limit because of a servo
feedback failure, however, it is necessary to provide a stroke end limit
switch, connected so that the emergency stop signal can be used to stop
the machine.
Fig. 11 shows an example showing how to use the emergency stop signal
with this CNC controller and α series control amplifier.
376
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 11. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
Stroke end limit switch Emergency

stop button
+X –X +Y –Y +Z –Z +4 –4
Relay
power
Release switch
Spark killer
SK
EMG
Relay
CNC control unit
emg1
+24
*ESP
α series control amplifier SVM

(PSM) SPM
emg2
+24
*ESP
MCCOFF3
MCCOFF4
External power source
L1 L2 L3
Spark killer
SK
3φ
Coil
200VAC
L1
L2
L3
Circuit breaker 1 MCC AC reactor
Fig. 11
WARNING
To use a spindle motor and amplifier produced by a manufacturer other than FANUC, refer to
the corresponding documentation as well as this manual. Design the emergency stop
sequence such that, if the emergency stop signal contact opens while the spindle motor is
rotating, the spindle motor is decelerated until it stops.
377
www.plcworld.cn
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE

(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2) B–63003EN/04
REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
12 (INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
378
www.plcworld.cn

B–63003EN/04 (INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
12.1 When the remote buffer is connected to the host computer or input/output
device via serial interface, a great amount of data can be sent to CNC
GENERAL consecutively at a high speed.
RS–232–C RS–422
interface interface
FILE
POWER READY PROTECT ALARM
FILE RESET
PROTECT
Use either the RS–232–C or RS–422 interface.

(Case of Remote Buffer)
The remote buffer enables the following operations:

D When connected to the host computer online, it performs DNC
operation with high reliability and at a high speed.
D The CNC program and parameters can be down–loaded from the host
computer.
D When connected to an input/output device, it enables DNC operation,
and various data can be down–loaded. The following input/output
devices can be connected.
- FANUC PPR
- FANUC FA Card
- FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE
- FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate
- FANUC Handy File
Hereafter, the device to which the remote buffer is connected is called
the host computer.
379
www.plcworld.cn

Explanations
D Interface between the - Electrical interface
remote buffer and host The following two types of interface are prepared as standard
computer specifications.
D RS–232–C Interface
D RS–422 Interface
RS–233C RS–422
Serial voltage interface Balanced transmission serial

Interface
(start–stop) interface (start–stop)
Baud rate 50 to 19,200 BPS 50 to 86,400 BPS (*)
100m (4800BPS or less) Approx. 800 m (9600 BPS or

Cable
50m (9600BPS) less)
length
Varies according to I/O device. 50m (19,200 BPS or more)
- Software interface
The following three protocols are prepared as the communication
protocols between the remote buffer and host computer. The protocol
can be selected by a parameter according to the specifications of the
device to be connected.
Protocol Features Interface Maximum
transfer rate
Protocol A Handshake method. Sending and RS–232–C 19200 BPS

receiving are repeated between two
stations. RS–422 86400 BPS
Extended Similar to protocol A. Enables RS–422 86400 BPS

protocol A high–speed transfer of the NC program
to meet high–speed DNC operation.
Protocol B Controls communication with control RS–232–C 19200 BPS

codes output from the remote buffer.
RS–422 86400 BPS
NOTE
(*) The average data transfer rate is lower than the maximum
transfer rate.
FANUC DNC2 is a communication protocol that provides an RS–232–C

interface between the CNC and a personal computer (PC). This interface
enables the CNC and PC to exchange data with each other. The hardware
used to connect the CNC and PC is the same as that used for remote buffer
connection.
For information about the specifications and other details of FANUC
DNC2, refer to “FANUC DNC2 Description (B–61992E).”
FANUC DNC1, developed by FANUC, is a high–speed network
supporting cell–based communication.
The hardware connection and other specifications of the DNC1 function
are explained. When using DNC1, refer to the following document.
Title Number
FANUC DNC1 Description B–61782E
380
www.plcworld.cn

12.2
REMOTE BUFFER CNC OPTION board Host computer (example)
INTERFACE JD28A [JD5L]
(RS–232–C) (PCR–EV20LMDETZ–SL) DBM–25S
1 RD 11 SD 1 FG
14
2 0V 12 0V 2 SD
15
3 DR 13 ER 3 RD
16
4 0V 14 0V 4 RS
17
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS
18
6 0V 16 0V 6 DR
19
7 CD 17 7 SG
The connector name 20 ER
8 0V 18 8 CD
in brackets [ ] is for 21
9 19 (+24V) 9
when the separate 22
10 (+24V) 20 type series is used. 10
23
11
24
12
25
13
Conceptional diagram of signal connection
CNC side Host side

Output SD SD
RD RD
Input
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
0V FG FG
NOTE
1 24V power supply of the equipment made by FANUC
RS–232–C is not prepared in CNC side connector JD28A
or JD5L. Set up the power supply by the machine tool
builder if it is necessary. No.10 and No.19 (+24V) cannot be
used. Do not connect to these pins.
2 Do not connect to any pins not marked with a signal name.
381
www.plcworld.cn

Cable wiring
1 2
RD SD
2
0V
3 20
DR ER
4
0V
5 4
CS RS
6
0V
7 8
CD CD
8
0V
9
10
+24V
11 3
SD RD
12
0V
13 6
ER DR
14
0V
15 5
RS CS
16 7
0V SG
17
18
19 1
+24V FG
20 Shield
Connect CS to RS if CS is not used. However, when protocol A or

expanded protocol A is used, connect as shown above because CS is used
for busy control. Connect DR to ER when DR is not used. Be sure to
connect CD to ER.
382
www.plcworld.cn

12.3
REMOTE BUFFER CNC OPTION–1 board Host computer (Example)
INTERFACE (RS–422) JD6A
1 FG
(PCR–EV20LMDETZ–SL) 20
2
21
1 RD 11 SD 3
22 *SD
2 *RD 12 *SD 4 SD
23
3 RT 13 TT 5
24 *RD
4 *RT 14 *TT 6 RD
25 *RS
5 CS 15 RS 7 RS
26 *RT
6 *CS 16 *RS 8 RT
27 *CS
7 DM 17 TR 9 CS
28
8 0V 18 *TR 10
29 *DM
9 *DM 19 (+24V) 11 DM
30 *TR
10 (+24V) 20 12 TR
31
13
32
(+24V) is not used. 14
33
15
34
16
35 *TT
17 TT
36
18
37
19 SG
Conceptional diagram of The figure below shows a signal connection between CNC and a host
signal connection computer. Since signals other than FG and SG perform differential signal
transmission, two wires of signal lines are used for those signals.
Conceptional diagram of signal connection
CNC side Host side

Output SD SD
Input RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
TR TR
DM DM
TT TT
RT RT
SG SG
0V FG FG
383
www.plcworld.cn

Actual example of
RS–422 signal wiring Cable wiring
1 4
RD SD
2 22
*RD *SD
3 17
RT TT
4 35
*RT *TT
5 7
CS RS
6 25
*CS *RS
7 12
DM TR
9 30
*DM *TR
8 19
0V SG
10
+24V
11 6
SD RD
12 24
*SD *RD
13 8
TT RT
14 26
*TT *RT
15 9
RS CS
16 27
*RS *CS
17 11
TR DM
18 29
*TR *DM
19 1
+24V FG
20 Shield
FRAME
NOTE
1 Be sure to use twisted pair cable.
2 Note that the pin position of the *DM signal on the CNC side
is positioned irregularly relative to the other signals. This is
to reduce the risk of damage to the circuit when this
connector is erroneously connected to the connector on the
other side.
384
www.plcworld.cn

12.4
DNC2 INTERFACE CNC OPTION–1 board Host computer (Example)
(RS–232–C) JD28A
(PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL) DBM–25S
1 RD 11 SD 1 FG
14
2 0V 12 0V 2 SD
15
3 DR 13 ER 3 RD
16
4 0V 14 0V 4 RS
17
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS
18
6 0V 16 0V 6 DR
19
7 CD 17 7 SG
20 ER
8 0V 18 8 CD
21
9 19 9
22
10 20 10
23
11
24
12
25
13
Conceptional diagram
of signal connection
CNC side Host side

Output SD SD
Input RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
0V FG FG
FRAME
Connect CS to RS when CS is not used.

Connect DR to ER when DR is not used.
Always connect CD to ER.
NOTE
When an IBM PC/AT is used, the RS signal goes low in the
reception phase. In this case, connect CS on the host side
to ER on the same side.
385
www.plcworld.cn

12.5
DNC1 INTERFACE
12.5.1
Multipoint Connection
CNC OPTION board Tap
JD6A
(PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL) (MR–20RMD) Male
1 TRD1(+) 11 TRD2(+) 1 TRD2(+) 14

8
2 TRD1(–) 12 TRD2(–) 2 TRD2(–) 15
9
3 13 3 16
10 TRD1(+)
4 14 4 17
11 TRD1(–)
5 15 5 18
12
6 16 6 19
13
7 17 7 SG 20
8 SG 18
9 19
10 20
Cable wiring
1 10
TDR1(+) TRD1(+)
2 11
TDR1(–) TRD1(–)
11 1
TDR2(+) TRD2(+)
12 2
TDR2(–) TRD2(–)
8 7
SG SG
PCR Connector MR Connector

(MR20 Female)
386
www.plcworld.cn

12.5.2
Point–to–point
CNC OPTION board Tap
Connection JD6A
(PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL) (MR–20RMD) Male
1 RD 11 SD 1 SD 14 CS
8 TT
2 :RD 12 :SD 2 :SD 15 :CS
9 :TT
3 RT 13 TT 3 TR 16
10 RD
4 :RT 14 :TT 4 :TR 17
11 :RD
5 CS 15 RS 5 RS 18 RT
12 DM
6 :CS 16 :RS 6 :RS 19 :RT
13 :DM
7 DM 17 TR 7 SG 20
8 SG 18 :TR
9 :DM 19
10 20
Cable wiring
11 1
SD SD
12 2
:SD :SD
1 10
RD RD
2 11
:RD :RD
13 8
TT TT
14 9
:TT :TT
3 18
RT RT
4 19
:RT :RT
15 5
RS RS
16 6
:RS :RS
5 14
CS CS
6 15
:CS :CS
7 12
DM DM
9 13
:DM :DM
17 3
TR TR
18 4
:TR :TR
8 7
SG SG
Shielded twisted cable

of 0.3 mm2 or more MR20 (female)
(Honda Tsushin)
387
www.plcworld.cn
13. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B–63003EN/04
13 HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
388
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 13. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
13.1 The high–speed serial bus (HSSB) enables the high–speed transfer of
large amounts of data between a commercially available IBM PC or
OVERVIEW compatible personal computer and a CNC, by connecting them via a
high–speed optical fiber.
On the CNC, the HSSB interface board is installed in a minislot. On the
personal computer, an appropriate interface board is installed.
13.2 The use of the HSSB requires an IBM PC/AT compatible computer or
FANUC intelligent terminal. The machine tool builder or end user is
CAUTIONS required to procure and maintain the personal computer.
To enable the use of the HSSB, Windows 95 or Windows NT must have
been installed on the personal computer.
FANUC owns the copyright for the HSSB device driver.
The software mentioned above and the contents of the related manuals
may not be used or reproduced in part or whole without the prior written
permission of FANUC.
NOTE
1 IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corp. of the US.
2 Windows 95 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. of
the US.
3 The company and product names mentioned in this manual
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective
companies.
389
www.plcworld.cn
13.3
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM
PC/AT compatible personal computer
HSSB interface board on the CNC
High–speed
serial bus Personal computer interface board
(Installed in an ISA slot)
Optical fiber cable
This figure is an example of connecting the I/O Link to

an i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted type panel.
390
www.plcworld.cn
13.4
PERSONAL
CAUTION
COMPUTER 1 The machine tool builder or end user is required to procure
SPECIFICATION and maintain the personal computer.
2 FANUC is not liable for any problems resulting from the
operation of users’ personal computers, regardless of
whether the operations are normal or abnormal.
(1) The personal computer interface board complies with the ISA
standard. It can be used in the PC/AT and compatibles. (The CPU of
the personal computer must be a 486 or better.
(2) The following address space is used to control the high–speed serial
bus. This space cannot be used by other functions or extension boards.
D 16 bytes of ISA I/O space corresponding to the addresses specified
with the setting switch, as explained in Section 13.6
(3) The connections between the selected personal computer and CNC
controller should be tested before they are used for actual production.
(4) The personal computer interface boards require as below.
1ch +5V, 1A
2ch +5V, 1.5A
13.5 (1) Personal computer interface boards

INSTALLATION The same environmental conditions as those for the installation of the
personal computer must be satisfied.
ENVIRONMENT
(2) CNC interface board
The same environmental conditions as those described earlier for the
installation of the CNC control unit must be satisfied.
391
www.plcworld.cn
13.6
PROCEDURE FOR
WARNING
INSTALLING Before starting to mount or remove a personal computer
PERSONAL interface board, switch off the personal computer and its
COMPUTER peripheral devices, and disconnect their power supply
cables. Otherwise, there is a serious danger of electric
INTERFACE BOARDS
shock.
(1) Set the I/O addresses before installing the board. Set I/O base
addresses which do not overlap the I/O address areas exclusively used
by the personal computer and ISA expansion board. (See the figure
below.)
When using multiple personal computer interface boards, set the I/O
base addresses so that those addresses do not overlap each other.
(2) Remove the blank panel from the expansion slot of the personal
computer.
(3) Insert the interface board. Ensure that it has been completely inserted
into the ISA connector.
(4) Fix the metal brackets with screws.
CAUTION
Do NOT touch the edge terminals (the contacts that engage
with a mating connector) of the interface board.
Setting for general edition 01A

Bit b1 b2 b3 b4
L M N
Set value 0 0 1 0 (0 to Fh)
(binary) Example Binary–to–hexadecimal
Hexadecimal 2 conversion
value b1234
The I/O base address of the
1 interface board is:
0
(Side view) LMN 0 h *
(Top view) Factory–set as follows:

L =0
M =2
A15 A04 N =8
L M N
Personal computer
interface board 2
Setting for general edition 02A and later
* If the base address is LMN0h, the interface board can use LMN0h to LMNFh.
I/O base address setting

(for personal computer interface board type 2 (A20B–8100–0100))
392
www.plcworld.cn
Personal computer
interface boards
A20B–8001–0583 New type 2
(When viewed from The I/O base address of the

the top of the board) interface board is LMN0h(*1).
The factory settings are as follows:
A20B–8001–0583
L, M, N = 0, 2, 8 for channel A
(COP7A)
Channel A A20B–8001–0582
L M N L, M, N = 0, 2, 8 for channel A
(COP7A)
L, M, N = 0, 2, 9 for channel B
(COP7B)
A20B–8001–0582
Channel A
Channel B
*1 When the base address is LMN0h, LMN0h to LMNFh are used.
I/O base address setting

(for personal computer interface board of new type 2 (A20–B–8100–0582, –0583))
393
www.plcworld.cn
13.7 (1) Personal computer interface board

HANDLING (A) Electrostatic interference
The personal computer interface board is shipped in an anti–static
PRECAUTIONS bag. To store or transport the interface board, always place it in
the anti–static bag. Before removing the interface board from the
anti–static bag, ground your body.
(B) Protection of card edge terminals
When handling the personal computer interface board, do NOT
touch its card edge terminals (the gold–plated contacts which
engage with a mating connector). If you accidentally touch any
card edge terminal, wipe it gently with clean or ethyl
alcohol–dipped tissue paper or absorbent cotton. Do not use any
organic solvent other than ethyl alcohol.
(2) Optical connector and fiber cable
See Appendix D.
13.8
RECOMMENDED
Personal computer
CABLES CNC interface card interface card
Optical fiber cable
COP7 COP7
Compatible cables (optical fiber cables, used for interconnections)

A66L–6001–0026#L
For an explanation of the cable length and other related information, see
Appendix D.
NOTE
An optical fiber cable of up to 100 m can be used only when
the NC side interface board A02B–0236–J202 (printed
circuit board drawing number: A20B–8001–0641) is used
with the personal computer interface board
(A20B–8001–0582 or –0583).
394
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 14. CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS
14 CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS
The i Series CNC can be connected to the following networks. For an

explanation of how to make the connection, refer to the manuals listed
below:
Manual title Manual code
FANUC I/O Link–II Connection Manual B–62714EN
FANUC Data Server Operator’s Manual B–62694EN
FANUC Ethernet Board Operator’s Manual B–63354EN
FANUC Profibus–DP Board Operator’s Manual B–62924EN
FANUC DeviceNet Board Operator’s Manual B–63404EN
395
www.plcworld.cn
15. CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE

Series 160is/180is/210is B–63003EN/04
15 CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE

Series 160is/180is/210is
396
www.plcworld.cn

B–63003EN/04 Series 160is/180is/210is
15.1
OVERALL
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM
160is/180is/210is
control unit
24V–IN (CP1A)
24V–OUT (CP1B)
SPDL&POS (JA41)
I/O LINK (JD1A)

Connection of the connectors on the left is common to the
A–OUT&HDI (JA40) Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i
R232–1 (JD36A)
R232–2 (JD36B)
SV–CHK (CA54)
MDI (CA55)
PC side R232 (JD40) RS–232C I/O device

PC (during remote debugging)
ETHERNET (CD38) HUB
Ethernet lead
Backup unit
BACKUP POWER–IN
(CN9)
397
www.plcworld.cn

15.2
INSTALLATION
15.2.1
Names of Control Unit
Parts and Connector
Layout
CNC control unit (rear view)

(This figure shows basic parts without option slots.)
* The depth of the unit varies according to the number of option slots.
* For details on the external dimensions of the unit, refer to Appendix
A “External Dimensions of Units, Figure U4.”
15.2.2 For details on the installation environment conditions, refer to the

environment conditions of the displayed–integrated type control unit
Installation
with PC functions.
Environment
Conditions of Control
Unit
398
www.plcworld.cn

15.3
CONNECTING TO
PERIPHERAL
DEVICES
15.3.1
Backup Unit
CNC Backup unit
CN9 CN9
JAE LY20–20P–DTI–P JAE LY20–20P–DTI–P
A B A B
1 +24V +24V 1 +24V +24V
2 BU1 BU2 2 BU1 BU2
3 BU9 BU10 3 BU9 BU10
4 BU11 BU12 Japan Aviatronics Industries 4 BU11 BU12
5 BU3 BU4 LY10–DC20 (housing) 5 BU3 BU4
LY10–C2–3–10000(contact)
6 BU5 BU6 6 BU5 BU6
A02B–0236–K303
7 BU7 BU8 7 BU7 BU8
8 GND VCC 8 GND VCC
9 GND VCC 9 GND VCC
10 GND VCC 10 GND VCC
CNC Backup
CN9 CN9
A1 A1
+24V +24V
B1 B1
+24V +24V
A2 A2
BU1 BU1 Recommended cable specifications:
B2 B2 A02B–0269–K801 (50cm)
BU2 BU2 Recommended wire material specifications:
A3 A3
BU9 BU9 A66L–0001–0284#10P
B3 B3 (#28AWGX10 pair)
BU10 BU10
A4 A4
BU11 BU11
B4 B4
BU12 BU12 Note) Keep the cable lead to within 50 cm.
A5 A5
BU3 BU3
B5 B5
BU4 BU4
A6 A6
BU5 BU5
B6 B6
BU6 BU6
A7 A7
BU7 BU7
B7 B7
BU8 BU8
A8 A8
GND GND
B8 B8
VCC VCC
A9 A9
GND GND
B9 B9
VCC VCC
A10 A10
GND GND
B10 B10
VCC VCC
Shield
Ground plate
399
www.plcworld.cn

(i) Backup unit external dimensions

Connector
150
12
104 64
28
139 58
4–φ4.8
1.0
Drawing of the 64
4–M4 hole for setting
139
400
www.plcworld.cn

(ii)Installation of backup unit

Install the backup unit either on the rear side of the MDI unit or in the
pendant box housed in the CNC body.
The backup unit uses parts that have a fixed service life. So, decide on
an installation position where the backup unit can be easily replaced.
(Example of installation on rear side of MDI unit)
Clamp fixture Clamp

CNC body
!

""
"
#!"

Connector

Backup unit
Clamp
NOTE
1 As the fitting on the connector of the backup unit cable is a
simple lock type, be sure to clamp near to the connector as
shown in the figure to prevent the connector from being
tugged by the cable’s weight.
2 M4 screw holes are drilled on the rear of the MDI unit for
installation.
401
www.plcworld.cn

15.3.2
Ethernet (10Base–T)
CNC
CD38 HUB
1 TX+ 1 TX+
2 TX- 2 TX-
3 RX+ 3 RX+
4 4
5 5
6 RX- 6 RX-
7 7
8 8
CD38 HUB
1 1
TX+ TX+
Control unit
2 2
TX- TX-
3 3
RX+ RX+
6 6
RX– RX–
Shield
Twisted pair
cable
CL222–1328–1328 (for STP cable)

(Hirose Electronics Co., Ltd.) or equivalent part

DTS5087 (Furukawa Electric Industries) Clamp fixture
F–4PFWMF (Shiroboshi Electric Co., Ltd.)
NOTE
1 Shield or clamp the Ethernet cable in the same way as other
cables that are led into the CNC. For details on how to clamp
the cable, refer to the top right figure.
2 The recommended cable cannot be used on moving parts.
3 The connector pin Nos. are as follows.
402
www.plcworld.cn

PCB side Cable side

8
15.3.3 This connector (JD40) is for the RS–232C serial port on the personal
Serial Port computer. Use this port for remote debugging when developing
application software.
CNC Relay connector (example 1) Relay connector (example 2)

D–SUB 25 D–SUB 9
JD40 1 FG 1 CD
14 6 DR
PCR–E20MD 2 SD 2 RD
15 7 RS
RD 11 SD 3 RD 3 SD
1 16 8 CS
2 0V 12 0V 4 RS 4 ER
17 9 RI
3 Reserve 13 Reserve 5 CS 5 SG
18
4 0V 14 0V 6 DR
19
5 CS 15 RS Shield 7 SG
20 ER
6 Reserve 16 Reserve 8 CD
21
7 CD 17 Reserve 9
22 RI
8 Reserve 18 Reserve 10
23
24
25
13
(i) Wiring (example 1: when converting to D–SUB 25–pin)
Relay connector
D–SUB 25 (example 1)
JD40
11 02
SD SD
01 03
RD RD
15 04 Recommended wire material specifications:
RS RS A66L–0001–0284#10P
05 05 (#28AWGX10 pair)
CS CS
06 JD40 recommend cable connector
DR
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin)
20
ER F130–20S (Hirose Electric)
07 08 FCN–247J0202–G/E (Fujitsu)
CD CD
52622–2011 (Japan Morex)
22
RI
02,12 07
0V SG
04,14 01
Shield FG
Ground plate GND
403
www.plcworld.cn

(ii)Wiring (example 2: when converting to D–SUB 9–pin)
PC serial port
JD40 D–SUB 9 (example 2)
SD 11 3 SD
RD 01 2 RD
RS 15 7 RS
CS 05 8 CS
6 DR
4 ER
CD 07 1 CD
9 RI
0V 02,12 5 SG
04,14
Shield
Ground plate
(iii) Wiring (example 3: when connecting to a PC for remote debugging)
Relay connector
D–SUB 9
JD40 (example 3)
11 3
SD SD
01 2
RD RD
15 7
RS RS
05 8
CS CS
6
DR
4
ER
07 1
CD CD
9
RI
02,12 , 5
0V SG
04,14
Shield
Ground plate
NOTE
Before you make the cable, check the pin layout of the
connector on the PC when the control unit is connected to
a PC for use.
404
www.plcworld.cn
APPENDIX
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
A EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
(Outline Drawings of the i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted Type Panel)

Outline drawing title Specification drawing number Figure
Series 16i/18i/21i/20i control unit 7.2″ STN A02B–0236–B531, B532, B533, B538 Fig. U1
monochrome LCD A02B–0238–B531, B532, B533, B538
panel A02B–0247–B531, B532, B535, B536
8.4″ TFT color LCD A02B–0236–B501, B502, B503, B508 Fig. U2
panel A02B–0238–B501, B502, B503, B508
A02B–0247–B501, B502, B505, B506
A02B–0277–B501, B502, B505, B506
9.5″ STN A02B–0236–B541, B542, B543, B548 Fig. U3
monochrome LCD A02B–0238–B541, B542, B543, B548
panel A02B–0247–B541, B542, B545, B546
10.4″ TFT color A02B–0236–B611, B612, B613, B618 Fig. U4
LCD panel B621, B622, B623, B628
A02B–0238–B611, B612, B613, B618
B621, B622, B623, B628
A02B–0247–B611, B612, B615, B615
B621, B622, B625, B625
Series 160i/180i/210i control unit 10.4″ TFT color A02B–0236–B751, B752, B753, B758
LCD panel B761, B762, B763, B768
B771, B772, B773, B778
A02B–0238–B751, B752, B753, B758
B761, B762, B763, B768
B771, B772, B773, B778
A02B–0247–B751, B752, B755, B756
B761, B762, B765, B766
B771, B772, B775, B776
(Outline Drawings of the i Series CNC with a Stand–alone Type Unit)

Series 16i/18i/21i and Series 160i/180i/210i control units A02B–0265–B501, B503, Fig. U6
A02B–0266–B501, B503
A02B–0267–B501
10.4″/9.5″ LCD unit A02B–0265–C071, C061 Fig. U7
7.2″ LCD/MDI unit A02B–0166–C261#TR, R, TS, S Fig. U8
7.2″ monochrome LCD unit A02B–0166–C251 Fig. U9
MDI unit (for 7.2″ LCD) A02B–0166–C210#TR, TS, R, S Fig. U10
Detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit A02B–0166–C271#TR, TS, R, S Fig. U11
Intelligent terminal (without ISA expansion) A13B–0178–B025, B026, B027 Fig. U12
A13B–0178–H040
Intelligent terminal (with ISA expansion)
407
www.plcworld.cn
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63003EN/04
(Outline drawings of other units)

Stand–alone type small For 7.2″/8.4″ panel A02B–0236–C120#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS Fig. U13
MDI unit
Stand–alone type For 7.2″/8.4″ panel A02B–0236–C121#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS Fig. U14
standard MDI unit
Stand–alone type For 9.5″/10.4″ LCD panel A02B–0236–C125#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS Fig. U15
standard MDI unit
(horizontal type)
Stand–alone type For 9.5″/10.4″ LCD panel A02B–0236–C126#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS Fig. U16
standard MDI unit A02B–0236–C127#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS
(vertical type)
FA typewriter–style keyboard A02B–0236–C130#EC, JC, Fig. U17 (a)
A02B–0234–C120#EC, JC
FA typewriter–style keyboard Fig. U17 (b)
(with hard disk + personal computer interface connection unit
+ ISA expansion board)
Typewriter–style keyboard (for debugging purposes) A86L–0001– 0210, 0211 Fig. U18
Mouse (for debugging purposes) A86L–0001– 0212 Fig. U19
Floppy disk unit (for debugging purposes) A02B–0207–C006 Fig. U20
HSSB interface board type 2 on the personal computer side A02B–8100–0100 Fig. U21 (a)
HSSB interface board type 2 (1CH) on the personal computer A02B–8001–0583 Fig. U21 (b)
side
HSSB interface board type 2 (2CH) on the personal computer A02B–8001–0582
side
Position coder 4000 rpm A86L–0027– 0001#102 Fig. U22 (a)
6000 rpm A86L–0027– 0001#002
α position coder 10000 rpm A860–0309– T302 Fig. U22 (b)
Manual pulse generator A860–0202– T001 Fig. U23
Pendant manual pulse generator A860–0202– T004 to T015 Fig. U24
Separate detector interface unit A02B–0236–C203, C204 Fig. U25
Battery case for separate detector interface unit (ABS) A06B–6050–K060 Fig. U26
Tap unit for DNC1 A13B–0156–C100 Fig. U27
Terminating resistance unit for DNC1 A13B–0156–C200 Fig. U28
CNC battery unit for external installation A02B–0236–C281 Fig. U29
Punch panel (narrow 1 m A02B–0236–C191 Fig. U30
type)
2m A02B–0236–C192
5m A02B–0236–C193
Punch panel (narrow 1 m A02B–0120–C191 Fig. U31
type)
2m A02B–0120–C192
5m A02B–0120–C193
Distribution I/O small machine operator’s panel A02B–0236–C141#TBR, #MBR#TBS, #MBS Fig. U32
Distribution I/O standard machine operator’s panel A02B–0236–C140#TBR, #MBR#TBS, #MBS Fig. U33
408
www.plcworld.cn
61–key MDI unit For use with the FS16i/18i/21i. Can A02B–0261–C161#MCR, #MCS Fig. U34
(vertical type) be used as either the stand–alone or A02B–0261–C163#MCR, #MCS
LCD–mounted type.
For use with the FS160i/180i/210i.
Can be used as either the 10.4”
LCD–separated or LCD–mounted
type.
61–key MDI unit For use with the FS16i/18i/21i. Can A02B–0261–C162#MCR, #MCS Fig. U35
(horizontal type) be used as either the stand–alone or A02B–0261–C164#MCR, #MCS
LCD–mounted type.
For use with the FS160i/180i/210i.
Can be used as the 10.4”
LCD–separated type only.
61–key MDI unit For use with the FS160i/180i/210i. A02B–0261–C165#MCR, #MCS Fig. U36
(vertical type) Can be used as either the 12.1”
LCD–separated or LCD–mounted
type.
61–key MDI unit For use with the FS160i/180i/210i. A02B–0261–C166#MCR, #MCS Fig. U37
(horizontal type) Can be used as the 12.1”
LCD–separated type only.
Blank panel Supplied with the 61–key MDI unit Fig. U38
(A02B–0261–C165 and C166).
Distributed I/O machine operator’s panel (290 mm wide) A02B–0236–C150#TBR, #MBR#TBS, #MBS Fig. U39
409
www.plcworld.cn
With 2 option slots
Number of Depth
option slots (D) (mm)
2 110
3 125
4 170 With no option slot
At the rear of the metal

panel, the area within 8
Mounting
mm of the outside edge is
hole diagram
left unpainted.
244
184
5
190 200
Fig. U1 External dimensions of CNC control unit with 7.2″ LCD
410
www.plcworld.cn
With 2 option slots
Number of Depth
2 110
3 125

Mounting
hole diagram
left unpainted.
244
184
5
190 200
411
www.plcworld.cn
With 2 option slots
Number of Depth
2 110
3 125
With no option slot
4 170

panel, the area within 8 Mounting
mm of the outside edge is hole diagram
left unpainted.
274
204
5
210 220
412
www.plcworld.cn
With 2 option slots
Number of Depth
2 110
4 170

panel, the area within 8 Mounting
mm of the outside edge is hole diagram
left unpainted.
274
204
5
210 220
413
www.plcworld.cn
172 (for 3–slot type)

60 (for 1–slot type)
Slot 1
Slot 3 Slot 2
Memory card
Weight: For 1–slot type, 0.7 kg

For 3–slot type, 1.9 kg
For both types, the stated weight does
not include printed–circuit boards in-
serted in the slots.
Fig. U6 i Series Control Unit with Stand–alone Type LCD Unit
414
www.plcworld.cn
5 280 5
5
220
210
5
290
4–f4
4–M3
Mounting hole layout diagram
(The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.)
Painting shall be masked 8 mm from the edges of the panel sheet metal
on the rear surface.
Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium gloss
Fig. U7 10.4″/9.5″ LCD Unit
415
www.plcworld.cn
(Mounting hole layout diagram) Grounding

stud (M4)
Grounding
stud (M4)
The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.
Weight: 3.9 kg Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium gloss
Fig. U8 7.2″ LCD/MDI Unit Outline Drawing
416
www.plcworld.cn
Mounting hole layout diagram
Soft-key connector
Panel cut pattern layout drawing
Grounding stud (M4)

Weight: 1.6 kg Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium gloss
Fig. U9 7.2″ Monochrome LCD Unit Outline Drawing
417
www.plcworld.cn
Grounding stud (M4) (Mounting hole

layout diagram)
Grounding stud (M4)

Weight: 1.3 kg
Fig. U10 MDI Unit (for 7.2″ LCD)
418
www.plcworld.cn
Paint color: For case, Munsell code 5GY3.5/0.5, medium gloss

For panel, Munsell code N3, medium gloss
Weight: 7 kg
Fig. U11 Detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI Unit
419
www.plcworld.cn
5 280 5
5
5210
4–f4
4–M3 Mounting hole layout diagram

(The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.)
Painting shall be masked 8 mm from the edges of the panel sheet metal on the rear surface.
The dashed lines in the drawing indicate the maximum outline if options are added to the
intelligent terminal.
Fig. U12 Intelligent Terminal
420
www.plcworld.cn
5 130 5
5
190
5
4–f4
Mounting hole diagram
At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm of

the outside edge is left unpainted.
Fig. U13 External dimensions of stand–alone type small–size MDI unit
421
www.plcworld.cn

panel, the area within
8 mm of the outside
edge is left unpainted.
Fig. U14 External dimensions of stand–alone type standard MDI unit
422
www.plcworld.cn

8 mm of the outside
Fig. U15 External dimensions of stand–alone type standard MDI unit (horizontal type)
423
www.plcworld.cn

8 mm of the outside
Fig. U16 External dimensions of stand–alone type standard MDI unit (vertical type)
424
www.plcworld.cn
274
204

8 mm of the outside
5
280
5
4–f4
M4 stud
5 210 5
Fig. U17 (a) External dimensions of FA full keyboard
425
www.plcworld.cn
D The personal computer interface connection unit and ISA expansion unit are installed on the back of
the separate MDI unit or FA full keyboard when shipped.
D For panel cutting information, see the panel cut drawing of the separate MDI unit or FA full keyboard.
[Unit: mm]
D Dependent on the ISA board

used and cable connected
*
*
D The separate MDI unit or FA full keyboard with a personal computer interface connection unit and
ISA expansion unit installed can be mounted only under the main body of the CNC.
Main body of CNC
Hard disk unit

+
Personal computer interface Separate MDI unit or
connection unit FA full keyboard
+
ISA expansion unit
Fig. U17 (b) FA full keyboard

(with hard disk + personal computer interface connection unit + ISA expansion unit)
426
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. U18 (a) External dimensions of 101–type full keyboard (English)

Specification No.: A86L–0001–0210
NOTE
This keyboard is not dust–proof. It should be used for program development only. It can be
used at temperatures of between 0 and 40°C.
Fig. U18 (b) External dimensions of 106–type full keyboard (Japanese)

NOTE
This keyboard is not dust–proof. It should be used for program development only. It can be
used at temperatures of between 0 and 40°C.
427
www.plcworld.cn
66±2
13±1
1800± 190
25+1.5
104±2
41.5± 2
1.5±1
Unit : mm
Fig. U19 External dimensions of mouse

NOTE
This mouse is not dust–proof. It should be used for program development only. It can be used
at temperatures of between 0 and 40°C. The mouse is fitted with a 1.8–m cable.
428
www.plcworld.cn
4–M3
134
140
64
(HOLE)
70
5
4–φ3.6
FDD
104
140
150
ACRYLIC
WINDOW
1.6 145
5
5 70 5
Unit: mm
80
Mounting direction
When using the floppy disk unit attached to the machine, mount the floppy disk unit in one of the following directions:
Fig. U20 Floppy disk unit
429
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. U21 (a) External dimensions of high–speed serial bus interface board type 2 (for PC)
Specification No.: A20B–8100–0100
–0582 –0583
Weight: 0.2 kg
Fig. U21 (b) High–speed serial bus interface board type 2 (PC)
Specification No.: A20B–8001–0583 (1 CH)
A20B–8001–0582 (2 CH)
430
www.plcworld.cn
98
30 35
+0.15
–0.11 31
15–0.006
–0.017
14.3+0
2 1.15+0.14
–0
16
–0.009
50 –0.025
68
20
52
72
2
4 f5.4
Key position
5 +0012
MS3102A20–29P
–0
Note: Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows:

+0.05
3 –0 (1) Input axis inertia
1.0 × 10–3 kg⋅cm⋅sec2 or less
(2) Input axis starting torque
1000 g⋅cm or less
(3) Allowable input axis load
Radial load Thrust load

Operating 10 kg or less 5 kg or less
Idle 20 kg or less 10 kg or less
Driving the timing belt with a pulley directly attached to the
position coder shaft may produce an axis load greater than
j56 the allowed maximum.
(4) Weight: Approx. 1 kg (without the flange)
j68
Fig. U22 (a) External dimensions of position coder

Specification No.: A86L–0027–0001#102 (Max. 4000 rpm)
A86L–0027–0001#002 (Max. 6000 rpm)
431
www.plcworld.cn
MS connector: MS3102A–20–29P
Fig. U22 (b) α position coder

Specification No.: A860–0309–T302 (10000 rpm maximum)
432
www.plcworld.cn
8.35
f80.0
f55.0
50.0
30.0
M4X8.0
60.0
On the f72 circumference
PULSE GENERATOR
11.0
FANUC LTD
0V 5V A B
M3 screw terminal
120.0°
Fig. U23 External dimensions of manual pulse generator

Specification No.: A860–0202–T001
433
www.plcworld.cn
A860–0202–T004∼T009
90 38.0
25
M3 screw terminal
140
100.0
39.0
M3 screw terminal
A860–0202–T010∼T015
90 38.0
25
M3 screw terminal
140
100.0
39.0
M3 screw terminal
Fig. U24 External dimensions of pendant–type manual pulse generator

Specification No.: A860–0202–T004 to TT015
434
www.plcworld.cn
COP10B COP10A
JF101
JF102
JF103
JF104
CP11
JA4A
Fig. U25 External dimensions of separate detector interface unit
435
www.plcworld.cn
Negative polarity indication

103
4–M4 counter Positive polarity indication
sinking
Plus terminal
with 3–M3
screw holes
103
93
Minus terminal
with 3–M3
screw holes
FANUC
40
4–f4.3 mounting hole
Arrow view A
14.1
106.3
92.2
13.2
78 78
Note) The battery is not included.

A
Fig. U26 External dimensions of ABS battery case for separate detector
Specification No.: A06B–6050–K060
436
www.plcworld.cn
ÁÁ 50
ÁÁ Á Á Á
ÁÁ Á ÁÁ
25 25
5 5
Á
ÁÁÁ ÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁ ÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
65
Á Á
32.5
1 2 3
ÁÁ
ÁÁ Á
100
35
120
Fig. U27 External dimensions of tap
39.3 16.0
ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
47.0
Fig. U28 External dimensions of terminal resistance unit
437
www.plcworld.cn
Main unit
Cover
103
115
M4 tap × 4
70
81 93
Mounting panel hole drilling

13.5 47
Mounting hole (countersink)
145
The battery unit is fitted with a 14–m battery cable.
Fig. U29 External dimensions of external CNC battery unit
438
www.plcworld.cn
Mounting hole
diagram

left unpainted.
Fig. U30 External dimensions of punch panel (narrow type)
439
www.plcworld.cn
Painting shall be masked 8 mm from the edges of the panel

sheet metal on the rear surface.
The following is the panel cut layout drawing of this punch panel.
100
115
20
2–M3
Fig. U31 Punch Panel (Narrow Type)

Specification No.: A02B–0120–C191 (cable length 1 m)
A02B–0120–C192 (cable length 2 m)
A02B–0120–C193 (cable length 5 m)
440
www.plcworld.cn
Panel cutting drawing
Protection grounding stud (M4, back side)

This metal plate can be removed.
Fig. U32 Distribution I/O small machine operator’s panel
441
www.plcworld.cn
Panel cutting drawing
Protection grounding stud (M4, back side)

This metal plate can be removed.
Fig. U33 Distribution I/O standard machine operator’s panel
442
www.plcworld.cn
The back of the metal plate is masked, 8 mm wide along the

outside edge, to prevent painting.
Up
Protective
grounding stud (M4)
Weight: 2.0kg
Fig. U34 61–key MDI unit (vertical type)
443
www.plcworld.cn

Up
Protective
grounding stud (M4)
Weight: 1.7kg
Fig. U35 61–key MDI unit (horizontal type)
444
B–63003EN/04
www.plcworld.cn
Blank panel
An outline drawing of the blank panel is given in Fig. U38.
Protective
grounding stud (M4)
445
Up
Fig. U36 61–key MDI unit (vertical type)

Connector panel
Weight: 2.0kg
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Protective
www.plcworld.cn

grounding stud (M4)

Up
446
Fig. U37 61–key MDI unit (horizontal type)
Blank panel
Connector panel An outline drawing of the blank panel is given in Fig. U38.
Weight: 2.0kg
B–63003EN/04
B–63003EN/04
www.plcworld.cn
The back of the blank panel is masked,

with a diameter of 10.
447
Fig. U38 Blank panel
The hatched portion is an opening of the
connector panel.
Note) On the back of the plate attached to the panel, coating is masked
around the peripheral area with a width of 8 mm.
Install the unit from the outside of the cabinet.
www.plcworld.cn
This plate is removable. Mounting hole diagram

448
Fig. U39 Distributed I/O machine operator’s panel (290 mm wide)
Weight: 2.0kg
Protective grounding stud (M4) (Back side)
Color: Munsell N3, semi–glossed
B–63003EN/04
www.plcworld.cn
Connectors
Fig. title Specification No. Fig. No.
PCR connector (soldering type) PCR–E20FS Fig.C1 (a)
FI40 connector FI40–2015S Fig.C1 (b)
Connector case (HONDA PCR type) PCR–V20LA/PCR–V20LB Fig.C2 (a)
Connector case (HIROSE FI type) FI–20–CV Fig.C2 (b)
Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type) FCN–240C20–Y/S Fig.C2 (c)
Connector case (HIROSE PCR type) FI–20–CV7 Fig.C2 (d)
AMP connector (1) for servo side AMP1–178128–3 Fig.C3 (a)
AMP connector (2) for servo side AMP2–178128–3 Fig.C3 (b)
AMP connector (3) for +24 V power supply AMP1–178128–3 Fig.C3 (c)
AMP connector (4) for +24 V power supply AMP2–178288–3 Fig.C3 (d)
Contact for AMP connector AMP1–175218–2/5 Fig.C3 (e)

AMP1–175218–2/5
HONDA connector (case) Fig.C4 (a)
HONDA connector (angled case) Fig.C4 (b)
HONDA connector (male) Fig.C4 (c)
HONDA connector (female) Fig.C4 (d)
HONDA connector (terminal layout) Fig.C4 (e)
Connector (Burndy Japan)(3 pins/brown) SMS3PN–5 Fig.C5
Connector for HIROSE flat cable HIF3BB–50D–2.54R Fig.C6

HIT3BB–34D–2.54R
Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI) LY10–DC20 Fig.C7 (a)
Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI) LY10–C2–3 Fig.C7 (b)
Punch panel connector for reader/punch interface Fig.C8 (a)
Locking plate for reader/punch interface connector Fig.C8 (b)
Honda connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board) MRH–50FD Fig. C9
AMP connector (for loader I/O board) AMP178214–1 Fig. C10
A02B–0166–K330 Fig. C11
449
www.plcworld.cn
TYPE : HONDA PCR–E20FS (SOLDERING TYPE)

USAGE : GENERAL
MATING
HOUSING : HONDA PCR–E20L (PLASTIC)
A
n
2 1.27 1
7.3
n n)1
2
Display
HONDA
7
15.1
1.27
B
A B
PCR–E20FS 21.65 11.43
Fig. C1 (a) PCR connector (soldering type)
450
www.plcworld.cn
TYPE : HIROSE FI40–2015S

USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MPG INTERFACE
MATING/HOUSING : HIROSE FI–20–CV
16.25 15_
11.43
1.27
Note
This connector does not
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 have contacts for positions
11,13,15,17, and 19.
5.5
2.2
9.2
1.7
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
13.35
19.2
Tab for
shield
connection
7
(4)
4.3
3
(3)
5
8.5
1.8 (1)
(2)
2.4 2.4
A A
Section AA S 20 18 16 14 12
(Standard 1/10)
See from the back (soldering side)
10 8 6 4 2
9 7 5 3 1
Fig. C1 (b) FI40 connector
451
www.plcworld.cn
TYPE : HONDA PCR–V20LA (for 6 dia. cable)

USAGE : GENERAL
9.5
21 11.4
(1)
HONDA
(2)
37
30
(3) (6)
(5)
(4)
(1) (2) Case

(3) Cable clamp
(4) Lock bracket
(5) Lock lever
(6) Set screw for cable clamp
Fig. C2 (a) Connector case (HONDA PCR type)
452
www.plcworld.cn
TYPE : HIROSE FI–20–CV

USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE
(1) (2) Case

(3) Lock bracket
(4) Lock lever
(5) Cable clamp
(6) Set screw for cable clamp
21±0.3
11.5±0.3
9.5±0.2
(5)
(6)
(4)
37"0.5
17.5"0.3
(3)
30±0.3
(2) (1)
Fig. C2 (b) Connector case (HIROSE FI type)
453
www.plcworld.cn
TYPE : FUJITSU FCN–240C20–Y/S (for 5.8 dia. cable)

USAGE : GENERAL
9.5
21 11.4
(2)
F
C020–02
37
30
Cable clamp
Screw
Lock lever
Fig. C2 (c) Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type)
454
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. C2 (d) Connector case (PCR type (Hirose Electric))
455
www.plcworld.cn
TYPE : AMP1–178128–3
(25.5) Circuit No.

DIMENSION
3 2 1
AMP D–3
22.8
16.3
19.24
0.6
10.16
5.08
7.15
4.05
6.55
3.1
3 2 1
Circuit No.
Fig. C3 (a) AMP connector (1)
456
www.plcworld.cn
TYPE : AMP2–178128–3
Circuit No.
(29.7)
DIMENSION
3 2 1
AMP D–3
22.8 " 0.3

Y
16.3" 0.3
(19.24)
0.6 " 0.3

10.16
5.08
" 0.3
" 0.3
7.15
4.05
6.55
3.1
3 2 1
Cricuit No.
Fig. C3 (b) AMP connector (2)
457
www.plcworld.cn
TYPE : AMP1–178288–3
USAGE : POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP1A 3

+24V INPUT 2 0V
1 +24V
(22.96) Circuit No.

DIMENSION
3 2 1
AMP D–3
X 22.8
16.3
16.7
0.6
7.62
3.81
7.15
4.05
6.55
3.1
3 2 1
Circuit No.
Fig. C3 (c) AMPconnector (3)
458
www.plcworld.cn
TYPE : AMP2–178288–3
USAGE : POWER CP1B 3

+24V OUTPUT 2 0V
1 +24V
DIMENSION Circuit No.
0.6
7.15
6.55
3 2 1
Circuit No.
Fig. C3 (d) AMP connector (4)
459
www.plcworld.cn
SEPARATE : AMP1–175218–2(Gold coated)

AMP1–175218–5(Tin coated)
REEL : AMP1–175196–2(Gold coated)
AMP1–175196–5(Tin coated)
WIRE : AWG 16, 18, 20
(21.8) A–A
±0.4
2.9
2.9 " 0.5

1
In case of reel
±0.5 3
B–B
17.8
±0.4
4.2
(9.3) (2.5) B
±0.2 A
2.9
" 0.5
" 0.2
5.5
3.4
–AMP
" 0.2
(f2.6)
2.5
(1.7) PLATING 1D–MARK

A B
PRESSER 1D–MARK
Fig. C3 (e) Contact for AMP connector
460
www.plcworld.cn
(2)
(4)
(1)
(3)
C
(5)
A (D)
(B)
Symbol Number of
Specification A (B) C (D) terminals
MR–20LMH (Plug)
39.3 44.9 39.8 17 20
MR–20LFH (Jack)
MR–50LMH (Plug)
67.9 73.5 44.8 18 50
MR–50LFH (Jack)
Symbol Name
Outer diameter of the cable
1 Connector cover MR–20L dia.10mm max
2 Cable clamp MR–50L dia.16mm max
3 Stopper
4 Screw for cable clamp
Plug (MR–20, 50MH)
5
Jack (MR–20, 50FH)
Fig. C4 (a) HONDA connector (case)
461
www.plcworld.cn
External dimensions of 50–pin connector
Fig. C4 (b) Honda connector (angled–type case)
462
www.plcworld.cn
13 2–M2
A
B
(1)
2.4
18.1
(2)
8.5
(3)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Number of
A B
terminals
MR–20RMH 32.8 27.8 20
MR–50RHF 61.4 56.4 50
Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
2 Screw 2.6dia.×8
3 Connector (MR–20,–50MH)
Fig. C4 (c) HONDA connector (male)
463
www.plcworld.cn
13 2–M2
B
A
(1)
2.4
19.9
8.4
10.9
(2)
(3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Number of
A B terminals
MR–20RMH 32.8 27.8 20
MR–50RMH 61.4 56.4 50
Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
2 Screw 2.6dia.×8
3 Connector ( MR–20,– 50FH)
Fig. C4 (d) HONDA connector (female)
464
www.plcworld.cn
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HONDA
MR–50MH
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (50–core,plug)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
MR–50FH
HONDA
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (50–core, jack)
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA
MR–20MH
8 9 10 11 12 13 (20–core,plug)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA
MR–20FH
8 9 10 11 12 13 (20–core, jack)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Fig. C4 (e) HONDA connector (terminal layout)
465
www.plcworld.cn
19.06" 0.2
3
32 max.
5.08
2
1
6 ±0.2
7.7
30
Manufacturer : Burndy Japan Corp.

Specification
Name (Connector maker Remarks
number)
Connector housing for cable SMS3PNS–5 Brown
For details on tools
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3
required for crimp
Contact terminals,contact the
(Solder type) RC16M–SCT3 manufacturer.
Cables : Cross sectional area : 0.75mm2(30/0.18)

Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm
Fig. C5 Connector made by Burndy Japan (3 pins,black)
466
www.plcworld.cn
CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE (HIROSE ELEC. CO.)

Specification HIROSE ELEC. CO.
HIF3BB–50D–2. 54R (50contacts)
HIF3BA
15.6
14.4
HIF3BB
1.27 1.27 1.09
1.27
Section A–A’ Section B–B’ ASS’Y DIAGRAM
MAIN BODY PROTECTOR CRAMP
A A A
2.54
D
6.0
A A’ B
3.6
6.0
6.0
1.27 2.54
B’ 3.81
B
D
3.8 :1
3.5
:2
:3
5.1
7.0 3.5
7.0
10.5
0.95
0.3
8.5
1.05
2.3 2.3
2.7
C 3.5
4.5
Dimensions
No.of
Description A B C D
contact
HIF3BB–50D–2.54R 50 68.07 60.96 62.23 63.6
FLAT CABLE CONNECTOR CONTACT NUMBER (HIROSE)
AOI MARK (SIDE)
20PINS POLARITY GUIDANCE
ROW A
ROW B
01 03 05 07 09
02 04 06 08 10
OUTVIEW FROM CONNECTOR SIDE.
50PINS
ROW A
ROW B
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
OUTVIEW FROM CONNECTOR SIDE.
Fig. C6 Connector for HIROSE Flat cable
467
www.plcworld.cn
+0.2
18
2 (pitch)
±0.15
13
0
20.5 –0.3
+0.3
21.6 0
Fig. C7 (a) Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)
468
www.plcworld.cn
Section A–A
Contact position
Detailed contact diagram
Excluding the crimp terminal
Product name
Fig. C7 (b) Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)
469
www.plcworld.cn
H
J
A 53.0 D 7.8 G 10.7
B 38.3 E 12.6 H 1.2
C 47.0 F 41.3 J 0.8
A
C A–A cross section
B F
A 10
E D G
6.1 10
A 10
2–3.05f
10.8
Fig. C8 (a) Punch panel connector for reader/puncher interface
Small round
M2.6 P0.45 screw Interlock screw head screw
1.2groove
6.1
12.7
1.2
6.2 Spring washer
Fig. C8 (b) Locking plate plate for reader/puncher interface connector
470
www.plcworld.cn
Honda MR type, 50 pins, male, connection printed circuit board soldering type connector
Type No. Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
MRH–50FD
Pin configuration of Honda MR connector, 50 pins, male
Viewed from the connector side
Fig. C9 Honda connector
471
www.plcworld.cn
Type: AMP 178214–1

Application: Used for the loader I/O board
Dimensions:
Fig. C10 AMP connector
Type: Faston terminal

Use: Frame grounding
Applicable housing: 170604–1 manufactured by AMP Japan, Ltd. or
FVDDF2–250 TYPE I (blue) manufactured by Japan Solderless terminal MFG. co.Ltd.
Dimensions:
7.62
Applicable wire
1.25 to 2.27 mm2
7.75
21.59
Fig. C11 Faston Terminal
472
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
473
www.plcworld.cn
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63003EN/04
B.1 This section provides supplementary information about the

recommended (FANUC–approved) 20–pin interface connectors used
OVERVIEW with the following target model.
B.2 FANUC i series

ADDITIONAL
TARGET MODEL
B.3
BOARD–MOUNTED
CONNECTORS
B.3.1 Models: PCR–EV20MDT (Honda Tsushin)

Vertical–type
Connectors These board–mounted connectors have been specially developed to
achieve the high packing density required for FANUC products. As
explained in the following subsection, Honda PCR series connectors can
be used as cable connectors because the mating mechanism of the newly
developed connectors is compatible with that of the Honda PCR series
connectors. To support this specification extensively, many connector
manufacturers are now developing custom–tailored cable connectors.
(Note that these cables cannot be used with screw–fixing cable connector
housings.)
B.3.2 Models: PCR–E20MDK–SL–A (Honda Tsushin)(straight connector)

Straight and PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL (Honda Tsushin)
(right–angled connector)
Right–angled
Connectors (for Spring These connectors are used for the main and option boards of the i series.
and Screw–fixing As cable connectors, they are compatible with screw–fixing connector
Connector Housings) housings as well as the spring locking connector housings.
474
www.plcworld.cn
B.4 Cable connectors consist of a connector main body and housing. The
models listed below are available. Those connectors not marked with an
CABLE asterisk are currently being mass–produced as manufacturer’s standard
CONNECTORS models. Those marked with an asterisk are produced according to custom
specifications by FANUC.
Use Type Manufacturer Connector Housing Applicable cable

model model outside diameter
Cable General Strand wire Honda PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA* f 6mm (f5.7 to 6.5)
connector use press–mount
(MDI, type Hirose FI30–20S* FI–20–CV2* f 6.2mm (f5.5 to 6.5)
IOLINK,
AMP, Fujitsu FCN–247J020 FCN–240C020 f 5.8mm (f5.5 to 6.5)
SPDL, –G/E –Y/S*
Molex 52622–2011* 52624–2015* f 6.2mmf (5.9 to 6.5)
etc.)
Strand wire Hirose FI30–20S* FI–20–CV7* f 6.2mm (f5.5 to 6.5)
press– (Low screw–
mount type fixing housing)
Soldering Honda PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA* f 6mm (f5.7 to 6.5)
type
Hirose FI40–20S* FI–20–CV2* f 6.2mm (f5.5 to 6.5)
FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV5* f 9.2mm (f8.9 to 9.5)
(FI40A–20S*)
FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV6* f 10.25mm (f9.5 to 11.0)
For Soldering Hirose FI40B–2015S* FI–20–CV* f 8.5mm (f8.0 to 9.0)

pulse coder, type (FI40–2015S*)
coaxial FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV5* f 9.2mm (f8.9 to 9.5)
cable, (FI40A–20S*)
linear scale,
FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV6* f 10.25mm (f9.5 to 11.0)
manual pulse
generator, Honda PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA* f 6mm (f5.7 to 6.5)
etc.
Fig. B.4 Cable connectors
475
www.plcworld.cn
Cable Connectors Strand wire press–mount connector :

With this connector, #28AWG wires are
press–connected to each pin at the same time.
The cost of producing a cable/connector
assembly with this connector model is much
lower than with connectors designed for
crimping or soldering.
Also, the following connector housing has
been newly developed for use with the i
series.
Connector model (manufacturer) Supplementary description
FI–20–CV7 (Hirose) Low connector housing, more compact than conventional models. The housing
can be fastened to a board–mounted connector by means of a screw lock. It is
intended mainly for connecting the board–mounted connectors used on the main
and option boards of the LCD–mounted type i series (see Section B.3.2). Note that
this connector housing cannot be used for conventional board–mounted
connectors.
Soldering type connector : Details of soldering type connectors and their

housings are summarized below.
Table B.4 Details of soldering type connectors and housings
D Connectors
Connector model (manufacturer) Supplementary description
PCR–E20FS (Honda) Soldering type connector for general signals. This is suitable for producing cable
assemblies in small quantities, as well as on–site.
FI40–20S (Hirose) Equivalent to Honda PCR–E20FS
FI40B–20S (Hirose) Has the same number of pins as the FI40–20S, but features a wider soldering pitch,
(formerly, FI40A–20S) facilitating soldering and enabling the use of thicker wires. Its reinforced pins allow
wires as thick as #17AWG to be soldered to the FI40B–20S (wires no thicker than
#20AWG can be used with the FI40A–20S). Note, however, that a thick wire, such
as #17AWG, should be used with a more robust housing like the FI–20–CV6.
FI40B–2015S (Hirose) Features a wider soldering pitch, attained by using the space provided by thinning
(formerly, FI40–2015S) out some pins. Also features tougher pins, compared with its predecessor, the
FI40–2015S. These pins can be soldered to wires as thick as #17AWG, provided
that the cable diameter does not exceed 8.5 mm.
D Housings
Housing model (manufacturer) Supplementary description
FI–20–CV5 (Hirose) Should be used with the FI40B–20S. This is a plastic housing designed for use with
a cable that is 9.2 mm in diameter.
FI–20–CV6 (Hirose) Should be used with the FI40B–20S. This housing, however, can be used with a
thicker cable (such as 10.25 mm) than is possible with the FI–20–CV5. Its
components are die cast.
In addition to the combinations shown in Fig. B.4, Hirose soldering–type

connectors can be combined with the housings listed below. Ensure that
the diameter of the cable used with each housing satisfies the
requirements of that housing.
476
www.plcworld.cn
Connector model Housing model

(applicable cable diameter)
D FI40B–2015S FI–20–CV (8.5 mm in diameter) only

(formerly FI40–2015S)
D FI40–20S FI–20–CV2 (f6.2mm) Those listed

FI40B–20S FI–20–CV5 (f9.2mm) on the left
(formerly FI40A–20S) can be
FI–20–CV6 (f10.25mm) used.
477
www.plcworld.cn
B.5
RECOMMENDED
CONNECTORS,
APPLICABLE
HOUSINGS, AND
CABLES
Table B.5 Recommended connectors, applicable housings, and cables
Connector name FANUC–approved FANUC–approved Compatible cable (cable diameter) Remark

referenced in the connector housing FANUC development
Connection (manufacturer) (manufacturer) FANUC specification number
Manual
PCR–E20FA PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA A66L–0001–0284#10P Plastic housing

Strand (Honda Tsushin) (Honda Tsushin) (6.2 mm in diameter)
press–mount type A66L–0001–0284#10P
FI30–20S FI–20–CV2 Plastic housing
(6.2 mm in diameter)
(Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric)
A66L–0001–0284#10P
FCN–247J020–G/E FCN–240C020–Y/S (6.2 mm in diameter) Plastic housing
(Fujitsu Takamizawa) (Fujitsu Takamizawa)
52622–2011 52624–2015 Plastic housing

(Molex) (Molex)
PCR–E20FA FI30–20S FI–20–CV7 Plastic housing

Strand wire (Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric)
press–mount type
PCR–E20FS PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA Plastic housing

Soldering type (Honda Tsushin) (Honda Tsushin)
FI40–20S FI–20–CV2 Plastic housing

(Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric)
FI40B–2015S FI40B–2015S FI–20–CV5 A66L–0001–0367 Plastic housing

(formerly (formerly (Hirose Electric) A66L–0001–0368
FI40–2015S) FI40–2015S) (9.2 mm in diameter)
15–pin soldering (Hirose Electric)
type
FI40B–20S FI–20–CV6 A66L–0001–0403 (*1) Metal housing
(Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric) (9.8 mm in diameter)
NOTE
*1 Cable A66L–0001–0286 has been recommended for use as a pulse coder cable. It can be
up to 20 m long. Two cables, A66L–0001–0402 and A66L–0001–0403, have recently been
developed. A66L–0001–0402 and A66L–0001–0403 can be as long as 30 m and 50 m,
respectively. (See Fig. 4 for detailed specifications.)
Both cables have the same level of oil and bending resistance (cable, 100 mm in diameter,
capable of withstanding at least 10 million bending cycles) as conventional cables, and are
UL– and CSA–certified.
478
www.plcworld.cn
Press–mount type
connector assembly
tools and jigs
Connector model FANUC–approved Wire forming tool Press–mounting Remark
referenced in the connector tool
Connection Manual (manufacturer)
PCR–E20FA PCR–E20FA PCS–K2A FHPT–918A Low cost

(Honda Tsushin)
JGPS–015–1/1–20 MFC–K1 (Note 1)
JGPS–014 PCS–K1
FHAT–918A
FI30–20S FI30–20CAT FI30–20/ID Low cost

(Hirose Electric)
FI30–20CAT1 HHP–502
FI30–20GP
FCN–247J020–G/S FCN–237T–T043/H FCN–237T–T109/H

(Fujitsu) FCN–247T–T066/H
FCN–237T–T044/H
FCN–237T–T062/H
52622–2011 57829–5000 57830–5000 Low cost

(Molex)
57823–5000 57824–5000
NOTE
1 Those tools indicated by shading are available from FANUC (specification number
A02B–0120–K391).
2 The tools available from each manufacturer are specifically designed for use with the
connectors manufactured by that manufacturer.
479
www.plcworld.cn
Materials for cable Machine tool builders are required to manufacture or procure the
assemblies materials for the cable assemblies to be used with their products. FANUC
recommends the following materials as being suitable for interface
connectors. Individual machine tool builders are encouraged to contact
each cable manufacturer for themselves, as required.
Material Use Constitution FANUC Manufacturer Remark

specification
number
10–pair cable General use 0.08mm2 A66L–0001–0284 Hitachi Cable, Ltd.

10–pair #10P Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
12–conductor Pulse coder, 0.5mm2 A66L–0001–0286 Hitachi Cable, Ltd. 20 m or less

composite cable linear scale, 6–conductor Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
manual pulse 0.18mm2
generator 3–pair
0.75mm2 A66L–0001–0402 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 30 m or less

6–conductor Usable on
0.18mm2 movable parts
3–pair
1.25mm2 A66L–0001–0403 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 50 m or less

6–conductor Usable on
0.18mm2 movable parts
3–pair
5–core coaxial CRT interface 5–conductor A66L–0001–0371 Hitachi Cable, Ltd. 50 m or less
cable coaxial
480
www.plcworld.cn
10–pair cable (a) Specifications

Item Unit Specifications
Product No. – A66L–0001–0284#10P
Manufacturer Hitachi Cable,Ltd.

Oki Electric Cable, Co.,Ltd.
Rating – 60°C 30V:UL2789

80°C 30V:UL80276
Material Conductor – Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper (ASTM B–286)
Insulator – Cross–linked vinyl
Shield braid – Tinned annealed copper wire
Sheath – Heat–resistant oilproof vinyl
Number of pairs Pairs 10
Conductor Size AWG 28
Structure Conductors 7/0.127

/mm
Outside diameter mm 0.38
Insulator Thickness mm 0.1

Thinnest portion : 0.8 (3.1mm)
Outside diameter (approx.) mm 0.58
Core style (rating) mm UL15157(80°C, 30V)
Twisted pair Outside diameter (approx.) mm 1.16
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Collect the required number of twisted pairs into a cable, then
wrap binding tape around the cable. To make the cable round,
apply a cable separator as required.
Lay diameter (approx.) mm 3.5
Drain wire Conductors Hitachi Cable : Not available

/mm Oki Electric Cable : Available,10/0.12
Shield braid Element wire diameter mm 0.12
Braid density % 85 or more
Sheath Color – Black
Thickness mm 1.0
Outside diameter (approx.) mm 6.2
Standard length m 200
Packing method – Bundle
Electrical Electric resistance (at 20°C) Ω/km 233 or less

performance
Insulation resistance (at 20°C) MΩ–km 10 or less
Dielectricstrength (AC) V/min. 300
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards.
481
www.plcworld.cn
(b) Cable structure
Wire identification table (Hitachi)

Insulator color
Wire No. First Second
wire wire
1
Twisted 1 Blue White
10 2 pair wire
2 Yellow White
5
Binding 3 Green White
9 3 tape
4 Red White
6 Shield
braid 5 Purple White
8 4
Sheath 6 Blue Brown
7
7 Yellow Brown
8 Green Brown
9 Red Brown
10 Purple Brown
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
Fig. B.5 (a) Cable made by Hitachi Cable
Wire identification table (Oki)
Insulator color
Dot mark
Dot mark
color
Pair No.
Drain (1 pitch) First Second

wire wire wire
1 1 Orange – Red Black

Twisted
10 2 –pair 2 Gray – Red Black
wire
6 3 white – Red Black
Binding
9 3 tape
4 Yellow – Red Black
7 Shield
braid
5 Pink – Red Black
8 4
Sheath
6 Orange – – Red Black
5
7 Gray – – Red Black
8 White – – Red Black
9 Yellow – – Red Black

10 Pink – – Red Black
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
Fig. B.5 (b) Cable made by Oki Electric Cable
482
www.plcworld.cn
Composite 12–core (a) Specifications

cable
Product No. – A66L–0001–0286
Manufacturer – Oki Cable, Ltd.

Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
Rating – 80°C, 30V
Material Conductor,braid–shielded – Strand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS C3152)

wire,drain wire
Insulator – Heat–resistant flame–retardant vinyl
Sheath – Oilproof, heat–resistant, flame–retardant vinyl
Number of wires (wire ons.) Cores 6 (1 to 6) 6 (three pairs) (7 to 9)
Conductor Size mm2 0.5 0.18
Structure Conductors 20/0.18 7/0.18

/mm
Outside diameter mm 0.94 0.54
Insulator Standard thickness (The mm 0.25 0.2

minimum thickness is at least
80% of the standard thickness.)
Outside diameter mm 1.50 0.94
Twisted pair Outside diameter mm 1.88
Direction of lay – Left
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Twist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the outermost layer

is right–twisted, and wrap tape around the outermost layer.
Apply a cable separator as required.
Lay diameter mm 5.7
Drain wire Size mm2 0.3
Structure Wires/mm 12/0.18
Shield braid Element wire diameter mm 0.12
Thickness mm 0.3
Braid density % 70
483
www.plcworld.cn
Sheath Color – Black
Standard thickness (The mm 1.1

minimum thickness is at least
85% of the standard thickness.)
Outside diameter mm 8.5Max. 9.0(1)
Standard length m 100
Packing method – Bundle
Electrical Electric resistance (at 20°C) Ω/km 39.4(1 to 6) 113(7 to 9)

performance (wire nos.)
Insulation resistance (at 20°C) MΩ–km 15
Dielectric strength (AC) V/min. 500
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards,
NOTE
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other
than the drain wire.
(b) Cable structure

The cable structure is shown below.
Drain wire
Red
0.18–mm2 twisted pair wire
7
6 White 1
Red Black 0.5–mm2 insulated wire
Red Binding tape

5 2
Red
8 black
Black Shield braid
4 3
Red Black black Sheath
9
White
The colors in the figure indicate the colors of insulators.
484
www.plcworld.cn
(c) Specifications
Item Specification
FANUC specification number A66L–0001–0402 A66L–0001–0403
Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
A–conductor B–conductor A–conductor B–conductor
Conductor Constitution 16/0.12 3/22/0.12 16/0.12 7/16/0.12

Number of conductors/mm (0.18mm2) (0.75mm2) (0.18mm2) (1.25mm2)
Typical outside diameter 0.55 1.20 0.55 1.70

(mm)
Insulation Color White, red, black Red, black White, red, black Red, black
(polyester)
Typical thickness (mm) 0.16 0.23 0.16 0.25
Typical outside diameter 0.87 1.66 0.87 2.20

(mm)
Pair twisting Constitution White–red, White–red,

white–black, and white–black, and
black–red black–red
Direction of twisting Left Left

Typical pitch: Typical pitch:
20 mm 20 mm
Assembling Number of strands or 3 6 3 6

by twisting conductors
Direction of twisting Left Left
Taping Twisting is wrapped with washi, or Twisting is wrapped with washi, or

Japanese paper, tape. Japanese paper, tape.
Typical outside diameter 5.7 6.9

(mm)
Braided Typical strand diameter 0.14

shielding (mm)
Typical density (mm) 80
Drain A 12/0.18 mm wire is roughly wrapped under braided shielding.
Typical outside diameter 6.4 7.6

(mm)
Sheath Color Black (matted)

(polyurethane)
Typical thickness (mm) 1.05 1.1
Vertical taping Vertically taped with washi under sheathing.
Outside diameter (mm) 8.5"0.3 9.8"0.3
Finished Typical length (m) 100

assembly
Short size Basically not approved.
485
www.plcworld.cn
Item Specification
FANUC specification number A66L–0001–0402 A66L–0001–0403
Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
A–conductor B–conductor A–conductor B–conductor
Finished Rating 80_C 30V

assembly
performance Standard Shall comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A 80°C 30V
FT–1.
Flame resistance Shall comply with VW–1 and FT–1.
Electrical Conductor resistance 103 or lower 25.5 or lower 103 or lower 15.0 or lower
performance Ω/km (20°C)
Insulation resistance 1 or higher

MΩ/km (20°C)
Dielectric strength A. C 500

V–min
Insulation Tensile strength 9.8 or higher

performance N/mm2
Elongation % 100 or higher
Tensile strength after aging At least 70% of that before aging

%
Elongation after aging % At least 65% of that before aging
Aging condition For 168 hours at 113°C
Sheathing Tensile strength 9.8 or higher

performance N/mm2
Elongation % 100 or higher
Tensile strength after aging At least 70% of that before aging

%
Elongation after aging % At least 65% of that before aging
Aging condition For 168 hours at 113°C
Cable cross
section Tape Braided shielding
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅWhite Red Twisted pair A
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Red
Black
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Red Black Red Black
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Solid wire B
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
White Black
Black
Red
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Drain
Sheath
486
www.plcworld.cn
5–core coaxial cable

D Specifications Item Unit Description
Specification – A66L–0001–0371
Manufacture – HITACHI CABLE CO., LTD.
Manufacture’s specification – CO–IREFV(0)–CX–75–SB5X0.14SQ
Number of Conductors Core 5
Inside Con- Size mm2 0.14
ductor
Components Conduc- 7/0.16
tors
(PCS)/m
m
Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire
Diameter mm 0.48
Insulator Material (Color) – Polyethylene (White)
Thickness mm 0.71
Diameter mm 1.90
Outside Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire (Rolled)
Conductor
Diameter of Com- mm 0.08
ponent–Wire
Density % 95 or more
Diameter mm 0.2
Jacket Material – Vinyl
Color – Black. White. Red. Green. Blue
Thickness mm 0.15
Diameter mm 2.6
Twisted Assembly Diameter mm 7.1
Thickness of Paper Tape mm 0.05
Shield Wire dia. Material mm 0.12
braid Tin–coaded soft copper wire
Density % 80 or more
Thickness mm 0.3
Diameter mm 7.8
Sheath Material, Color – Oil Tight Vinyl Black
Thickness mm 0.7 (Min. thickness: 0.56)
Finish Diameter mm 9.2 "0.3
Conductor Resistance (20°C) W/km 143 or less
Withstand Voltage (A.C.) V/min. 1000
Insulation Resistance (20°C) MW–km 1000 or more
Impedance (10MHz) W 75±5
Standard Capacitance (1MHz) nF/km 56
Standard Attention (10MHz) dB/km 53
Weight kg/km 105
Standard Length m 200
Package form – Bundle
487
www.plcworld.cn
Red
Red
Black Green
Green
Black
White Blue
White Blue
An example of circuit testing 20–pin interface cable
.
.
.
Ω
Resistor
Check .
every pin .
.
Cable (20–pin interface connector)
PCB connector PCR–E20LMD (Honda)
488
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
C CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
Maximum allowable cable length between units

Maximum
Cable type Use and condition cable length
(m)
MDI cable Control unit–to–MDI unit 50 m
I/O Link cable Electrical cable 10 m Note 2
Electrical–to–optical conversion 2m
adapter
Optical cable 200 m
Serial spindle cable Electrical cable (control 20 m

unit–to–spindle servo unit)
Electrical–to–optical conversion 2m
adapter
Optical cable 200 m
Position coder cable Control unit position coder 50 m
MPG cable Connector panel I/O operator’s panel 50 m

I/O module–to–manual pulse
generator
FSSB cable See APPENDIX D.
HSSB cable See APPENDIX D.
RS–232C 4800 baud or less 100 m

communication cable
9600 baud or less 50 m
RS–422 9600 baud or less 800 m

communication cable
19.2 kbaud 50 m
NOTE
1 The maximum cable lengths listed above apply only when
the respective recommended cables stated in the text are
used. If a non–recommended cable is used, the maximum
cable length may not be guaranteed. Cables other than
those listed above are used between units in the i series
CNC. See the respective descriptions in this manual for
details of these cables.
2 This cable can be extended to up to 15 m if it is used within
the cabinet.
489
www.plcworld.cn
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) B–63003EN/04
Purpose Description Specification Length
Spindle signal PCR–E20FA

cable
(when 3 or 4 serial A02B–
spindles are 0236– 5m
connected) K845
Electrical–to–electr
FI–20–CV7
ical
Spindle signal
cable
PCR–E20FA
(when 3 or 4 serial
spindles are
A02B–
connected)
0236– 5m
For serial K846
connection
between the PCR–E20FA
second and third
spindles
Spindle signal
cable PCR–E20FA
(when 3 or 4 serial
spindles are A02B–
connected) 0236– 1m
When an electrical K847
-to-optical
FI–20–CV7
conversion adapter
is used
Power supply AMP2–178288–3

cable for I/O unit
Control unit A02B–
(CP1B) 0236– 5m
á K843
I/O Unit
SMS3PNS–5
(CP31)
MDI signal cable

FI–20–CV7 A02B–
Integrated control 0236– 25 m
unit or stand–alone K812
type LCD unit
(CA55)
á A02B–
0236– 45 m
MDI unit LY10–DC20 K813
(CK1)
Power supply
cable for AMP2–178288–3
stand–alone type
LCD unit A02B–
stand–alone type 0166– 55 m
MDI (CPD2) K880
á
Stand–alone type AMP1–178288–3
LCD (CP5)
490
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
Manual pulse
generator cable
(for one unit)
FI40–2015S A02B–
Control unit (JA3)
0120– 7m
á
K847
Manual pulse M3 crimp style terminal
generator terminal
board
Manual pulse
generator cable
(for two units)
FI40–2015S A02B–
Control unit (JA3)
0120– 7m
á
K848
generator terminal
board
Manual pulse
generator cable
(for three units)
FI40–2015S A02B–
Control unit (JA3) 3 3 3 3
0120– 7m
á
K841
generator terminal 2 2 2 2
board
I/O Link cable

A02B–
Control unit (JD1A)
0120– 5m
á
K842
I/O unit (JD1B) PCR–E20FA
Control unit power M3 crimp style terminal

supply cable
Stabilized power A02B–
supply (24 VDC) 0124– 5m
á K830
Control unit
(CP1A) AMP1–178288–3
491
www.plcworld.cn
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) B–63003EN/04
Serial spindle
signal cable
A02B–
Control unit (JA41)
0236– 1m
á
K844
Electric/optical PCR–E20FA
converter
Serial spindle
signal cable
A02B–
Control unit (JA41)
0236– 5m
á
K810
a series amplifier PCR–E20FA
(JA7B)
492
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
D OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
The i Series CNC uses optical fiber cables for the following interfaces.
This table lists the usable combinations.
Interface Recommended Maximum allowable Applicable junc- Remark
optical cable transmission distance tion adapter
Serial spindle interface A66L–6001–0026#L~ 200 m A63L–0020–0002
I/O Link interface A66L–6001–0026#L~ 200 m A63L–0020–0002
High–speed serial bus A66L–6001–0026#L~ 100 m None

(HSSB) interface (Note)
A66L–6001–0029#L~ 55 m A63L–0020–0002 For junction only
Serial servo bus (FSSB) A66L–6001–0023#L~ 10 m None

interface
A66L–6001–0026#L~ 100 m None
NOTE
For printed–circuit boards with the following former ordering
information, the maximum allowable transmission distance
with –0026#L~ is lowered to 50 m, and connection with
A63L–0020–0004 is impossible.
·A20B–8001–0580 ·A20B–8001–0581
·A20B–8001–0640 ·A20B–8100–0100
493
www.plcworld.cn
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE B–63003EN/04
Notes on the (1) Supported optical fiber cables

specifications of optical (a) Internal cord type cable: A66L–6001–0023#LjRjjj
fiber cable C Cable length: 0.15 to 10 m
Code diameter: 2.2 mm × 2 cords
Tensile strength:
Optical fiber cord 7 kg per cord
Between optical fiber cord and connector 2 kg
Minimum bending radius of optical fiber cord: 25 mm
Operating temperature: –20 to 70°C
Unit: mm
7
6.7 14 max. 100 typ. Two cords are bound together.
21
Code
Fig. D.1 External dimensions of internal cord type cable

(b) External type cable: A66L–6001–0026#LjRjjj
Cable length: 1 to 50 m
Optical fiber cord diameter: 2.2 mm × 2 cords
Diameter of cable with reinforced cover: 7.6 mm
Tensile strength: Cable with reinforced cover – 75 kg
Optical fiber cord 7 kg per cord
Between optical fiber cord and connector 2 kg
Minimum bending radius of optical fiber cord: 25 mm
Minimum bending radius of cable with reinforced cover: 50 mm
Bending resistance (cable with reinforced cover): 1
0 million bending cycles at room temperature
(when the bending radius is 100 mm)
Flame resistance: Equivalent to UL VW–1

Operating temperature: –20 to 70°C
Unit: mm
8.2
6.7 19 max. 150 typ. 35 typ.
21
Code Bush
Reinforced cover
Fig. D.2 External dimensions of external cable
494
www.plcworld.cn
Table D.1 Standard cable length
Internal cord type cable External cable
A66L–6001–0023# A66L–6001–0026#
Specification Length Specification Length
L150R0 0.15 m L1R003 1.0 m
L300R0 0.3 m L2R003 2.0 m
L500R0 0.5 m L3R003 3.0 m
L1R003 1.0 m L5R003 5.0 m
L2R003 2.0 m L7R003 7.0 m
L3R003 3.0 m L10R03 10.0 m
L5R003 5.0 m L15R03 15.0 m
L7R003 7.0 m L20R03 20.0 m
L10R03 10.0 m L30R03 30.0 m
L50R03 50.0 m
L100R03 100.0 m
L200R03 200.0 m
2. Cable selection
D Always use an external cable (A66L–6001–0026#) when the cable
is to be laid outside the power magnetics cabinet or main unit
cabinet, where it may be pulled, rubbed, or stepped on.
D Use an external cable when part of the cabling is to be subject to
movement. For example, when connecting a portable operation
pendant box to the power magnetics cabinet, the use of an external
cable is desirable because the cable is likely to be bent, pulled, or
twisted repeatedly even though frequent system operation is not
expected. However, the force likely to be applied when the cable
is installed or moved for maintenance purposes does not need to be
taken into consideration.
D Use an external cable in locations where sparks or flame are a
danger. Although the internal cord type cable
(A66L–6001–0023#) is covered by nonflammable resin, the cover,
if exposed to frame for a long time, may melt, allowing the fiber
cable inside to burn.
D Use an external cable when the cable is expected to be pulled with
considerable force during installation (the force applied to the cable
must be within the specified tensile strength limit at all times). For
example, even though installing a cable in a cable duct can be
regarded as internal cabling, a cable of the appropriate type must
be selected according to the tensile force to be applied to the cable
during installation.
D Both the internal cord type and external cables have the same oil
and heat resistance properties.
495
www.plcworld.cn
3. Procuring the cable

All the optical fiber cables mentioned above are special cable products
with optical connectors, which are designed, produced, and tested to
ensure the required system performance and reliability. It is
technically impossible for users to produce these cables or process (cut
and reconnect) them after purchase. Users are requested to purchase
cables of the necessary length from an appropriate supplier. Cables are
available from either FANUC or any of the FANUC–approved
manufacturers listed in Table D.2.
Table D.2 FANUC–approved cable manufacturers and cable model
numbers (retail)
(1) Internal cord type cable A66L–6001–0023#LjRjjj
Manufacturer Model number Remarks
Japan AMP, Co., Ltd. :–353373–:
Japan Aviation Electronics PF–2HB209–::M–F–1 :: indicates the

Industry, Ltd. cable length (m).
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. H07–P22–F2VCFA–:: :: indicates the

cable length (m).
(2) External Cable A66L–6001–0023#LjRjjj

Manufacturer Model number Remarks
Japan AMP, Co., Ltd. :–353199–:
Japan Aviation Electronics CF–2HB208–::M–F–1 :: indicates the

Industry, Ltd. cable length (m).
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. H07–P22–F2NCFA–:: :: indicates the

cable length (m).
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. OPC201HPXF–::MB :: indicates the

cable length (m).
4. Handling precautions
(1) Protection during storage
When the electrical/optical conversion module mounted on the
printed circuit board and the optical fiber cable are not in use, their
mating surfaces must be protected with the lid and caps with which
they are supplied. If left uncovered, the mating surfaces are likely
to become dirty, possibly resulting in a poor cable connection.
496
www.plcworld.cn
Electrical/optical conversion module Lid
Optical fiber cable

Optical fiber cable caps
Fig. D.3 Protection of electrical/optical conversion module and optical fiber cable (when not in use)
(2) Optical fiber cable

• Although the reinforcing cover of the external cable has sufficient
mechanical strength, be careful not to drop heavy objects on the
cable.
• Grasp the optical connector firmly when connecting or
disconnecting the cable. Do not pull on the optical fiber cord itself.
(The maximum tensile strength between the fiber cord and
connector is 2 kg. Applying greater force to the cord is likely to
cause the connector to come off, making the cable unusable.)
• Once connected, the optical connector is automatically locked by
the lock levers on its top. To remove the connector, release the lock
levers and pull the connector.
• Although optical connectors cannot be connected in other than the
correct orientation, always take note of the connector’s orientation
before making the connection.
• Before installing an external cable, fix either a wire with a hook or
a tension member to the reinforcing cover of the optical connector
and pull the wire or tension member, as shown in Fig. D.4. This
is done to prevent a tensile force from being applied between the
fiber cord and connector. If no tensile force is applied between the
fiber cord and connector when installing the cable, you can hold the
reinforcing cover of the connector directly and pull it. In the case
of an internal cord, which does not have a reinforcing cover, apply
the same protective measures, as instructed in Fig. D.4, for that
portion of the cable where the two cords are bound together, in
order to prevent a tensile force from being applied between the fiber
cord and connector. In the same way as for an external cable, if no
tensile force is applied between the fiber cord and connector during
installation, you can hold the shielded part of the cable directly and
pull it. Because the combined tensile strength of the two cords is
only 14 kg, however, avoid applying too great a force to the cable
during installation, regardless of whether you have taken the
protective measures.
497
www.plcworld.cn
Optical connector
Reinforcing cover Optical connector
Reinforcing cover Wire with a hook

Tension member
Tape Tape
2 cords combined
Fig. D.4 Prior to installing a cable
D Take care to keep both parts of the optical connector (cable side and
PCB side) clean. If they become dirty, wipe them with tissue paper or
absorbent cotton to remove dirt. The tissue paper or absorbent cotton
may be moistened with ethyl alcohol. Do not use any organic solvent
other than ethyl alcohol.
D Fix the reinforcing cover of the external cable or the cord binding
portion of the internal cord type cable by using a cable clamp, as
shown in Fig. D.5, to prevent the weight of the optical fiber cable
from being applied directly to the connecting part of the optical
connector.
(Recommended cable clamp):
Recommended cable clamps are listed below. Use a clamp
that grasps the optical cable lightly; the clamp should not
apply excessive pressure to the cable.
For an external cable:
CKN–13SP (with sponge)(Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
For an internal cord type cable:
MN–1 (Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
498
www.plcworld.cn
Reinforcing cover of external

Optical connector Optical fiber cord cable or cord binding portion of
internal cord type cable
Bending radius of 25 mm or more

(Make the bending radius as large as
possible.)
Bending radius of 50 mm or more (for reinforcing cover)
Cable clamp Bending radius of 25 mm or more (for cord binding portion)
(Make the bending radius as large as possible.)
Fig. D.5 Fixing the cable with a clamp

D Any superfluous portion of the cable may be wound into a loops.
Should this prove necessary, make sure the diameter of each loop
is at least 150 mm (for an external cable) or at least 100 mm (for
an internal cord type cable). Winding the cable into smaller loops
may produce sharp curves that exceed the specified bending radius
limit without the user being aware. Such bending can result in a
greater transmission loss, ultimately leading to a communication
failure.
D When using a nylon band (cable tie) as a cable clamp, follow the
instructions given below. Also, take care not to apply a bending
force to one particular part of the cable when fixing it with a clamp.
Failing to clamp the cable correctly may cut or damage it.
External cable:
Do not clamp the uncovered portion of the cable with a nylon band.
When clamping the cable by the reinforcing cover, the clamping
force is not an important factor to consider. However, ensure that
the clamping force is as small as possible to ensure that the
reinforcing cover is not deformed by the clamping. If possible, the
clamping force should be 5 kg or less.
Internal cord type cable:
Lightly clamp the optical cable with a nylon band so that the cable
shield is not deformed. If possible, the clamping force should be
1 or 2 kg (make sure that no force is applied to the cable). Due care
is required when clamping the internal cord type cable because its
cable shield is weaker than the reinforcing cover of the external
cable.
499
www.plcworld.cn
5. Optical fiber cable relay

When used for the FANUC I/O Link application, optical fiber cables
can be connected by using an optical fiber adapter, as follows.
(a) External view of an optical fiber adapter
32"0.3
10.16
R1.6
6.6
8.2
21"0.5
3.2 42"0.5
18.2"0.5
2.2
(b) Example of the use of an optical fiber adapter
Optical fiber adapter (A63L–0020–0002)
Optical fiber cable Optical fiber cable
Mounting board
NOTE
Up to one relay points are permitte.
500
www.plcworld.cn
6. Optical fiber cable relay of FANUC high–speed serial bus

With the FANUC high–speed serial bus, special low–loss optical
cables can be connected by using a special low–loss optical relay
adapter as an optical fiber relay adapter.
(a) External view of the low–loss optical relay adapter
32"0.5
10.16
R1.6
6.6
8.2
21"0.3
3.2 42"1.0
18.1
2.2
(b) Example of use of the optical fiber relay adapter
Low–loss optical relay adapter (A63L–0020–0004)
Low–loss optical fiber cable Low–loss optical fiber cable
Mounting board
NOTE
Only one relay point is permitted.
501
www.plcworld.cn
7. Precautions for connection with low–loss optical junction adapter

D Features of and handling precautions for low–loss optical junction
adapter (A63L–0020–0004)
When optical connectors for a conventional optical junction
adapter (A63L–0020–0002) are jointed, the facing ferrules(Note 1)
are located about 60 um from each other. This is because the optical
fiber of conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cables
(A66L–6001–0008, –0009, –0026) may protrude from the tip of
the ferrules (by up to about several um), resulting in the fiber
protrusion being damaged when the ferrules are butted against each
other.
In the low–loss optical junction adapter, the ferrules are butted
against each other, thus greatly reducing the reduction in repeater
loss. Therefore, the two optical cables used with the low–loss
optical junction adapters must be dedicated to the adapters.
If a conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cable
(A66L–6001–0008, –0009, –0026) is used as even one of the two
optical fiber cables for joining the low–loss optical junction
adapter, both cables may be damaged, resulting in deteriorated
characteristics.
NOTE
Ferrule: Movable metal at the tip of an optical connector; the
fiber is bonded to the ferrule.
Ferrule
Protective cover
Optical cable
Optical connector
D Features of low–loss optical cable (A66L–6001–0029)

A low–loss optical cable is selected from conventional PCF optical
cables (A66L–6601–0026). The selected cable offers low loss, and
its connector section is given special treatment; the fiber ends are
provided with a depression so that the ferrules can be butted against
each other. The two optical cables used with the low-loss optical
junction adapter must be of low–loss type.
D Appearance of the low–loss optical junction adapter and cable
(how to distinguish them from conventional types)
The body of the conventional optical junction adapter is black, but
that of the low–loss optical junction adapter is blue. In addition,
the protective cover(Note 1) of the conventional PCF optical cable
is black, but that of the low–loss optical cable is blue.
502
www.plcworld.cn
8. Installing the optical fiber junction adapter

The optical fiber junction adapter should be installed within a cabinet,
as a rule. If it is impossible to avoid installing it within a cabinet,
protect the adapter and the optical cable portions (such as connectors
and cords) not covered with reinforcement coating from the outside air
by, for example, covering them with packing.
9. Environmental resistance of the optical fiber junction adapter

D The optical fiber junction adapter is not waterproof. Even when
optical cables are attached to both ends of the adapter, there are very
small gaps in the linked portions, so water resistance can not be
expected.
D When optical cables are attached to both ends of the junction
adapter installed in a normal environment (such as within a
cabinet), it is unlikely that dust will penetrate between the adapter
and optical fiber to the degree that it may hamper normal optical
linkage. If one or both ends of the adapter are left open, dust and
dirt may accumulate even when the adapter is in a normal
environment (such as within a cabinet). The dust and dirt on the
adapter ends is likely to hamper normal optical linkage when the
optical cables are attached. In such a case, clean the junction
adapter and the optical connector using the optical fiber junction
adapter cleaning method described below.
D Do not allow cutting fluid to splash over the adapter or those optical
cable portions (such as connectors and cords) that are not covered
with reinforcement coating. If the inside of the adapter and fiber
end surfaces are contaminated with cutting fluid, a malfunction
may occur.
10.Cleaning
If the optical fiber junction adapter, optical–to–electrical conversion
module, or optical cable are soiled, clean them according to the
following procedures.
D Cleaning the optical fiber junction adapter and optical-to-electrical
conversion module
First, clean the entire housing by wiping it with a cloth moistened
with, or by washing it in, ethyl alcohol or HCFC141B (alternative
CFC; High Shower spray can DS–2168, manufactured by Sun
Hayato). Similarly, wash the two sleeves in the adapter or wipe
them with a cotton swab or the like.
503
www.plcworld.cn
D Cleaning optical cables

For the optical cables, it is important to clean the connectors at their
ends. Any soiling on the optical fiber end surfaces will hamper
optical transmission, resulting in a malfunction. Wipe the optical
fiber end surfaces (that is, the ferrule end surfaces) thoroughly with
a soft, clean cloth (like gauze) moistened with ethyl alcohol or
HCFC141B, in the same way as described above. The use of cotton
swabs may prove convenient. The fiber end surfaces of low–loss
optical cables are lower than the ferrules. To remove any soiling
from the fiber end surfaces completely, push the cotton swab or
gauze into the depressions all the way through while rotating the
ferrule. If the ferrules and optical connectors are contaminated
with oily substances, and they may extend over a cleaned fiber end
surface when it is attached to the optical-to-electrical conversion
module, it is a good idea to wash them before wiping the optical
fiber end surfaces, using the procedure stated above.
504
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 E. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
E LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
Brightness of the When the ambient temperature is low, the brightness of the LCD
monochrome LCD decreases. (In particular, the LCD screen immediately after power–on is
dark.) This is not a failure but a property of the LCD. As the ambient
temperature rises, the LCD screen becomes brighter.
The monochrome LCD provides a function for adjusting its brightness.
For an explanation of how to adjust the brightness, refer to the
maintenance manual or operator’s manual of the i Series.
LCD with a touch panel The touch panel is operated by directly touching the LCD screen. For
touch panel operation, be sure to use the FANUC–supplied pen
(A02B–0236–K111) provided with the touch panel. If the LCD screen is
touched using a sharp–tipped pen, the surface of the LCD screen may be
damaged. Moreover, the LCD screen must not be touched by with your
fingers. Otherwise, the operability may be degraded, and the screen is
likely to become dirty.
Protection sheet for the A protection sheet is attached the face of an LCD with a touch panel to
touch panel protect the thin film of the touch panel and LCD. The protection sheet is
itself covered by a film to protect against damage in transit. After
connecting the CNC to the machine, peel off the film as shown below.
The protection film is less transparent, so the display screen will be less
visible if the protection film is not removed.
Protection film
When replacing the protection sheet, use the procedure below.

D Remove the protection sheet from the front of the LCD. Then, wipe
away any moisture or oil from the front of the LCD.
D Peel off the white backing sheet from the back (side which attaches to
the LCD) of a new protection sheet.
D When the white protection sheet is removed, the protection sheet is
ready to be applied. Attach the protection sheet onto the front of the
LCD. At this time, do not allow dirt and dust to enter between the LCD
and protection sheet.
505
www.plcworld.cn
E. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) B–63003EN/04
D Finally, remove the film from the protection sheet.

Ordering code of the protection sheet: A02B–0236–K110
Old protection sheet
White backing of new protection sheet
506
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
F MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
Overview Using the memory card interface located on the left side of the LCD,
input/output of data inside the CNC and remote diagnosis using a modem
card can be performed. This appendix describes the memory card
interface for data input/output. For an explanation of remote diagnosis
using a modem card, see the related document.
Compatible and SRAM card

incompatible cards D JEIDA (4.0 or later) Type 1 and Type 2
D PCMCIA (2.0 or later) Type 1 and Type 2
D PC Card Standard
SRAM cards conforming to any of the above standards can be used.
However, SRAM cards operating only on a power supply voltage of 3.3
V cannot be inserted physically. Such SRAM cards cannot be used.
The operation of the following FANUC–recommended SRAM cards has
been confirmed by FANUC:
256KB SRAM card Fujitsu MB98A90823–20
512KB SRAM card Fujitsu MB98A90923–20
1MB SRAM card Fujitsu MB98A91023–20
2MB SRAM card Fujitsu MB98A91123–20
Flash memory card

With the i Series incorporating personal computer functions, no flash
memory card can be used. With the i Series, Intel series 2 flash memory
cards (or equivalent) can be used. However, flash memory cards
operating only on a power supply voltage of 3.3 V cannot be inserted
physically. Such flash memory cards cannot be used.
Basically, flash memory cards with non–Intel on–chip flash memories
cannot be used. However, such flash memory cards, if formatted or
written by a personal computer, may be read with the i Series. The
operation of the following FANUC–recommended flash memory card has
been confirmed by FANUC:
4MB flash memory card Fujitsu IMC004FLSA
507
www.plcworld.cn
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE B–63003EN/04
Memory card capacity The capacity of a memory card usually indicates an unformatted capacity.
After formatting, the usable capacity decreases slightly. So, a memory
card with a capacity larger than the size of data and programs actually
stored needs to be prepared.
Example:When the size of data to be stored is 512KB
A memory card with a capacity of 1MB or more is required.
When a flash memory card is used, the last 128KB of the memory card
is used as a buffer area, so that the usable space decreases additionally by
128KB.
Memory card formatting The BOOT SYSTEM formats a memory card using method called the
FAT file system. The formatting method called the flash file system is
also supported. However, the FAT file system and flash file system are
not compatible with each other, and the read and list functions cannot be
used.
File operation with a Flash memory cards do not allow individual files to be deleted; all the files
flash memory card on a flash memory card need to be deleted at the same time. Accordingly,
the following operations cannot be performed:
D Deletion of an existing file
D Renaming of a file
D Overwriting of a file
Notes on formatting a CardPro uses the flash file system as standard to format a flash memory
flash memory card with card. When using CardPro to format a flash memory card used with the
CardPro boot system, use the following command to format the card.
A:CPFORMAT drive–name:/F:FLASHFAT/NOCIS
Using a flash memory

card formatted with the Ramzo CardPro
BOOT SYSTEM on other
systems Reading of files f f
Addition of files No file addition function

is available.
Listing of files f f
Using a flash memory

card formatted with Ramzo CardPro
other systems on the
BOOT SYSTEM Reading of files f f
Addition of files f
Listing of files f f
NOTE
1 Ramzo is a memory card reader/writer manufactured by
Adtech System Science.
2 CardPro is a memory card reader/writer manufactured by
Data IO.
508
www.plcworld.cn
Names and functions of

components
Write
protect
switch
Battery
case
Name Function
1 Write protect Writing to the memory card can be disabled by setting the
switch write protect switch.
Writing is enabled. Writing is disabled.
2 Battery case A battery for data backup is housed within an SRAM

memory card.
Flash memory cards do not have a battery case.
Inserting a memory card A memory card has an insertion guide to protect against reverse insertion.
Pay attention to the orientation of the memory card. The front of the
memory card must face the LCD of the i Series.
Battery The batteries used with FANUC–supplied SRAM memory cards were of
the CR2325 and BR2325 types.
These batteries were difficult to obtain, so the CR2025 battery was
introduced to replace these batteries in May, 1997.
By replacing the battery holder, the user can use SRAM memory cards
that used the previous batteries (CR2325 and BR2325) with the new
battery (CR2025).
SRAM memory cards
1) A87L–0001–0150#jjj
Manufacturer’s model: MB98A9jj33–20
Battery type
1) Before the change: CR2325 or BR2325
D Indication on the side of the memory card:
9jj33–20 S000 jjj jjj
2) After the change: CR2025 or equivalent
(common battery intended for use in electronic calculators)
D Indication on the side of the memory card:
9jj33–20 9157 jjj jjj
509
www.plcworld.cn
Battery holder replacement

1) By replacing the battery holder, the user can use SRAM memory cards
that used the previous batteries (CR2325 and BR2325) with the new
battery (CR2025).
2) The battery holder set for CR2025 is available from shops handling
Fujitsu electronic devices.
D Ordering code: MB98XXX–holder set–09146
D Contents of the set: Battery holder (1), battery (CR2025) (1),
manual (1)
Battery replacement (1) While pressing down the fixing claw, pull out the battery case.
(2) Replace the battery with a new one.

Match the + mark of the battery with the + mark on the battery case.
Battery case
(3) Return the battery case to its original position, then check that the
battery operates normally.
510
www.plcworld.cn
ATA CARD 1. Overview

Memory card–based data input/output in the current Series CNC can
be done only with a flash memory card. For those models shipped
from FANUC in and after October 1998, however, a flash ATA card
(5 V version) can also be used for data input/output. Because the flash
ATA card incorporates a storage device and controller, it enables data
input/output for a personal computer equipped with a PCMCIA
interface without using any special PC card writer.
2. Supported hardware versions and software editions

On models other than the FS20i, the following conditions must be
satisfied.
2–1 Hardware
The motherboard must be OF one of the versions listed below.
Model Printed–circuit board General version
specification
FS16i A20B–8100–0130 12E and later
FS18i A20B–8100–0135 12E and later
FS21i (with SA5) A20B–8100–0136 10E and later
FS21i (with SA1) A20B–8100–0137 10E and later
2–2 Software
The software must be OF one of the editions listed below.
System software
Series/model Edition
B1F1/FS16i–TA Edition 16 or later
B0F1/FS16i–MA Edition 17 or later
BEF1/FS18i–TA Edition 16 or later
BDF1/FS18i–MA Edition 17 or later
DEF1/FS21i–TA Edition 11 or later
DDF1/FS21i–MA Edition 11 or later
Boot software
Series Edition
60M3 Edition 09 or later
511
www.plcworld.cn
3. Inappropriate version/edition combinations

3–1 If neither hardware nor software are supported
No normal operation is guaranteed. For a listing of the symptoms,
see Section 3-3, “If the Hardware is Supported, but the Software
is Not.”
3–2 If the software is supported, but the hardware is not
An ATA card may not be recognized as such when it is inserted.
In this case, a symptom described in Section 3-3 occurs. Even if
the ATA card is recognized, however, FANUC does not guarantee
its operation.
3–3 If the hardware is supported, but the software is not
The FS16i–MA is exemplified below. The symptoms listed
below are only examples. They will not always occur.
If the system software is not supported (BOF1/Edition 16)
Operation Symptom (example)
Memory card–based input/output MEMORY CARD ERROR
READ/WRITE and other operations on I/O WRITE (READ, LIST) ERROR

the PMC I/O screen
FORMAT on the PMC I/O screen 930 CPU INTERRUPT
If the boot software is not supported (60M3/Edition 08)

Operation Symptom (example)
SYSTEM DATA LOADING MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE PLEASE FORMAT FLASH TYPE

CARD. HIT SEL.
MEMORY CARD FORMAT NMI OCCURRED, PLEASE POWER

OFF.
4. Flash ATA card specification

The Flash ATA card must comply with the following standards and
must be of one of the following types. However, it is not guaranteed
that all ATA cards that comply with these standards will operate
normally in the CNC. See Section 5 for those ATA cards whose
normal operation has been confirmed by FANUC.
4–1 Card standards
The ATA card to be used in the CNC must comply with PCMCIA
(Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) PC
Card standard Release 2.1 and PCMCIA PC Card ATA Release
1.02.
4–2 Card Shapes
PCMCIA Type I and Type II
4–3 Card Operation Mode
PC–ATA specification
4–4 Card Operating Voltage
ATA cards that can operate on 5 V (single voltage power source)
and 5 V/3.3 V (automatic switching) can be used in the CNC.
512
www.plcworld.cn
5. ATA cards whose normal operation has been confirmed

The following table lists those ATA cards whose normal operation has
been confirmed by FANUC (as of August, 1998). (All the listed ATA
cards are 5 V versions.)
Manufacturer Model Storage capacity
Hitachi, Ltd. HB286008A3 8MB
HB286015A3 15MB
HB286030A3 30MB
HB286045A3 45MB
Matsushita Electric BN–012AB 12MB

Industrial Co., Ltd.
BN–020AB 20MB
BN–040AB 40MB
NOTE
1 FANUC does not guarantee the normal operation of any
ATA card other than those listed above.
2 3.3 V versions of ATA cards cannot be used in the CNC.
3 5 V/3.3 V (automatic switching) versions can be used only
in the i Series.
For any CNC other than the i series, these ATA cards can
be inserted into a memory card slot, but they or the CNC
control unit may be damaged electrically when the power is
switched on. Be very careful when using these cards.
6. Miscellaneous
D The flash ATA card uses a quick format.
If your flash ATA card has not been formatted, do so using a
personal computer.
D It is impossible to use ATA cards with the memory card access
function of a C executor application.
513
www.plcworld.cn
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i B–63003EN/04
G ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
514
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
G.1 The MMX–Pentium version has been added to the i series with
display–integrated PC. This chapter describes the differences between the
OUTLINE Pentium version and the MMX–Pentium version, connections and
dimensions.
515
www.plcworld.cn
G.2 Refer to the following table.

COMPARISON
BETWEEN
MMX–Pentium
VERSION
160i/180i/210i AND
Pentium VERSION
Functional differences between the new and old functions on the 160i/180i/210i
with built–in display–integrated PC functions
Item MMX–Pentium version Pentium version Remarks
Hardware differences
Procurement On the following options, the procurement drawings differ from those for the
specifications Pentium version. Be sure to refer to separate sheet “160i/180i/210i New/Old
Order Specifications Comparison Table” before procuring for the
MMX–Pentium version.
The Pentium version cannot be used on the MMX–Pentium version.
D Basic unit
D PC card
D Hard disk unit
D Separate type MDI
D FA full keyboard
D PC I/F separate wiring unit
D ISA expansion unit
D Driver disk
Basic unit
LCD panel 10.4″ color TFT LCD (640 480 dot) 10.4″ color TFT LCD (640 480 dot)
or only
12.1″ color TFT LCD (800 600 dot)
External 290 200 mm (w/ 10.4″ LCD) 290x220mm Installation is the same
dimensions 340 280 mm (w/ 12.1″ LCD) for the unit w/ 10.4″ LCD.
PC card
CPU MMX–Pentium 166MHz Pentium 120MHz
Main memory 32MB, 64MB (16 MB not available) 16MB, 32MB, 64MB
VGA chip The Trident Cyber9320 exclusive The NeoMagic NM2093 exclusive Provided on driver disk
driver is required. driver is required.
Hard disk unit
Hard disk 3.5″ type used 2.5″ type used
External Installation dimensions differ from For details on
dimensions those for the Pentium version. (When installation, see
special installation is performed at separate sheet.
MTB, be sure to first check the
dimensions.)
PC I/F separate wiring unit, ISA expansion unit
External Installation dimensions differ from For details on
dimensions those for the Pentium version. (When installation, see
special installation is performed at separate sheet.
MTB, be sure to first check the
dimensions.)
516
www.plcworld.cn
Functional differences between the new and old functions on the 160i/180i/210i
with built–in display–integrated PC functions
Item MMX–Pentium version Pentium version Remarks
Separate type MDI unit, FA full keyboard

MDI unit, A special tool is required for A special tool is required for mounting
FA full keyboard mounting 3.5″ HDD to rear. 2.5″ HDD to rear.
Installation (vertical type for unit w/ 10.4″ LCD) 290 x 220 mm (vertical type)
dimensions (vertical type for unit w/ 12.1″ LCD)
Internal power supply differences
UMB area Memory space C8000H to DBFFFH Memory space CA000H to CBFFFH
can be used. and CD000H to DFFFFH can be used.
Address mapping Mapped to I/O space 378H Mapped to I/O space 3BCH
of printer board
Address mapping C8000H to CBFFFH CC000H to CFFFFH Setting for DOS
of PCMCIA driver PCMCIA driver
“PlayAtWill”
Setting and installation procedure differences
BIOS setting (1) Do not enable suspend. If suspend is
enabled, the power must be turned
OFF and then back ON again to
reboot after the suspend state is
entered.
BIOS setting (2) HDD standby mode migration time is HDD standby mode migration time is 0 Change the setting only
set to 15 minutes (default). minutes (default) and is then set to 15 when there is a problem
minutes (factory setting) on the system. Note,
however, that when this
setting is shortened, the
life of the HDD may
become shorter.
OS installation The VGA chip must be specified. No special items need to be specified.
method
Windows 95 The mother board resource and IDE Especially, there is no
device manager controller are marked by a “|”. problem in the operation.
ATA card use Setting is required.
Other
Suspend When suspend is selected in the
Windows Start menu, reboot is
possible only to turn the power ON
again.
CNC screen On a 12.1″ LCD type, this function
display function cannot be used.
There may be other functional differences in addition to the above. Be

sure to fully check on an operational machine.
517
www.plcworld.cn
G.3
CONNECTION
G.3.1
Connector Positions
(Basic Unit)
Rotary switch Fuse

(for maintenance)
Pentium MMX–Pentium Remarks

version version
Connector for PC separate wiring unit CNY1 CNY1 Same

PC serial port ch1 JD33 JD33 Same
MDI connector CA55 CA55 Same
Servo check connector CA54 CA54 Same
NC serial port ch1 JD36A JD36A Same
NC serial port ch2 JD36B JD36B Same
Analog output, HDI JD40 JD40 Same
I/O link JD1A JD1A Same
Serial spindle, position coder JA41 JA41 Same
FDD signal CD34 CD34 Same
HDD signal CNH1 CNH3 Modified
Mouse CD32B CD32B Same
FDD power supply CN2 CN2 Same
HDD fan motor – CN39 Added
HDD power supply – CN2B Added
Keyboard CD32A CD32A Same
24V input CP1 CP1 Same
In the MMX–Pentium version, CN2B and CN39 have been added, and
CNH1 becomes CNH3.
518
www.plcworld.cn
G.3.2 1) HDD signal (CNH3)

HDD Unit In the current Pentium version, the HDD signal connector (CNH1 or
CNH2) is provided for the 2.5″ HDD. When there is a PC separate
wiring unit, this connector is connected to; when there is no PC
separate wiring unit, the main board is connected to.
In the MMX–Pentium version, a 3.5″ HDD is used, and CNH3 on the
main board is connected to at all times.
2) HDD signal (CN2B)
Power is supplied to the 3.5″ HDD currently used in the
MMX–Pentium version by a power cable. (For the 2.5″ HDD
currently used in the current Pentium version, a power line is contained
in the signal cable.) Connect the power cable to CN2B on the main
board.
3) Fan motor for HDD unit (CN39)
In the MMX–Pentium version, a fan motor is used as a heat
countermeasure. Connect the cables coming from the fan unit
mounted on the HDD unit or the PC separate wiring unit to CN39 on
the main board.
519
www.plcworld.cn
G.3.3 The PC separate wiring unit for the MMX–Pentium version differs from
PC Separate Wiring that for the current Pentium version.
The PC separate wiring unit for the MMX–Pentium version has a serial
Unit port on the PC side (2 channels), a parallel port and a connector for the
ISA expansion unit.
Rotary switch
(for setting I/O address
between CNC and PC)
JN1
(ISA expansion unit)
Connector Pentium MMX–Pentium Remarks

Version Version
PC serial port ch2 JD36F JD36F Same

Parallel port JD9 JD9 Same
– JD37 – Deleted
– CN3 – Deleted
ISA expansion unit connector JN1 JN1 Same
HDD signal CNH2 – Deleted
In the MMX–Pentium version, JD37. CN3 and CNH2 have been deleted.
520
www.plcworld.cn
G.3.4 The figure below shows the differences in the wiring for the HDD unit and
Connecting the HDD PC separate wiring unit in the current Pentium version and new
MMX–Pentium version.
Unit and PC Separate
Wiring Unit
Without PC separate wiring unit With PC separate wiring unit
Basic unit Basic unit
Pentium
version
PC separate
HDD unit HDD unit
wiring unit
(2.5″) (2.5″)
Basic unit Basic unit
CN2B CN2B
MMX–Pentium
version HDD power
HDD fan cable
cable
PC separate HDD unit

HDD unit
Fan (3.5″) HDD signal Fan wiring unit (3.5″)
cable
521
www.plcworld.cn
G.4 The figures on the following page onwards show the external dimensions
of the units for the MMX–Pentium version and the panel cut dimensions.
EXTERNAL In these figures, space [A] should be ensured for improving the flow of
DIMENSIONS OF air, and space [B] should be ensured if necessary for wiring cables and
UNIT connectors. It is also desirable that space [B] be provided for improving
the flow of air. Space [C] may sometimes be necessary as space for wiring
cables and connectors depending on the ISA expansion board in use by
MTB.
1) The external dimensions and panel cut dimensions of the basic unit
with 10.4″ LCD are the same as for the current Pentium version.
2) Figures 1 to 6 show the external dimension of the basic unit with 12.1″
LCD.
Number of slots No slots 2/3/4 slots
Without soft keys and touch panel Fig. 1 Fig. 4

With soft keys Fig. 2 Fig. 5
With touch panel Fig. 3 Fig. 6
3) Figures 7 to 12 show the external dimensions of the FA full keyboard

and each of the units mounted on the full keyboard.
LCD size on basic unit For 10.4″ For 12.1″
HDD unit only Fig. 7 Fig. 10

HDD unit and PC separate wiring unit Fig. 8 Fig. 11
HDD unit, PC separate wiring unit and ISA Fig. 9 Fig. 12
expansion unit
4) Figures 13 to 18 show the external dimensions of the MDI and each

of the units mounted on the MDI.
LCD size on basic unit For 10.4″ For 12.1″
HDD unit only Fig. 13 Fig. 16

HDD unit and PC separate wiring unit Fig. 14 Fig. 17
HDD unit, PC separate wiring unit and ISA Fig. 15 Fig. 18
expansion unit
5) Figure 19 shows the panel cut dimensions of the basic unit with 12.1″
LCD, FA full keyboard and MDI unit.
522
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 1
523
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 2
524
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 3
525
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 4
526
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 5
527
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 6
528
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 7
529
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 8
530
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 9
531
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 10
532
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 11
533
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 12
534
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 13
535
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 14
536
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 15
537
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 16
538
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 17
539
www.plcworld.cn
Fig. 18
540
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 Index
ƠSymbolsơ Connecting one to four serial spindles, 134
Connecting the FANUC servo unit β series with I/O Link, 341
+24V input power specifications, 58
Connecting the HDD unit and PC separate wiring unit, 521
Connecting the high–speed skip (HDI), 122
Connecting the PC interface, 165
ƠNumbersơ Connecting the servo check adapter, 163
20–pin interface connectors and cables, 473 Connecting the signal ground (SG) of the control unit, 44
2A DO (output signal) connection, 236 Connecting to peripheral devices, 399
2A output connector pin allocation, 235 Connecting to the 7.2″ LCD unit by the display link (multiple
2A output DO signal specifications, 237 connection), 95
61–key MDI unit, 79 Connecting to the integrated type Series 160is/180is/210is, 396
Connecting to the manual pulse generator on the FS20i, 246
Connecting to the MDI unit for the FS20i, 79
ƠAơ Connection, 188, 213, 338, 342, 518

Connection between the basic unit and expansion unit, 158
About the MMX–Pentium version 160i/180i/210i, 514
Connection cable (supplied from us), 489
Action against noise, 40
Connection diagram, 226, 390
Additional target model, 474
Connection of basic and extension modules, 249
Address assignment by ladder, 343
Connection of battery for separate absolute detector, 156
Allocation, 359
Connection of connector panel I/O module, 225
Analog input connector pin allocation, 238
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by electric cable, 215
Analog input signal connections, 239 Connection of FANUC I/O Link optical fiber cable, 216
Analog input signal specifications, 241 Connection of FDDS (floppy disk drives) (signal & power), 170
Analog input specifications, 242 Connection of HDD (hard disk drive), 177
Analog spindle interface, 142 Connection of machine operator’s panel interface unit, 294
Connection of MDI unit (LCD–mounted type), 72
Connection of one to two serial spindles, 132
ƠBơ Connection of operator’s panel connection unit, 317
Backup unit, 399 Connection of operator’s panel I/O module (for matrix input),
261
Batteries, 63
Connection of operator’s panel I/O module and power
Battery for absolute pulse coder built into the motor (6 VDC), magnetics cabinet I/O module, 278
70
Connection of power supply, 149
Battery for memory backup (3VDC), 63
Connection of serial port, 167
Battery for separate absolute pulse coders (6VDC), 69
Connection of source output type connection unit, 324
Battery in the intelligent terminal (3 VDC), 68
Connection of the detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit via the
Board–mounted connectors, 474 display link, 99
Connection of the distribution I/O machine operator’s panel,
344
Connection of the PC interface connector panel unit, 179
ƠCơ Connection to CNC peripherals, 71
Cable clamp and shield processing, 47 Connection to FANUC I/O Link, 211
Cable connectors, 475 Connection to other networks, 395
Cable for power supply to control unit, 62 Connection to the full–keyboard and mouse, 174
Cable length for manual pulse generator, 245 Connection to the high–speed skip (HDI), 123
Cabling diagram, 54 Connection to the MDI unit (LCD–mounted type), 73
Centronics parallel port, 181, 204 Connection to the servo amplifiers, 145
Comparison between MMX–Pentium version 160i/180i/210i Connection when Two Channels of FANUC I/O Links are
and Pentium version, 516 Used, 220
Configuration, 1, 225 Connection with an intelligent terminal, 105
Configurations of LCD–mounted type control units, 2 Connection with input/output devices, 107
Configurations of stand–alone type control units, 4 Connection with the 10.4″/9.5″ LCD unit, 88
Connecting I/O devices, 109 Connection with the 7.2″ LCD unit via the display link, 91
i–1
www.plcworld.cn
INDEX B–63003EN/04
Connection with the display/MDI units (for the stand–alone Function overview, 294
type i Series CNC), 87
Fuse mounting position, 316
Connection with the standard MDI unit, 74
Connector (on the cable side) specifications, 312
Connector layout diagram, 196 ƠGơ
Connector layout for operator’s panel connection unit, 321
General connection diagrams, 189
Connector locations, 159 General–purpose DI signal connection, 350
Connector mounting diagram, 347 General–purpose DO signal connection, 354
Connector pin layout for source output type connection unit, Ground, 42
330
Connector positions (basic unit), 518
Control unit, 52
Control unit configuration and component names, 2
ƠHơ
Handling precautions, 200, 209, 394
Hardware overview, 15
HDD unit, 519
ƠDơ Heat output of each unit, 35
Design and installation conditions of the machine tool magnetic High–speed serial bus (HSSB), 201, 388
cabinet, 32
DI (general–purpose input signal) connection, 264, 281
DI (input signal) connection, 230
ƠIơ
DI (matrix input signal) connection, 266
I/O Link interface, 338
DI/DO connector pin arrangement, 263, 280
Input signal regulations for operator’s panel connection unit,
DI/DO connector pin assignment, 229 318
DI/DO signal specifications, 233 Input signal requirements, 154
Differences between the FS0 standard machine operator’s panel Input signal rules for the high–speed skip (HDI), 125
and distribution I/O machine operator’s panel, 344 Input signal specifications for source output type connection
Dimensions of source output type connection unit, 333 unit, 325
Distribution I/O setting, 258 Installation, 27, 160, 398
DNC1 interface, 386 Installation environment, 391

Installation environment conditions of control unit, 398
DNC2 interface (RS–232–C), 385
Installation environmental conditions, 193
DO (output signal) connection, 232, 267, 285
Installation method, 208
Dustproof measures for cabinets and pendant boxes, 54
Installation of the control unit, 52
Installation procedure, 183
Installation space, 195
ƠEơ Installing the stand–alone type control unit, 53
Emergency stop signal, 376 Intelligent terminal having a touch panel but no soft key, 192
Emergency stop signal connection, 349 Intelligent terminal having neither soft keys nor a touch panel,
189
Environmental requirements outside the cabinet, 28
Intelligent terminal having soft keys but no touch panel, 191
Ethernet (10Base–T), 402
Interface, 299
External dimensions of each unit, 407
Interface to the servo amplifiers, 146
External dimensions of unit, 522
ISA expansion board, 208
External view, 271, 287
ISA expansion units, 183
External view of operator’s panel connection unit, 323
ƠKơ
ƠFơ Key layout of separate–type MDI, 75
FANUC Handy File connection, 121 Keyboard addresses, 356
FANUC I/O Link connection unit, 334
FANUC intelligent terminal type 2, 186
Floppy disk drive (signal and power supply), 198 ƠLơ
Full keyboard, 175 Linear scale interface, 150
i–2
www.plcworld.cn
B–63003EN/04 INDEX
Liquid crystal display (LCD), 505 Power supply for the control unit, 57
Power supply specification, 194
Power–off sequence, 61
ƠMơ Power–on sequence, 60

Procedure for installing personal computer interface boards,
Machine operator’s panel interface unit dimension diagram 392
(including connector locations), 313
Machine operator’s panel interface unit mounting dimension
diagram, 314
Main power supply input, 197 ƠRơ
Major connection precautions, 311 Recommended cables, 394
Manual pulse generator connection, 244, 270, 287, 355 Recommended connectors, applicable housings, and cables,
Maximum number of units that can be connected, 343 478
Measures against surges due to lightning, 50 Relay terminal connection, 355
Memory card interface, 507 Remote buffer interface (including FANUC DNC1 and DNC2),
378
Module installation, 250 Remote buffer interface (RS–232–C), 381
Module specifications, 227 Remote buffer interface (RS–422), 383
Mouse, 176, 203 RS–232–C interface specification, 112
Multipoint connection, 386 RS–232–C serial port, 110
ƠNơ ƠSơ
Names of control unit parts and connector layout, 398 Separate detector interface, 147
Noise suppressor, 46 Separate detector interface unit specification, 149
Notes on installing a separate detector interface unit, 161 Separating signal lines, 40
Serial port, 403
Serial port 1, 206
ƠOơ Serial port 2, 182, 205
Operating environment, 200 Serial spindle, 132
Operating precautions, 185 Servo interface, 144

Shutdown, 194
Operator’s panel, 367
Signal assignment, 297
Optical fiber cable, 493
Soft keys, 207
Other signal addresses, 358
Specification, 335
Output signal regulations for operator’s panel connection unit,
320 Specifications, 193, 272, 288, 361
Output signal specifications for source output type connection Spindle connection, 126
unit, 326
Stand–alone type pulse coder interface, 151
Overall connection diagram, 261, 278, 346, 397
State of the LEDs on the machine operator’s panel interface
unit, 311
Straight and right–angled connectors (for spring and
screw–fixing connector housings), 474
ƠPơ System configuration, 296
PC separate wiring unit, 520
Peripheral equipment and connection, 196
Personal computer specification, 391
ƠTơ
PMC addresses, 310
Temperature rise within the cabinet, 34
Point–to–point connection, 387
Thermal design of operator’s panel, 38
Position coder interface, 143
Thermal design of the cabinet, 34
Power connection, 262, 279
Total connection diagrams, 20
Power supply capacities of CNC–related units, 29
Turning on and off the power to the control unit, 57
Power supply capacity, 29 Typewriter–style keyboard, 202
Power supply connection, 55, 348
i–3
www.plcworld.cn
INDEX B–63003EN/04
ƠUơ ƠVơ
Units that can be connected using FANUC I/O Link, 224
Use environment, 173 Vertical–type connectors, 474
i–4
Revision Record
FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) (B–63003EN)

www.plcworld.cn
D Deletion of the heat exchanger

D Addition of “Measures against surges due to lightning”
D Addition of “Dustproof measures for cabinets and pendant
04 Jul., 2000 boxes”
D Addition of “+24V input power specifications”
D Addition of “61–key MDI unit”
D Correction of errors
03 Aug., 1999 D Addition of Series 20i
D Addition of Stand–alone type

02 March, 1999
D Addition of Series 21i/210i
01 Mar., 1997
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

www.plcworld.cn
· No part of this manual may be

reproduced in any form.
· All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

Fanuc Hardware Connection MNL, GFZ 036867291

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fanuc Hardware Connection MNL, GFZ 036867291

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fanuc Hardware Connection MNL, GFZ 036867291

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

www.plcworld.

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 16i / 18i / 21i / 20i / 160i / 180i / 210i /

Connection Manual (Hardware)

GFZ-63003EN/04 July 2000

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

©Copyright 2000 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

B–63003EN/04 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are :

FANUC Series 16i–TA 16i–TA

FANUC Series 18i–TA 18i–TA

FANUC Series 21i–TA 21i–TA

FANUC Series 20i–TA 20i–TA

FANUC Series 160i–TA 160i–TA

FANUC Series 180i–TA 180i–TA

FANUC Series 210i–TA 210i–TA

FANUC Series 160is–TA 160is–TA

FANUC Series 180is–TA 180is–TA

FANUC Series 210is–TA 210is–TA

Chapter 2 Describes how to connect peripheral units to the i Series CNC.

Chapter 6 Describes how to connect spindle–related units to the i Series CNC.

Chapter 7 Describes how to connect servo–related units to the i Series CNC.

Chapter 11 Describes how to handle the emergency stop signal.

Chapter 14 Describes how to connect the i Series CNC to networks.

APPENDIX A) EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

CONNECTION MANUAL (Hardware) B–63003EN *

Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–TA OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63004EN

Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63014EN

Series 21i/210i–TA OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63084EN

Series 21i/210i–MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63094EN

Series 16i/18i/160i/180i–MODEL A PARAMETER MANUAL B–63010EN

Series 21i/210i–MODEL A PARAMETER MANUAL B–63010EN

MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–61803E–1

FAPT MACRO COMPILER (For Personal Computer) PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–66102E

FANUC PMC–MODEL SA1/SA5 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B–61863

FANUC PMC–MODEL SC/NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B–61863–1

FAPT LADDER–II OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–66184EN

FANUC Super CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63284EN

FANUC Super CAPi M OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63294EN

FANUC Symbol CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63304EN

FANUC Symbolic CAP T Basic Module V1 OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62824EN

FANUC Symbolic CAP T C/Y–axis Module V1 OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62824E–1

FANUC DATA SERVER OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62694EN

FANUC I/O Link–II CONNECTION MANUAL B–62714EN

FANUC Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63354EN

CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–63003EN *

OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For LATHE) B–63374EN

OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For MILLING) B–63384EN

OPERATOR’S MANUAL Machining Guidance B–62204E–1

OPERATOR’S MANUAL Machining Guidance B–62174E–1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–63005EN

PARAMETER MANUAL B–63380EN

PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–61803E–1

FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series PARAMETER MANUAL B–65150E

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65152E

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series B–65160E